Audio

249: How To Manage Cashflow Issues With Your Ecommerce Business With Victoria Sullivan Of Payability

249: How To Manage Cashflow Issues With Your Ecommerce Business With Victoria Sullivan Of Payability

Every physical products business requires capital in order to grow. And cash flow can often be a problem because you need to invest a large amount of cash upfront to pay for inventory.

In today’s episode, Victoria and I are going to discuss different methods of raising money along with the pros and cons of each.

Victoria Sullivan is a marketing manager over at Payability and she’s an expert when it comes to raising funds for your ecommerce business.

What You’ll Learn

  • Why financing is so important for an ecommerce business
  • Why it’s hard to get a loan from a bank
  • How does Payability work
  • The primary advantage using Payability
  • The Different funding options (Bank loans vs SBA Loans vs MicroLoans etc.) and the pros and cons of each

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and dig deep into what strategies they use to grow their businesses. Today I have Victoria Sullivan on the show and Victoria works at Payability and is an expert when it comes to keeping e-commerce companies fed with a constant stream of product. And today, we are going to discuss how to deal with cash flow issues when it comes to selling physical products online.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Privy who is a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. And right now I’m using Privy to display a cool wheel of fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prices in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this. And when I implemented this form email signups increased by 131%.

Now, you can also use Privy to reduce cart abandonment with cart saver pops and abandoned cart email sequence as well at one super low price that is much cheaper than using a full blown email marketing solution. So, bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers and recover lost sales. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Klaviyo is the tool that I use to build real quality customer relationships with my e-commerce store. And because all my transactions and email correspondence is tracked in Klaviyo, I can easily build meaningful customer relationships by listening, understanding and taking cues from my customers and delivering personalized marketing messages. So for example, with one click of a button, I can easily send a specific and targeted email to all customers with a lifetime value of over 100 bucks who purchased red handkerchiefs in the past year. And it is for this reason why over 10,000 brands have switched over to Klaviyo.

And right now, they have this cool docuseries called Beyond Black Friday where they discuss successful marketing strategies that their customers are using that you can emulate with your business. So, head on over to Klaviyo.com/beyondbf to check it out. Once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf, now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today, I’m really happy to have Victoria Sullivan on the show. Now, Victoria is a marketing manager over at Payability and she is an expert when it comes to raising funds for your ecommerce business. And as you probably know, every physical products business requires capital in order to maintain your sales, and cash flow can be a huge problem because you need to invest a large amount of cash up front to make money. So, Victoria and I are going to discuss different methods of raising money today, along with the pros and cons of each. And with that, welcome to the show Victoria. How are you doing today?

Victoria: Hey Steve, thanks for having me. This is great.

Steve: Hey, Victoria. You know, I’m sorry; I’m used to call you Vicki, Victoria sounds so formal. Is that what you normally go by, or?

Victoria: I normally go by Vicki but it’s fun to get called Victoria.

Steve: So Victoria, please give us your background story and how you got into this business of financing.

Victoria: I don’t come from a financing background common with sellers. I think a lot of them don’t come from business backgrounds, and yet run these awesome ecommerce businesses on Amazon. I came from an advertising background, and I was [inaudible 00:04:02] ad agencies here in New York and I really was looking for a change. I wanted to go in house. And I had some experience with technology, working on ad campaigns for Samsung and Skype. We’re actually on Skype right now. So, I decided to apply for Payability. I wasn’t sure how it would go since I don’t have any finance experience, but ended up being a great match. And I’ve been here for over a year now and I’m really loving it.

Steve: Cool. So, can we kind of talk briefly about why financing is so important for e-commerce businesses. And maybe you can talk about some of the customers that you’ve dealt with, why is it more important for e-commerce in particular, as opposed to some of the other business models out there?

Victoria: Financing is super important in e-commerce, especially on platforms like Amazon and Walmart, as you probably are aware; these platforms have really created unlimited demand among consumers. And you really need to keep up with that demand in order to scale your business and make every sale you can possibly be making.

Steve: Yeah, absolutely. And I know like for us, we run an e-commerce business, every time we place an order of a container, that’s a huge initial cash outlay and sometimes we haven’t even sold out of all of our existing inventory. And so oftentimes, we’re just piping and all that money back into the inventory and sometimes if our businesses growing, we need even more money. And so, it’s definitely a huge factor, especially in e-commerce when you have to put all this money up front for your inventory.

Victoria: Yeah, absolutely.

Steve: So, what I’m hoping to do today is talk about some of the different financing options out there. And I figured let’s start with Payability first before going down some of the other routes. What does Payability do?

Victoria: Sure, so we’re financing company, and exclusively for Amazon and e-commerce sellers. We also have financing solutions on Walmart, Shopify, Etsy, Tophatter and a bunch of other different marketplaces and we plan on adding even more marketplaces this year. Financing products are created exclusively for the needs of e-commerce sellers. And we have two different products; our first product is our daily payments product, which is called Instant Access. So, instead of getting paid every 14 plus days, like you do on Amazon, you’re going to get paid your daily cash flow and get paid every day. So you always have money on hand to place an order, to pay your employees, or order shipping materials or whatnot. So, that’s just like continuous cash flow to grow your business.

Steve: So you’re getting paid every day, but what is the cost of getting paid so often?

Victoria: Sure, so for that we charge a 2% fee on the gross, the total sales.

Steve: Okay, so I’m sorry, you get paid every single day 2%. And so if you amortize that out to a year, do you know what the yearly interest rate comes out to be?

Victoria: Since it is a factoring product, there are no interest rates; it’s a flat fee, yeah.

Steve: Okay. And so can we contrast this then to like getting a traditional bank loan?

Victoria: I would say it’s completely different as far as any traditional loan, and that’s more like financing your business with someone else’s money. But this is financing your business with your own money. So you’re assuming a lot less risk. And again, it’s your own money; it scales up and down with you. And so, it’s very different from a traditional loan, but it can be used alongside a traditional loan.

Steve: Interesting, so let’s talk about that a little bit. So, is there like a monthly fee to use the service then? Because let’s say, I don’t make any money that month, does that mean I don’t owe anything?

Victoria: The fee is based on how much money you’ve made. So, it’s just a flat 2% fee on your gross sales and on your total sales. So yeah, it is contingent on how much you’ve made.

Steve: So, do I need to do anything to qualify for this? So, let’s say I come in, and I’m only making like $1,000 a month. And then there’s some months where I don’t make that much at all, is it just completely variable?

Victoria: So you do need to make a certain amount of sales in order to qualify. We require around 90 days of a consistent selling history and an average of around $2,000 a month in sales. You need around $100 to cash out every day so that’s why we structure it that way. But again, so it’s a pretty small minimum, you definitely don’t have to be a big seller to use it and start scaling your business. Another thing I should point out about all our products, and kind of what makes us unique for e-commerce sellers is that we don’t check your credit.

We don’t ask for tax documents. We don’t ask for any bank statements like our more traditional financing company would, it is all based on your Amazon account health and sales performance. So again, no credit polls, and you’re just going to get rewarded with financing for being a good seller, because Amazon does provide us with data to see how you’re performing and how good a seller you are and that’s kind of how we evaluate you.

Steve: Interesting. So what are the minimums actually in order to qualify?

Victoria: So for daily payouts, it’s an average of $2,000 a month in total sales.

Steve: Okay, it’s not that much at all, okay.

Victoria: And around 90 days of sales history.

Steve: Okay. And if there’s certain months of very low sales, then it doesn’t matter, right, once you qualify, you’re pretty much…

Victoria: We evaluate each customer individually. But yeah, once you’re on, if you have very low sales, then what usually happens is we do sunset those accounts, but usually that doesn’t happen.

Steve: Okay. So, all right so if we’re contracting like a traditional bank loan, where you’re getting this loan upfront that you need to pay back, there’s the potential that you can’t pay back the bank loan and then they can start repossessing stuff. Whereas with Payability, you’re just taking a percentage out of someone’s earnings on Amazon and so there’s no real risk of a default per se, because it’s not really a loan. Is that accurate?

Victoria: Yeah, it’s totally accurate. This is a factor; they get automated factoring service for Amazon and e-commerce sellers so there really isn’t a lot of risk on your part. It’s just getting your own money faster, and putting it to work faster.

Steve: Okay. And then 2%, that sounds like kind of like on the order of like a credit card charge, right? Like, if I was taking credit cards through Stripe, I get charged 2.9%, you can kind of think of it analogous to that in terms of fees?

Victoria: Yeah, absolutely. It’s definitely equivalent to like your payment processor that you would pay if you had a physical store that was accepting visa cards; you can definitely compare it to that.

Steve: So, why would someone use this as opposed to just like credit card financing, which is readily available, like you don’t have to go through any application process, you can just max out your credit cards?

Victoria: Maxing your credit cards also does create a lot of risk. And like I mentioned before, demand on Amazon, a lot of people sell, even if they do have really high credit limits, if they have a really hot product, a lot of people sell a lot more than their credit limit will allow. So they really need to catch out every day or more often in order to pay those credit cards down and keep ordering the inventory that they need to keep scaling their business. It’s all about just getting every sale you can possibly get.

Steve: So in terms of payment, how does it work and how do you enforce that the seller is going to pay you?

Victoria: So, how it works is when you sign up for Payability for a daily payments product, you switch out the bank account on your Amazon account to our account. So, you would get paid by Payability every day. And then we would get paid by Amazon.

Steve: I see. Okay and so that’s why you have such a high approval rate, right? You’re just doing it based on Amazon sales, you get the money first and then you pay out to the seller.

Victoria: So yeah, so we advance the seller on the money that we see in the Amazon account each day, and then we get paid back by Amazon. So you don’t have to go in and write us a check or anything like you would with a more traditional loan, it’s just directly in the flow of funds.

Steve: Can we talk about what happens for refunds, suspensions, and some of those special cases.

Victoria: So as far as refunds, we only advance you 80% of your payout every day and that’s to cover returns and charge backs. So, that usually covers that and then we release that 20% to you when we recruit the funds from Amazon usually at the end of the 14 day period. As far as suspension, when you are suspended from Amazon, you are also suspended from Payability; we don’t continue to send you any more funds until you’ve worked it out with Amazon. Well, it’s like we will have advanced to you some of your Amazon payment go to you, hey, you got suspended from Amazon, pay us back that money right now. We don’t do that, but we do put a hold on those funds with Amazon. So in case your account doesn’t get reinstated or we can’t get ahold of you, we are able to recoup the money that we advanced you.

Steve: Okay. And how invasive are you guys into the Amazon account? So for example, let’s say I was a seller, and I was doing some sketchy activity like buying reviews or whatnot, and I was just counting on the immediate payout from you guys to get the money before I was suspended, for example, in the worst case, do you guys monitor the health of the Amazon accounts?

Victoria: So, we do have over two years of machine learning that kind of picked up on these behaviors of people who have defrauded us in the past if that makes sense.

Steve: Yeah.

Victoria: So, our system runs — the computer runs 24 hours a day and a lot of times, it’ll spot these behaviors and flag that account. And sometimes something is indeed going on and sometimes nothing is going on, the seller has perfectly reasonable explanation as to what happened. But we usually stop advancing funds until we get ahold of them to talk about what’s going on.

Steve: Okay, can we talk a little bit about just like Payability versus like Amazon loans. I get these emails all the time where Amazon will just loan me a set amount of money based on the amount of sales that I’m generating. And I guess if Amazon is just willing to give me a loan without anything, they’re obviously pretty confident that I can pay it back. So, what are the pros and cons and why would I go with one or the other?

Victoria: You can definitely go with both. We work really well in conjunction with Amazon loans, about 40% of our customers have Amazon loans and we work really well to accommodate that. That’s also a great tool you can use to grow your business. So definitely it doesn’t have to be one or the other, especially with our daily payments product, they can really complement each other.

Steve: I see. So people are getting loans up front to fund their inventory and getting their money back immediately they can funnel back into the inventory?

Victoria: Yeah, absolutely or other aspects like paying your VAs.

Steve: Let me ask you this, I’m just thinking kind of like on my feet right now. Typically you get paid out from Amazon fairly often. So what can you do with an extra week or two weeks’ worth of money? Like what are some scenarios where you’ll need the money like that quickly and that immediately?

Victoria: So, with a lot of the bigger sellers, I think they find it challenging where they have hundreds if not thousands of skews and they have many different suppliers, all of which that want their money at different times on different terms. They don’t have to worry about constantly having to put this on a credit card and borrow here to cover all of those orders at different times of the month, they’re just able to cash out every day, cover the order, pay cash and not think about it.

Steve: I see, can you give me some examples of maybe some of your customers where this is like an absolute necessary thing?

Victoria: Sure. Yeah, we’re actually shooting a video with a customer in Atlanta and they came out with a private — they have a private label allergy test product for pets and people, a really cool product. It’s really taken off on Amazon and they have no other financing, no other loans, no investors, and they finance their entire operation really just off daily payments. They had a lot of surprises before where they had the inventory, but sales are spiking in December or during the holiday season and they need to order a bunch of shipping materials at the drop of a hat. They can just cash out that day, cover that order and they’re done. They’re not thinking about it, they’re not putting a little bit on this credit card, maybe borrowing a little bit from parents, may be borrowing a little bit from here in order to scale the business and cover that order, they’re just cashing out and not even thinking about it.

Steve: I see. So for these customers, like even within like a couple week window, they need the cash quickly?

Victoria: Yeah, absolutely just with the demand of Amazon, and then they want to scale their business quickly. So, that’s why they’re cashing out and really benefiting from being able to pay different people at different times, being able to order supplies at the drop of a hat, make payroll, hire extra people. It really gives you more flexibility around your business because you’re not dependent on that payment coming in order to cover these expenses; you’re just going to be able to cover them.

Steve: So, I’m just curious, and I’m not sure you will have the answer to this question. But if you were to do like a case study of someone who has the funding and who does not, I’m just wondering if you have any statistics in terms of growth where you’re funneling everything quickly into your business versus not.

Victoria: So Marketplace Poll actually did a case study over a year ago, I’m going to bring it up here on my computer and I’ll read you some of those statistics. But it’s like you said, people who got paid sooner did scale there businesses a lot faster, and in ways you wouldn’t think. It’s not just growing their catalog of products; their positive reviews also went up as did their overall rank within Amazon. Because as you probably already know from selling on Amazon, stock out can be really detrimental to an Amazon business in that and you’re not only just losing sales today, you’re also losing sales tomorrow because you are going to lose a lot of your rank within Amazon and you’re going to have to kind of get back to where you started. So, because of that a lot of people have been able to avoid stock outs and they’ve increased their marketplace pulse rank because they haven’t had to play that game of catch up.

Steve: Right. I should have warned you ahead of time that I was going to ask this. What else does that study say? I’m just very curious.

Victoria: Sure. Yeah, I can certainly send you the link. It’s over a six month period of setting Payability to customers versus non Payability customers. And Payability customers increase their rank by an average of 26.4% after six months, while non Payability customers decrease their rank by an average of 22.1% after six months.

Steve: So, I’m just doing some mental calculations in my head right now. If I were to pay 2% of everything, if you kind of treat it like a loan and amortize it over like an entire year, it seems like the rate overall is significantly higher than getting a loan right? And so, I was just kind of curious of what are kind of like the ideal businesses for this? When would you choose to get a loan or even do crowdfunding and that sort of thing versus Payability, and when do they work well together?

Victoria: Sure. So yeah, I mean like you said, Payability definitely is not the cheapest way to fund your business but it is the fastest and most flexible way and it is a product designed for e-commerce sellers. So yeah, a loan or a credit card is definitely probably going to be cheaper for you, but this gives you more speed and flexibility. For example, because we don’t pull credit or anything, we’re able to approve people I know in less than 24 hours. We have another product called Instant Advance which is kind of like a merchant cash advance but for Amazon and e-commerce sellers, and here’s a good case city on that and how it gives you more speed and flexibility.

We had a seller that was on daily payments, it’s a Walmart seller actually and his supplier was having a huge sale. So he gave us a call Friday morning saying, I need 15 grand to buy from my supplier sails which he warehouses and he wants to sell me this inventory super cheap. So, Friday morning, we were able to approve him for a $15,000 instant advance, and he got his money that afternoon. He went to his supplier Saturday and bought the inventory. And with a bank, that’s going to take you at least two weeks and require a ton of paperwork, and by then somebody else has bought the inventory. So, that’s kind of what the benefits are. If you really need that speed and that scalability as a lot of sellers do, that’s where Payability comes in.

Steve: Actually no, that makes a whole lot of sense because getting a bank loan, sometimes you don’t even qualify right, sometimes you need a huge track record of sales in order to get a bank loan especially if you’re like a six figure seller and you don’t even have like a two or three year track record, it can be difficult to get a blown actually in my experience at least.

Victoria: Yeah, we hear that all the time and banks don’t really understand FBA or anything like that; they’re going to want to hold your inventory as collateral. And when you tell them my inventory is across 18 different FBA warehouses, they’re going to say, I don’t understand that, I can’t give you a loan based on that. But where capability is different is we’re actually looking directly at your Amazon account, seeing that you have the sales, seeing that you have even more potential and getting your money in 24 hours, no credit checks.

Steve: Okay. So, it’s okay, I think I’m getting a better picture of this now. So, it seems like if you have the time and you’re not in any urgency, perhaps a bank loan is a cheaper choice, but as you’re just kind of running your business, you’re going to run to these cash flow issues and Payability just helps smooth everything out for you.

Victoria: Yeah, absolutely. Yeah, if you can get approved and you have the time, a bank loan is probably the way to go. But a lot of our customers again do use both; they use both the daily payments and get bank loans too for bigger inventory.

Steve: Can I ask if there’s any sort of ideal business for this certain funding model? And immediately comes to mind actually is like a parallel, right? I need to outlay a large amount of cash for all these different sizes and all these different skews, especially over the holidays. That would be like the first industry that comes to mind. Are there any patterns in the types of customers that you have for this that is ideal for this service?

Victoria: Yeah, I haven’t really seen like a certain type of business or a type of category that’s really big into this business, we just see a business that seeing growth on Amazon and wants to take it to the next level, but it needs additional financing to do so. So, really just fast growing e-commerce businesses, but I haven’t seen a certain category or anything as far as our customer base.

Steve: And are most of your customers, are they larger businesses or their smaller guys too that have been taking advantage of this?

Victoria: We see everything from people who are doing around $2,000 a month to people who are doing well over a million a month benefiting from our service depending on their business model.

Steve: I’m just curious, for someone who’s just doing $2,000 a month, why would they need the money so quickly? Have you interviewed any of these people? I’m just kind of curious.

Victoria: Sure. I think a lot of them are doing retail arbitrage to just kind of get started. And even if you’re getting only $100 a day, if you go to Walmart, you can definitely buy a lot of inventory there.

Steve: Okay. That makes a whole lot of sense actually, because I was thinking of private label and oftentimes you have to make your order two to three months in advance, so even if you were to get the money sooner rather than later, it might only save you a couple of weeks. But retail arbitrage, you need the money every day, pretty much. So that makes a whole lot of sense.

Victoria: Yeah, I love them. I started retail arbitrage just to get going on Amazon and then I can go into wholesale and private label.

Steve: So, if I’m a seller and I’m looking for funding, and we talked about a bunch of different ways to get money. There’s also micro loans which we kind of haven’t talked about yet. Those are where it’s kind of a way to raise money where a whole bunch of people contribute, there’s like Lending Club and those sorts of services, can you kind of talk about why you’d go with one or the other in terms of that as well?

Victoria: I would say that probably the same thing with speed and scalability. I’m sure [inaudible 00:27:11] a while for all of these different loans to come together. But if you come to Payability, and you decide that’s what you want to do, we just take a look at your Amazon account and within 24 hours we can get you paid. So, I think again, if you have more time, that might be a good option for you.

Steve: Does this only work for Amazon? Like if I’m running my own e-commerce store, can I also use it?

Victoria: We also have, we have clients across at Walmart, Shopify, Etsy, Tophatter, Newegg. And we keep adding — Jet, we keep adding new marketplaces. So absolutely not just for Amazon, it’s for general e-commerce sellers.

Steve: How does Shopify work, is it the same thing like the money gets deposited into your account, and then it gets paid out?

Victoria: So, we don’t have daily payments on Shopify, we just do instant advance on there since they do pay every day or every other day. And it yeah, it works very similarly. We’re always directly — we like to stay directly in the flow of funds just to make it easier for us and the customer that way, you’re not writing us a check like you would on a loan. It’s just you’re making the sales, you’re scaling your business and we’re getting paid.

Steve: Okay. It seems to me after our conversation today, I think the biggest factor with your service at least is peace of mind, right? You don’t have this debt hanging over your head; it’s just kind of taken out of your existing funds, and there’s no worry factor, I guess.

Victoria: Yeah, that’s why a lot of people use us, they don’t want to worry about the, again, the debt hanging over their head, or if all of a sudden their sales scale up, they have the inventory, but they need to order a lot of shipping materials in a short amount of time, they don’t have to think about it. So, it’s two minutes of your day to manage cash flow, just going into the Payability app, and — well we don’t have an app yet, but website and cashing out. So, it cuts a lot of time for customers. They said they used to spend hours a week figuring out how they were going to pay for different expenses of a growing business, and now they don’t even think about how they cashed out that day and they paid for what they needed to pay for, and they just continue their growth.

Steve: Okay. So if I were to just kind of sum up our conversation today, it sounds like if you have a lot of time, then it’s probably in your best interest to try to get a loan. But oftentimes, in the spirit of running a business, it’s never going to be that smooth, and you can never predict things in advance. And so, it’s fine to combine both of these services. But as you run your business, if you need money, and it’s busty at times, Payability helps smooth everything out.

Victoria: Yeah, absolutely, I mean opportunity cost is huge in e-commerce and you don’t want to be missing out on sales.

Steve: And the two services work well together. Is there any way for me to like pause it from time to time when I don’t think I need the money that quickly?

Victoria: So for [inaudible 00:30:25], you can’t turn it off day to day, week to week; we just have a 30 day cancellation policy. So you absolutely can — so it is flexible, not as flexible as I don’t need it this week, you’ll turn it off, but it is a 30 day cancellation policy. So, a lot of people do use it seasonally. They only need it in Q4, they cancel December 1st, and by January 1st they’re no longer there.

Steve: That was my next question because that makes a whole lot of sense. Like, I definitely might want to turn this on during the holiday season, where things are just absolutely crazy. But then when it’s slower, maybe like during the summer months, I might want to turn this off.

Victoria: Yeah, there’s no cancellation fees or penalties for canceling, just the 30 days.

Steve: Okay. And in terms of the 2%, is there any wiggle room there?

Victoria: Sure. Yeah, we do have, again, we evaluate each account individually, amateur sellers doing 50 K or more a month, if they qualify, we often are able to bring that down a little bit, so yeah.

Steve: Okay, cool. Well Victoria, thanks a lot for kind of clearing this up. You know, we’ve talked in the past and I was never 100% clear on like some of the use cases for the service. I understand that you have a special offer for the listeners?

Victoria: Sure. If you go to go, that’s go.payability.com/Steve, you can sign up for Payability and get a $200 sign up bonus.

Steve: Interesting. So that’s like free money.

Victoria: Yeah.

Steve: Okay. Yeah, so hopefully the listeners out there, if you feel like you’re going to come to a cash flow crunch, at least talking with you today Vicki has mitigated some of my main concerns. It seems like the ability to turn this on and off during peak periods from a month to month basis is very attractive. And just for peace of mind, for your ecommerce business, it can make a lot of sense, especially if your business is busty.

Victoria: Yeah.

Steve: So, Vicki, thanks a lot for coming on the show. I really appreciate your inputs.

Victoria: Cool. Thanks for having me.

Steve: All right. Take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Now I thought it was really interesting to break down the different options when it comes to raising money for an e-commerce business. And there’s some amount of peace of mind when you use a service like Payability because you can avoid going into debt. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode249.

And once again, I want to thank Klaviyo for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for developing real customer relationships. And right now they just released a cool docuseries called Beyond Black Friday where you can learn successful e-commerce marketing strategies from real companies using their platform. Now, this docuseries is free and you could check it out at Klaviyo.com/beyondbf, once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf.

I also want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop-ups for any primer that is closely tied to your e-commerce store. If you want to give it a try, it is free. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

Now, I talk about how I use these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own e-commerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.Mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

248: James Clear On How To Create The Right Habits To Grow Your Business

248: James Clear On How To Create The Right Habits To Grow Your Business

Today I’m thrilled to have my buddy James Clear back on the show. James’ most recent book, Atomic Habits, hit the New York Times bestseller list and the last time I checked, it was the #8 best selling book on all of Amazon.

In today’s episode, we’re going to take it up a level and discuss how to build good habits and break bad ones when it comes to business. We’ll discuss tactics that James has uncovered over the years from studying the habits and routines of entrepreneurs, artists, athletes and high powered individuals.

What You’ll Learn

  • How to get on the New York Times Bestseller list
  • How to develop the proper habits to follow through on a business idea
  • The best way to start a new habit
  • How to make a habit easy to adopt
  • How to fight procrastination

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into the strategies they use to grow their businesses. Now today I have James Clear on the podcast for the second time. And if you don’t remember James, he is a New York Times bestselling author and an expert on habits. So in this episode, we’re going to talk about developing good habits in the context of growing a successful business.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Klaviyo is the tool that I use to build real quality customer relationships with my e-commerce store. And because all my transactions and email correspondence is tracked in Klaviyo, I can easily build meaningful customer relationships by listening, understanding, and taking cues from my customers and delivering personalized marketing messages. So for example, with one click of a button, I can easily send a specific and targeted email to all customers with a lifetime value of over 100 bucks who purchased red handkerchiefs in the past year.

And it is for this reason why over 10,000 brands have switched over to Klaviyo. Right now they’re running this cool docuseries called Beyond Black Friday where they discuss successful marketing strategies that their customers are using that you can emulate with your business. So, head on over to Klaviyo.com/beyondbf to check it out, once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf.

I also want to give a shout out to Privy who is also a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. Now what does Privy do? Well, Privy is an email list growth platform and they manage all of my email capture forms. And I use Privy hand-in-hand with my email marketing provider. Now they’re a bunch of companies out there that will manage your email capture forms, but I like Privy because they specialize in e-commerce. Right now I’m using Privy to display a cool wheel of fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prices in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this. And when I implemented this form, email signups increased by 131%.

I’m also using their new cart saver pop up feature to recover abandoned carts as well. And bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers, which I then feed to my email provider to close the sale. So head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve. Now onto the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have my buddy James Clear back on the show. And in case you missed him last time, James is on the podcast back in Episode 202, where we broke down his strategies on how to build a blog that gets millions of visits per month. But in today’s episode, we’re going to take it up a level and discuss how to build good habits and break bad ones, tactics that James has uncovered over the years from studying the habits and routines of entrepreneurs, artists, athletes, and high powered individuals. And I’m proud to say that James’s most recent book Atomic Habits has hit the New York Times bestseller list. And at one point, I think he was the number eight best-selling book on all of Amazon. And with that, welcome to the show James. How are you doing today?

James: Yeah, I’m doing well. Thanks so much for having me back. It’s good to talk to you.

Steve: Yeah. So first off congrats on the book.

James: Thank you.

Steve: I’m actually just curious what it takes to hit the New York Times bestseller list these days. Is there a strategy for doing so? Is there a way to game it?

James: So, there are two answers here. So the first answer what does it take? I can only tell you what it took for me. So, the kind of high level was I wrote two articles a week on Jamesclear.com starting in 2012. I did that for like three years and build my platform up and got an audience of I think it was around 200, 250,000 email subscribers around that point after about three years. And I leveraged the size of that platform that audience to get introduced to agents and publishers. And we put together a book proposal that took about three months and pitched it to, I think 17 or 19 publishers, I think it was 19. And I think we got meetings with seven.

So I flew to New York for a week, went and met with all these publishers with my agent. We were lucky; we had a good amount of interest. So we got bids from four and then ended up selecting our favorite one out of the bunch. And then I signed the contract to write the book in a year, became very apparent that I needed more time than that. And so, I went back and asked for an additional year and they very kindly gave it to me. So, it took me two years of writing and research. That was easily the hardest part, like the biggest and the most suffering. I felt like it was really hard to write under contract. I felt like there were a lot of expectations to produce something great. I was really worried that people wouldn’t enjoy it or that the publisher wouldn’t think it was good enough.

I handed that in actually three months late from the extended deadline, so two years and three months of writing and then we spent nine months planning to launch and marketing and prepping and doing interviews and all that stuff, getting the book on the publisher side. They were getting it type set and printed and all that type of thing. And then the book released, the three months before launch, I did 85 interviews in like 10 weeks or 12 weeks, something crazy like that, a bunch of blog posts, emails to my own audience, basically any and every favor I could call in, I was like working on that.

And that culminated with a bunch of exposure on launch day. I was on CBS This Morning and did a TV segment. So just like a ton of marketing push, in addition to trying to write like a really fantastic book. And all of that came together and we had a really great launch week and then ended up hitting the New York Times bestseller list and then we hit it again. So, the first time was we were number five in advice and how to, and then the second time and still right now, it’s number three in business. And so yeah, the book the launch has done really well but that’s what it looked like for me. So that’s the — really and I give that whole process because it was definitely not like a one week thing, I mean it was like…

Steve: Oh, yeah, I know that. I was just kind of curious how many books you actually have to sell. It’s in like the first week, right?

James: Yeah. So they have two different types of lists. The first one is calculated weekly and the second one is calculated monthly. And so we ended up hitting both, so one is based on weekly sales ones based on monthly sales. For weekly sales, it does depend on what category you’re in. So some categories like general nonfiction like memoirs, and things like that, I’m not sure what the numbers are for that. I think they’re actually a little bit lower from what I’ve heard from people, but I don’t know for sure than what you need in like advice and how to, which is the category I was in.

And this gets a little bit to your question of like is there a way to game it or not? Certainly, many people have tried, I was not really interested in doing some of those things that are I guess you would say like on the margin of like, oh, is this allowed or not? Some people, some speakers will try to do things like buy — I won’t name any names but there are people who bought like 10,000 or 20,000 copies and then have them sitting in their garage. And so they’re like they bought the book so that it would look like that number of sales came through during the first week and they could get on the list but they didn’t actually go to readers or anything like that.

So I was like really adamant about every copy we sell needs to go to an actual person, or stuff like you’ll see a lot of speakers will trade their fee for books. So, they’ll say I’ll come talk but if you do it in these three months when I’m prepping for launch then you won’t have to pay me, you can just buy 500 books instead or something like that. So people will try to do stuff like that. There’s some really weird services that you could hire. I don’t actually know if they still exist because I think the New York Times became savvy to them but for a while, people would pay like they’ll pay a service, I don’t know, 10, 20, $30,000, I don’t know how much it was, it was definitely in the tens of thousands.

And that company would have like a bunch of little — they would have people go out to different stores and buy individual copies of books or place individual orders on Amazon. Now, you were really buying like 10,000 copies through that company, but they would have their employees place them all as individual orders. So, they all looked like they were individual people buying and they would spread them out across the country and stuff. And all of that stuff is just like a lot. I mean, first of all, I just don’t know it’s a good way to spend your time or whether it’s ethical or not. But also it’s all just an effort to try to get on the list.

Now some of the bestseller lists like I think USA Today, we hit the New York Times, the Wall Street Journal bestseller list, the USA Today list, Publishers Weekly, the Independent Booksellers list and some of them are strictly based on sales. Like I’m pretty sure the Publishers Weekly list and the USA Today list are like whatever book sells the most copies that’s the number one book. Now the New York Times list is a little bit of a black box. I mean it’s the most elite list to be on and nobody quite knows how it works. But from what I can tell, you as a seller how many copies you need to sell, I think 10,000 is roughly the minimum kind of rule of thumb you’ll hear people throw out.

Now that doesn’t guarantee you’re going to get on because it depends on what week you’re launching and how many copies other books are selling that week. But as a rule of thumb, if you do 10,000 in a week, then that’s kind of the bear in the game. Now, just because you have that many sell does not mean that you’re going to get on the list, and the New York Times will sometimes make an editorial decision and say, this is not the kind of book that we want to have on here. Well, we think that the way you got these sales looks a little suspicious.

And so, like I’ve heard from people who, I heard from one author who sold 4,000 individual copies, and then they had one company that purchased 6,000 copies. So they thought, hey, I sold my 10, like, I should be in the running here. But I think the New York Times looks at that and they think, well, really, you sold like 4,001 because you just had like one big customer that said, yes. And so, if they’re comparing, say that person to somebody else who sold 10,000 individual orders, I think they tend to give the nod to the person who has the more individual readers.

Steve: Interesting.

James: And so, authors love to complain about it because there are a lot of authors that think they should have been on because they had certain number of sales, they didn’t know they got taken off or whatever. And whether that was true or not who knows, because nobody knows exactly what numbers The New York Times is getting each week and how many sales other books made. But once you make it, now I’m like, yeah, it’s great. I love that. I think it’s awesome. So it’s funny to be on the other side.

Steve: I felt comfortable asking that question because I knew you’re not the type of person to game the system.

James: A lot of people do it and I guess you could make an argument for it. If you were like, well, if I get on the list then and my main thing is speaking, like for me, speaking is a small portion of my business, I don’t really do that much of it. But I guess if you were like a full time one, people find ways to rationalize it. They’re like, oh, well, I’ll just buy my way in the list for 20 grand and then I’ll be able to charge more at every speaking event into the future because I can say I’m New York Times bestseller. So I think people rationalize it that way.

But for me, again separate from the ethical considerations which I think are questionable in themselves but could you really be proud of it? I don’t know. Like I mean, I just spent six years building an audience and three years writing a book and planning this launch. I mean, I put everything I possibly had into it. And it felt great to hit the list because there was so much sacrifice before it. But if I knew that I had just gotten there because I wrote a check, I feel like it would be a totally different experience.

Steve: I hear you.

James: And so in a sense, I wouldn’t have wanted to do it anyway, even if I had a good business reason, which I don’t. But even if I did, I feel like it would have taken away from it. So anyway, I’m kind of going on about it. But it’s a little bit of a black box, but I can say that it feels fantastic if it works out in your favor.

Steve: So let’s switch gears a little bit and talk about habits. And what I wanted to do actually was frame our talk in the context of starting or growing a successful business because a lot of my readers and listeners, they start out strong, but they kind of fizzle out in the long run if they don’t see immediate gains. And so, what I was hoping to do actually is maybe use your book as a framework. How does one develop the proper habits to follow through on a business idea until things finally start taking off?

James: Yeah, that’s a great question. So I mean, first of all, just from a high level, I like to think about habits is what I call like the compound interest of self-improvement. And the reason I like that phrase, habits are the same way that money multiplies through compound interest, you save up a little bit, it doesn’t feel like much in the beginning. In many cases, that compound interest curve is like really flat, almost like a plateau and then the hockey stick portion is only years or decades down the line. So it doesn’t feel like much at first, but then you turn around two or five or 10 years later, and it’s like, wow, this really added up. I think habits are kind of like that as well.

The same way that money multiplies through compound interest, the effects of your habits can multiply as you repeat them over time. And on any given day, the same way that saving 10 bucks doesn’t really feel like much, making a choice that’s like 1% better or 1% worse, a little bit improved, a little bit better habit or a little bit worse habit, it doesn’t really feel like much. What’s the difference between eating a burger and fries for lunch, or eating a salad? It’s not really a whole lot on any given day; your body looks the same in the mirror at the end of the night the scale doesn’t really change. But it’s only when you look back five or 10 years later and you’re like, oh wow, that choice of what I ate for lunch really does matter.

And so, this is one of the core philosophies of Atomic Habits, one of the core ideas in the book, this idea of how can we try to find ways to get 1% better each day? And if you can capture those small advantages, if you can master those little habits day in and day out, then you can end up with a really remarkable or powerful result in the long run. And I think that not only applies to our lives, but it certainly applies to our businesses. If you can just try to find a way to get a little bit of a 1% margin for improvement daily in something you do or monthly in the financial state of your business, I mean, that can really add up over the broad span of time.

Steve: And what does that look like in the context of a business? Like what is like a 1% gain or something that you might do? You can talk about your blog, or how you built up an audience for example.

James: Sure. Yeah. So I think the first thing is, you don’t need to do something more than what you’re already doing. You just need to find a way to show up more consistently than you have before. So, in other words, you don’t need to increase the intensity. I’m not saying for then, this is I’m focusing on the very beginning. Now, what’s the first thing I do? Like I’m not saying well, you need to write a radically better blog post, or you need to become massively better at sales calls, or you need to massively improve your skills at writing a sales page. What I am saying though, is let’s find a way to make it easy to show up and do those things more consistently than you’ve done before. So it’s kind of like yeah, you could do the same workout at the gym, but let’s just make sure you miss fewer workouts. So, that’s the first piece.

So in the context of my business, I wrote a new article every Monday and Thursday for the first three years and it was really that consistency, it was really that writing habit that set me on a different trajectory as a writer and an entrepreneur. And that was the thing that made it possible for me to build this audience and get the book deal and so on.

Steve: Okay, so I mean it’s easy to say that right? But how do you make sure you start that schedule? How do you have self-control to do that?

James: Okay, so I want to answer this in two ways, I want to come back to the self-control piece. So, the first part is I like to suggest people utilize what I call the two minute rule. So you take whatever habit you’re trying to build, whatever habit is relevant for your business whether it’s writing blog posts or making podcasts or making sales calls or whatever and scale it down to just the first two minutes. So, read 40 books a year becomes read one page, or call 20 clients every month becomes make one sales call, or do yoga four days a week becomes take out my yoga mat, so whatever the habit is you scale down to just the first two minutes.

Now, sometimes it sounds silly to people because especially with like health examples, I’ll say something like there’s a reader of mine, he end up losing over 100 pounds. And one of the things he did was he went to the gym but he didn’t allow himself to stay for longer than five minutes. It feels like well, that sounds ridiculous, like going to the gym for five minutes isn’t going to get you in shape. But what you realize is that he was mastering the art of showing up and this is a crucial thing about any habit business related or otherwise, a habit must be established before it can be improved.

And so, if you don’t become the type of person who goes to the gym for five minutes, you don’t have a chance to be the type of person who works out for 45 minutes, four days a week, or if you don’t become the type of person who makes one sales call, you don’t have the chance to be the person who makes 20 sales calls every month, month in and month out. And so we’re trying to scale it down to that I guess we call it a gateway habit, the thing that initiates the response. And let me give you maybe another example here. So, I like to refer to these moments as decisive moments, these two minutes that kind of determine the next chunk of time or get you moving in the right direction, get a little bit of momentum.

So for me, there’s a moment every morning where I sit down at my computer and either I open up Evernote and I start working on the next article I’m going to write, or I go to ESPN and I check latest sports news. And what happens in the next hour of my day is really determined by what happens in those like 45 seconds. It’s like if I can master that decisive moment of opening up Evernote and starting to write, then I’ve got a productive hour in front of me. And I think that no matter what your business looks like, they’re going to be four, five, maybe eight or 10 of those decisive moments throughout each day. And if you can just put your energy into mastering that, then you can have a productive day, you can have a more effective time working on your business. So that’s the first lesson master those decisive moments.

The second piece comes back to your question about self-control. And this is I think the common narrative for habits, for productivity, for effectiveness is you just need to want it more, you need to try harder, you need grit and perseverance. You need to work smarter. You need to make sure that you try to optimize things. And certainly working hard is valuable and it’s an important skill. But if you look at some of the research on self-control, and I cover this more in chapter seven of Atomic Habits, a lot of the research will show that the people who exhibit the highest self-control who you look at from the outside and you’re like, wow, they must have a lot of willpower, actually, the thing that distinguishes them from most other folks is that they operate, live and work in an environment that has fewer temptations, so they are able to exhibit more willpower simply because they’re being tempted less.

And I think that that is the lesson to take away from this is what’s the best way to improve my willpower? What’s the best way to make it more likely that I’ll show up and do the right thing each day? It’s not to push harder, or to just try harder or to say work more. The solution, the best lever to pull is to redesign your environment so that you’re tempted less. Put the objects that prompt your good behaviors in more obvious locations, reduce the friction of taking a good task, and put the objects that derail you or distract you in less obvious locations and reduce or increase the friction of doing something unproductive. And we can talk more about that.

Steve: It’s funny because I’m just thinking about all this in the context of raising my kids right now. And we were kind of picking and choosing our kids’ friends based on like both their personality and their work ethic because we want our kids to hang out with those other kids who are trying really hard hoping that it’ll just kind of rub off on them really. It means, it’s the environment that they’re in.

James: That’s actually a brilliant strategy because children are master imitators which anybody who has a two year old can tell you that, right? Like you say a cuss word and then they pick it up instantly, even if you don’t want them to, or they imitate whatever you do. But as children age, they continue to imitate but they tend to stop imitating their parents as much and start imitating their peers much more. And so there’s a great book called The Nurture Assumption by Judith Rich Harris that talks about the influence of peer groups on how children grow up.

And parents have a significant influence too, but that influence is largely genetic, it’s largely passed down through the genes. But the way that parents can influence, one of the best levers they can use to influence their children is by choosing what city you live in, where you go to school, what extracurricular you’re a part of, in other words, choosing what other kids they get exposed to. And so, your strategy there of trying to pick their friends by what their friends’ habits are is a smart one. We pick up all kinds of habits from the people around us, and often we want to do the things that our peers are doing. And so that’s a good way for parents to subtly shape or at least influence in a little way the habits of their kids. You can’t control it totally, but that’s actually probably more effective than trying to force them to do something you want.

Steve: But you’re not always going to be in the ideal environment, right. So there’s got to be a little bit more to this.

James: Yeah, absolutely. So in the book, I offer four different strategies for building good habits and breaking bad ones. And I’ll just go over real quickly here. There are tons of examples in the book of course, but we can go over a few of them as they relate to business in this conversation. But before I do, I’ll just say that not all four of these will always be working for you. And so, you can really look at them as like a toolbox or a set of strategies that you can rely on. And when one thing isn’t working in your favor, maybe you pull on the other three levers, and that’s enough to get you to do the more productive or more effective action.

Steve: Let me cut just a little bit. One common thing, at least that I have a problem with is procrastination.

James: Yeah. So, let me give you all — let me give these four and I’ll give you some examples related to procrastination. And procrastination is a really broad topic, right? Like, there’s a million ways you could procrastinate, but I’ll just go over some common ones. So, the four stages that I like to break a habit into, and again, this is all in detail in the book. But just real quickly, I break a habit…

Steve: Better to hear it from you the man himself.

James: Sure, yeah, yeah. Well, so cue, craving, response, reward, these are the four stages. So, there’s some kind of cue that precedes the habit, which is like a prompt that gets you to pay attention to what’s going on, something that’s happening in your environment. There’s a cue that picks up your attention. I’ll give you an example in a second. Second, there’s a craving there’s some kind of interest rotation of that cue, what it means. And based on what you think it means, you take a particular action. So that’s the response, which is the third stage. And then finally, your action delivers some kind of result. There’s some type of reward or consequence that comes after that.

So for example, let’s say you walk into the kitchen and you see a loaf of bread on the counter, it’s in the morning, so the loaf of bread, visual cue, so that’s first stage. Your prediction is, oh, I want to make some toast or that would be tasty. And so you take out a piece of bread, put in the toaster, that’s the response, pops up a minute later, you get the toast, you get to eat it. That’s the reward. Okay so cue, craving response, reward. No you can just as easily imagine that at a different time say, 10 minutes later after you’ve eaten breakfast, you walk back into the kitchen and you see that loaf of bread.

And now the cue has a different meaning, your state has changed, you’re full instead of hungry, and so you interpret that cue in a different way. Now your craving is not there, it’s not existing, interpreted as so there’s the bread but I’m not hungry now. And so you don’t take the same response. So, this type of thing is happening all day long. We’re taking in cues; we’re making predictions about what to do next, or taking action, and then getting some kind of outcome or result. So, from those four stages, we can have a step for each stage for making it easier to build good habits and harder to fall into bad ones. So, I call these the Four Laws of behavior change.

And the first law is to make it obvious. So you want the cues of your good habits to be obvious and available and visible. The second laws to make it attractive, the more attractive a habit is, the more likely you’ll fall into it and perform it. The third law is make it easy. So the more easy, frictionless, convenient a behavior is, the more likely you are to do it. And the fourth law related to reward is make it satisfying. The more satisfying and enjoyable an experience is, the more you want to repeat it again in the future. And if you want to — so those four make it obvious, make it attractive, make it easy, make it satisfying explain how to build a good habit.

And if you want to break a bad habit, you just invert them. So rather than make the cues obvious, you want to make it invisible, make it unattractive, make it difficult, make it unsatisfying. And so, let’s go through a couple of examples of what this looks like for procrastination since you mentioned that.

Steve: Real quick though, making something attractive, the thing here is a lot of what’s involved in creating a business kind of sucks, right? It’s boring. So I’m kind of curious, maybe once you address the procrastination question, how do you make something that’s really mundane and boring, attractive?

James: Yeah, it’s a great question. Well, so I’ll just answer that right now then we come back to procrastination is a larger topic. So, make it attractive, there are a couple of different things that influenced this. So first of all, let me answer and I’ll give you a quick tactic before I talk about the kind of the overarching thought here. So, quick tactic for making something more attractive, you can use the strategy that’s called temptation bundling. And so, the idea is you stack something you want to do, something you enjoy doing with the thing that you know you need to do.

So, one of the examples I give in the book, there’s this guy, he was an engineering student, and he knew that he needed to be exercising more but he also knew that he liked watching Netflix and probably liked it too much. And so, he linked up his computer to a stationary bike so that Netflix would pause if the bike was not running. So happy cycling the whole time if you want to watch a 30 minute show or something. And that’s a good way of forcing yourself to do the unattractive thing or making the unattractive thing which in this case was cycling more attractive because it meant hey, now I get to watch Netflix.

And you can do that with a bunch of things like if you are really bad with your email inbox and you feel like you never focus on that. I heard of a woman who she only gets a pedicure if she works on overdue emails while she’s getting it. So like reward yourself by doing the thing you don’t want to do. Another one, Katie Milkman, who’s the researcher at the Wharton School, University of Pennsylvania, she was the one who came up with this name temptation bundling. And she realized that she really wanted to read The Hunger Games. She got like really obsessed with the book series when it came out. And so she made a rule for herself where she was only allowed to read The Hunger Games while she was on the treadmill at the gym.

And so, those kinds of strategies are ways to make the unattractive thing more attractive. And you can do that in different ways. Like the one that’s real, I think some habits that are really good; this is really good for what I would call habits of avoidance, so things like don’t drink alcohol for 30 days, or don’t spend money on Amazon, or don’t go out to eat and stay at home and make a meal instead. And habits like that are inherently difficult, because you’re just resisting temptation. It’s like all you’re doing is not doing something and so that doesn’t feel good. You just have to sit with this craving. But you can flip it on its head a little bit.

And so one of my readers, he and his wife, they wanted to eat out less and save money by cooking more. And so normally they’re just resisting the temptation to go to dinner to go out to eat at the restaurant. But instead, what they did was they set up a little savings account and they labeled it trip to Europe. And then anytime they stayed home and cooked dinner instead of going out to the restaurant, they would transfer $50 over to the savings account. And so, they still had to put the work in of cooking the meal, but they got the immediate enjoyment of seeing the savings account grow. And that’s really the ultimate lesson that I’m sharing here with this temptation bundling strategy is how can you give yourself a little bit of an immediate enjoyment from something else while you’re doing the difficult thing.

And so, there obviously this depends on what is enjoyable to you. But like from a business standpoint, there was someone that I worked with who he hated taking these meetings, these calls, and he really just didn’t like being inside all day, he didn’t like being hunched over to his desk. And so he changed it so that he only took meetings while going on a walk through the park that was near his office. And so taking a meeting meant he got to go outside and go for a walk. And it can be in large or small ways, but anytime you get an immediate bit of satisfaction and enjoyment with it, suddenly the unattractive thing becomes a little more attractive.

Steve: I just wanted to take a moment to tell you about a free resource that I offer on my website that you may not be aware of. If you are interested in starting your own online store, I put together a comprehensive six day mini course on how to get started in e-commerce that you should all check out. It contains both video and text based tutorials that go over the entire process of finding products to sell all the way to getting your first sales online. Now, this course is free and can be obtained at Mywifequitherjob.com/free. Just sign up right there on the front page via email and I’ll send you the course right away. Once again that’s my Mywifequitherjob.com/free. Now back to the show.

I’m just looking back in my childhood right now and I think my mom did this to me. I really hated piano, I hated it. But she would take me to ice cream after every single piano lesson. And after a while, I started looking forward to them just for the ice cream.

James: Yeah, playing piano meant getting ice cream.

Steve: Yes.

James: It’s like reframed what that cue or what that habit meant in your mind. That’s really smart.

Steve: My parents were good.

James: Yeah, so that’s one way to think about how to make it attractive. But there’s a broader conversation here, which I think is really important for entrepreneurs, certainly it was very important in my business kind of narrative and story, which is that the social environment really changes what habits are attractive to us and which ones are unattractive. Like when I was a kid, and I don’t know that any kid grows up thinking, wow, I’d really like to think more about email funnels and like workflows thing.

No kid is thinking that, but now it’s kind of exciting and interesting to me. And part of that is because my skills have improved. But another big part of it is that I get rewarded for having a big email list, and not just like financially with the business, but also people will praise you for it or congratulate you on it or ask you, how did you do that? That’s interesting, how did you grow that? And all those social signals increase the attractiveness of thinking about the conversion rate and how I design forms and how can I improve this a little bit more.

And so, my point is the thing that we’re rewarded for, the thing that we get little markers of social status for or respect from others for naturally becomes more attractive and that is dependent on not only on your results, but also on the group or tribe that you’re a part of. Like I could be around a bunch of people, like people I went to some of my friends from college or things like that, they don’t think about email list, they don’t know about it, they don’t care about it. And so, in that group, I can throw out a number and they’re like, well great, I guess that’s good for you but it doesn’t mean anything; it doesn’t have any status associated with it.

And so, it would be less attractive for me to work on those things when I’m hanging around that group. We hang out for other reasons, but it’s not as important there because I’m not as rewarded for it. And so…

Steve: So that kind of just circles back to your environment point that you made earlier.

James: Yes. But earlier, when I was giving examples, I was talking mostly about the physical environment. And this, I would say is mostly about the social environment, and both are crucial factors for building better habits. So, let me come back to the procrastination question you asked and I’ll give some physical environment examples. But just to wrap up the social environment idea, we are all part of multiple tribes. Some of those tribes are large, like what it means to be American, or what it means to be French, or Australian. And some of them are small, like what it means to be a neighbor on your street, or a member of your local CrossFit gym, or a volunteer at the local school.

And all of those tribes, large and small, have a set of shared expectations for how you act as a member of that tribe. And you can see this in people’s habits all over, all day long. So, you walk onto an elevator and you’re in this little tribe of like three people. And the expectation is you turn around to face the front, if you face the back of the elevator it’s a little weird, it’s not what people are expecting. Or you go to a job interview and maybe there are four people interviewing you, and you’re sitting there and the expectation is you’re going to wear a suit and a tie or a dress or something nice. Now, it doesn’t have to be that way, you could face the back of the elevator, or you could wear a bathing suit to a job interview. But we don’t do that, because it violates the shared expectations of the group.

And so, the point here is that when habits go with the grain of the tribe that you’re in, they’re very attractive. And when they go against the grain of the tribe that you’re in, they’re very unattractive. And so one way to kind of hack your habits or to increase the odds that you’ll do the thing you want to do is to join a group where your desired behavior is the normal behavior, because if its normal in that group, then it will become attractive for you to do it because doing so helps you fit in. And this was huge for me as an entrepreneur because I did not have any entrepreneurs in my family and really didn’t have any close friends who were entrepreneurs either. I kind of vaguely knew that some people run businesses but I didn’t have anybody to look to.

And so, for the first like three to six months that I started out, I just emailed a ton of people well over 100 that were already doing the kind of thing that I wanted to do, but they were already full time. And I just asked if they wanted to chat on Skype. And most of them said no, but I would say like, maybe 30 or so said yes. And so, by the time I got six months in, now I had a few dozen people that if I had a problem, or if I was dealing with — had an idea, I could go to them with the questions I had. And I could also see what like what are they doing normally, what are their habits daily? And I didn’t have to consciously ask that question, right? You just kind of soak it up as you’re part of a tribe, as you’re part of a group, you see what everybody else around you is doing. And then you start to imitate and do those things because that’s the normal thing to do there.

You see this all the time, people jumping like across the gym, and then they start to eat paleo and they buy a certain type of knee sleeves and a certain brand of workout shoes, and they’re picking up all these other habits that they never really thought about doing but that’s just what people do in that particular tribe.

Steve: Yeah, in the context of business then, that’s why it’s key to go to conferences and events where you can meet other likeminded entrepreneurs. At least that’s how I started taking off in my business. It started when I started going to events.

James: 100%, and so I did those Skype calls. Then I went to my first conference about six months in. And what was really nice for me in that case was that I already knew like maybe 10 people from those Skype chats and those emails that were going to be there. And so I didn’t go in cold. I had like a couple people I can hang out with or talk to at least, which was nice. And then of course, I met a bunch of other people from those conferences. So, I did some conferences for the first two or three years, and then the last couple of years I’ve started to host my own events which are small usually like eight people or so. But it’s a really great high touch way to see, soak up all of that kind of implicit knowledge that everybody else has about what they do and why they do it and all that type of thing.

But the overarching point there is, no matter what habit you’re trying to build, the habits that are normal within your tribe will be attracted to you, because they help you fit in, they help you belong. And we all have a deep desire to belong.

Steve: So James, I don’t mean to skip around, but this question just kind of popped into my mind also. One thing that I see among people who are just kind of starting out in business is they’re looking for quick wins. And oftentimes, the payoff is like many years later, but it’s painful for those many years, right? You got to get used to what I call like the suck. So how — if you’re not getting immediate gratification, how do you train yourself to kind of persist?

James: Yeah, that’s such a great question. And it’s really it’s not just business, I mean, it’s central to all habits, right? There’s kind of this plateau in the beginning. So the analogy that I like to use, the metaphor that I like to bring up is the story of an ice cube. So, say you’re in a room and the room is cold, it’s like 25 degrees, ice cube sitting on the table and you can see your breath and slowly the temperature starts to increase 26, 27, 28, 29, still this ice cube is sitting there like nothing’s changed 30, 31, and then all of a sudden you get to 32 degrees and you hit this phase transition, the ice cube begins to melt.

There is one degree shift, no different than all the other one degree shifts that came before it but suddenly something new happens. And I think that in many cases, the process of achieving a change or building a business, it’s like that because you’re stuck on this plateau of latent potential early on, you’re putting work in, your banking reps and effort and time and energy and you don’t really have anything to show for it. The ice cube still hasn’t melted. But if you’re willing to stick with it, then you hit this phase transition. And so the question that you had is like, well, how do you get through that period?

I think first of all, just knowing that it happens is helpful. It helps reset your expectations a little bit, because a lot of the time we think that progress should be linear, that we put a little bit of work in and we get a little bit of results. So if we put a lot of work in, we’ll get a lot of results. But actually, it’s not this like 45 degree angle linear progression. It’s more like that hockey stick or compound curve that I mentioned before, where you’re kind of stuck on this plateau for a while, and all the greatest gains are delayed. So that’s the first thing.

The second thing though, I think that this is one of the reasons that small habits really matter, perhaps the deeper purpose why they matter, which is they reinforce a particular type of identity, they reinforce being a certain kind of person. And so, like in the book, I use this phrase, the goal is not to run a marathon; the goal is to become a runner. The goal is not to write a book, the goal is to become a writer. And I think we could say that about entrepreneurship as well. Like the goal is not to build a business, the goal is to become an entrepreneur, to be that kind of person, to be a creator, or to be financially independent or to have that identity.

And I think the way to foster that identity is through small wins, through small habits on a daily basis. And so in a sense, every action you take is kind of like a vote for the type of person you want to become. It’s like you’re these little habits, or how you embody up being a particular type of person, or having a particular type of identity. So, every day that you make your bed, you embody the identity of someone who’s clean and organized, or each time that you write one sentence, you embody the identity of someone who is a writer, or every time you make a sales call, you embody the identity of someone who is good at selling. And so, on any given day, those little actions don’t count for very much, but each time you do them, it’s like casting a vote, building up a little mound of evidence that this is who I am.

And I think that ultimately, true behavior changes identity change because it’s like it’s one thing to say I want this, I want a million dollar business, I want to have a best-selling book, I want to have a popular blog, but it’s something very different to say I am this, I am an author, I am a blogger, I am an entrepreneur. Because once you believe that about yourself, you really aren’t even pursuing behavior change anymore. You’re just acting in alignment with the type of person that you already believe that you are. And so, I think the way to get through those, to get through the suck as you call it, to get through those periods where it’s really difficult and you don’t have the results that you want is to focus on fostering that identity.

Even if you’re not happy with how your body looks, and you still want to lose weight and all you could do after a long day of travel was five pushups before you collapsed on the bed, well, maybe that’s not the result you want. Maybe you’re still in the suck from that standpoint, but you did those five pushups and at least you’re the type of person who doesn’t miss workouts. At least you’re the type of person who foster that identity. And I think that on the hard days in business, that’s what I try to remind myself of like how can I show up and cast a vote for the desired identity even if the results are still long in the future.

Steve: So, it means you just try to show up, even if showing up in this particular case isn’t spending a lot of time or whatever, you’re just out of habit working on your business, even if it’s not a whole lot at that given moment?

James: You’re trying to cast a vote for being the type of person that you want to be, rather than worrying about what the results are in that moment. And I think that there are all kinds of ways that you can show up in small ways, and I think we all either have done this or know someone who does this where you waste time on frivolous things. You just like putter around and do a bunch of little things that don’t make much difference and that’s different than what I’m talking about, that feels like a waste of time. But what I’m talking about is taking a small action that reinforces your desired identity, the long term identity of you or your business that you want to foster and the type of person you want to become.

Steve: It sounds like step one is to actually figure out what that is right?

James: I think so. And that’s what I talk about in chapter two of the book. I think it’s a very central question to ask yourself. Now, the good news is, I don’t think it needs to be that hard. I think most people know, they may not — questions like what identity do you want? Or what are your values? Those are like big questions and sometimes they’re hard to answer. But I think most people do know what kind of results they want. So you can just say, well, do you want to — maybe you want to lose 40 pounds in six months, or maybe you want to double your income this year, or something like that.

And once you get a pretty clear picture of the result that you want, then you can sort of reverse engineer it and ask yourself, well, who is the type of person that could lose 40 pounds? Well, maybe it’s the type of person who doesn’t miss workouts. Or who’s the type of person that could double their income? Well, maybe it’s the type of person who creates one new product each month or something like that. And once you reverse engineer the outcome, and ask yourself that question, who is the type of person that could achieve that, then you become a little more clear on what that identity might be.

Steve: Like if I want to become a New York Times bestselling author, I would probably follow in your footsteps and then set aside time to write two days a week and be consistent about that for three years, for example?

James: That’s a great example of scaling it down. It is like, who is the type of person that could write a New York Times bestseller? Well, it might be the type of person that has a really big email list, like hundreds of thousands of people that they could tell about the book when it comes out. Okay, well, who is the type of person that could have an email list of 500,000 people? Well, maybe it’s the type of person that writes every week. And so then that becomes the identity that you’re trying to build. I just want to be the type of person who writes every week.

And that line of questioning I think leads you more — it leads you a little bit away — what it does is it clarifies the fact that your outcomes in life are a lagging measure of your habits, right? The number of email subscribers I have is a lagging measure of my writing habit, and your weight is a lagging measure of your eating habits, your bank account is a lagging measure of your financial habits, you’re really just trying to figure out who, how do I need to show up each day to get that long term outcome that I’m looking for?

Steve: Right. And then adopting the little detailed habits of that individual to get what you want, or in the case of writing a book, the writing part is just one little habit, and all these little habits that you do if we were to delve deeper into your life James, all that add up to where you are today.

James: Right. And the things that we were talking about earlier, like optimizing your environment, or choosing the right tribe, or tweaking little elements of that, the two minute rule and scaling it down, all of those are strategies for building those habits that surround that core identity of I want to be the type of person who writes every week.

Steve: Right. James, I think that’s actually a good point to conclude this interview because we’ve already been chatting for quite a while. Where can people find more about your book? Where can they get it?

James: Yeah, thanks so much for chatting, I enjoyed the conversation. So, the book is called Atomic Habits and you can get it at Atomichabits.com. And on that page, I have a couple like bonus downloads and stuff too. There’s a guide on how to apply the ideas to parenting, a guide on how to apply the ideas to business. There’s a cheat sheet for kind of the core ideas in the book and just kind of like a one pager you can look at and review a template for tracking your habits. Anyway, so all of that is at Atomichabits.com.

Steve: What’s funny about this is just our little chat today has kind of reinforced my parenting style a little bit because I’ve been pushing my kids hard because I want to get into the habit of feeling like they’re smart and at the top of their class. And I talked to certain people and they think I’m crazy, but maybe that just means I need to change my environment a little bit.

James: Nice. Well, congratulations. I’m glad that habits are on top of mind and important for you. I think there’s something all parents should think about deeply and really all people. I mean, they impact all of our lives.

Steve: And just for the benefit of listeners here, I’ve actually read James’ book and it’s excellent. And I was just kind of playing dumb in the interview today because I want to highlight some of the key points that resonated with me. But thanks a lot James for coming on the show. I really appreciate your time.

James: Wonderful. Thanks Steve.

Steve: All right. Take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Now when it comes to being successful in business, consistency is the key and the concepts that James talked about in this episode will allow you to make your business part of your routine. For more information about this episode, go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode248.

And once again, I want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop-ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. Now, if you want to give it a try, it is free. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post-purchase flow, a win-back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on autopilot. So head on over to Mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s Mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

Now I talk about how I use these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own e-commerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.Mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

247: How To Automate Your Amazon Wholesale Business With Trent Dyrsmid

247: How To Automate Your Amazon Wholesale Business With Trent Dyrsmid

Today I’m thrilled to have Trent Dyrsmid on the show. Trent is a serial entrepreneur, husband, and father who owns 3 companies, an Amazon ecommerce business, an SOP software company called Flowster and BrightIdeas.co which is a popular podcast and entrepreneurship publication.

Together, these companies generate millions per year in revenue. I invited him on the show today because we share the common goal of maximizing income without negatively impacting family life. He is a master of systematizing businesses and we’re going to learn his business secrets. Enjoy the show!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Trent became an entrepreneur
  • How selling Amazon wholesale works
  • Where to find products to sell and wholesalers
  • The margins for an Amazon wholesale business
  • How to scale an Amazon wholesale business

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and dig deep into what strategies they use to grow their businesses. Now today I have my friend Trent Dyrsmid on the show, and Trent is an expert when it comes to systematizing businesses through SOPs. Today we’re going to talk about how he’s completely outsourced his Amazon wholesale business to various virtual assistants all across the world.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Privy who is a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. And right now I’m using Privy to display a cool wheel of fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prices in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this. And when I implemented this form email signups increased by 131%.

Now, you can also use Privy to reduce cart abandonment with cart saver pops and abandoned cart email sequence as well at one super low price that is much cheaper than using a full blown email marketing solution. So, bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers and recover lost sales. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Klaviyo is the tool that I use to build real quality customer relationships with my e-commerce store. And because all my transactions and email correspondence is tracked in Klaviyo, I can easily build meaningful customer relationships by listening, understanding and taking cues from my customers and deliver personalized marketing messages. So for example, with one click of a button, I can easily send a specific and targeted email to all customers with a lifetime value of over $100 who purchased red handkerchiefs in the past year. And it is for this reason why over 10,000 brands have switched over to Klaviyo.

And right now, they have this cool docuseries called Beyond Black Friday where they discuss successful marketing strategies that their customers are using that you can emulate with your business. So, head on over to Klaviyo.com/beyondbf to check it out, once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf, now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: All right. Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Trent Dyrsmid on the show. Now, if you don’t know who Trent is, he’s a serial entrepreneur, husband and father with three companies, an Amazon e-commerce business, a software company called Flowster.app which does SOPs, and Brightideas.co which is a popular podcast and entrepreneurship publication which together generate millions of dollars a year in revenue.

And profit magazine named Trent’s first company as one of Canada’s profit 100 fastest growing companies for two years in a row before he sold it for seven figures in 2008. Anyway, the reason Trent and I resonate so well is because we share the common goal of maximizing income without negatively impacting family life or lifestyle. Also, Trent is a master of systematizing businesses, and today we’re going to find out how he does it. And with that, welcome to the show Trent. How are you doing today?

Trent: Very well, Steve, thanks very much for having me on, I’m so thrilled to be here.

Steve: I feel like we’ve been talking like a lot lately.

Trent: Well because we have.

Steve: So Trent, give us a quick background on your business, how you kind of got into entrepreneurship and what your e-commerce business is all about?

Trent: Sure. So, let’s start with how I got into becoming an entrepreneur that dates back quite a few years back to 2001. I had a really high paying job, I was making close to about $200,000 a year back then as a guy in my 20s. But unfortunately, the job was kind of boring, and I wasn’t intellectually stimulated and I know some people might be thinking, well, who cares? You were making a pile of cash. But the funny thing about money is, is after you were making it for a while, it’s not fulfilling in unto itself. And so, I decided that I wanted something more.

And so, I quit that job. I sold my house, I cashed in everything I had, and I put it all into starting a company that ultimately was ranked as one of Canada’s Profit 100 fastest growing companies. And that’s a whole another story for another day. But that’s how I got into becoming an entrepreneur.

And since selling that company, I’ve pretty much been focused on making my living on the internet, so I could always be location independent, in other words, I can run my business from any place that I choose. And approximately two, two and a half years ago, thanks to a number of my what I call my internet friends, in other words, people who I’d interviewed on my show and developed something of a relationship with a couple of them, a fellow named Spencer and another friend of mine named Country, we’re doing quite well doing Amazon private label. It’s something I knew nothing about, and they were both strongly encouraging me to give it a shot.

So, we were running a digital marketing agency at the time, my wife and I and a team of contractors and it was going quite well. And I said to my wife, I said, you know, I’m going to take a little hiatus and — I’m going to close the tab, it is making that noise, sorry. I’m going to give this Amazon thing a go and see if I can become successful at it because I’d always been in service businesses and I really wanted to try a product business because as a lot of people will know, a product business is much easier to scale up than a service business. So, I was completely and totally not very successful at private label after four or five months due to picking products that were too competitive.

I was making sales, I was doing 25 or 30,000 a month in revenue, but I was having to spend so much money on Pay Per Click and run so many promotions to try and get that sales velocity that I wasn’t making any profit at all. And to be honest with you, I was extremely frustrated. And right around that time, one of our biggest clients at the agency was starting to let us know that when their contract came up, they weren’t going to renew and so I was starting to get pretty stressed to be honest with you. And right, right around then fortunately, I interviewed a fellow on my show named — two guys actually. One guy by the name of Eddie and another guy by the name of Dan [inaudible 00:08:11] and both were doing some version of this Amazon wholesale thing that I knew nothing about.

And when Eddie explained it to me, it wasn’t too terribly appealing, because he’s a single guy with no kids and he spends his life going to trade shows to find his products. So he’s on the road all the time. And I thought, no man, I don’t want to do that. And then when I talked to Dan, and I interviewed him, he did the whole thing without any travel at all. And suddenly I realized, oh, man, that’s what I want to do because wholesale compared to private label is substantially less risk and we can dive into that further if you like.

Steve: Yeah absolutely.

Trent: That’s how I got started. Short Story, within five months, we were doing over 100 grand a month. We did just under 1.1 million in our first year and we’ve never looked back.

Steve: What are your margins on that 1.1 million?

Steve: So we operate on a gross margin of around 20%, which sounds thin but it’s actually enough because you can do a lot of revenue per employee in this model.

Steve: Okay, so let’s start by talking about the wholesale business as compared to private label. So how does the wholesale business work?

Trent: So wholesale is simple, but not easy. Simple, in that you buy products wholesale from US manufacturers, and you resell them on Amazon. And simple because unlike private label where you’re trying to launch a new product and get traction and get reviews and all that, with wholesale, you’re simply using available software tools to look for products that already have an established sales velocity and then you’re trying to buy those products at a price that would allow you to make a margin, so simple, but there’s a lot more to it than that.

Steve: So, I see a couple of immediate disadvantages. I see a whole bunch of other people selling the exact same thing. And I also see you having to fight for the buy box on Amazon. Is that correct?

Trent: In theory, you’re correct but there are ways to mitigate those two risks. So, predominant — when we started, those were big issues for us. And back then our margin was less and the race to the bottom was a big issue for us. And because of changes in our business model, those are no longer issues and those changes are very simple. We look for suppliers who have already restricted the number of authorized sellers of their products on Amazon.

Ideally, we’re the only seller. Almost as ideally, the brand is one seller and we are the other seller and there is no one else. When you get that and we that’s predominantly how we do it, there is no race to the bottom. You know exactly what percentage of the box you’re going to get and your margins are maintained. The only issue can be obviously competitive threats from other brands, that’s just the nature of the beast.

Steve: But private label will experience that as well.

Trent: Correct.

Steve: So how do you go about finding these vendors, then?

Trent: Wow that is the tough part. So, when we started off, and we continue to do this to this day, but of course, we evolve as we grow as every business does. We use basically simple math equations to identify products. So, we’re looking for products that have an estimated profit per month within our parameters. And that’s simply a function of looking at, well, what’s the sales velocity of this product? How many current and sellers are in competition for the buy box? If we were an additional seller, would we get enough share of the buy box to sell enough units at a 20% margin for it to make it worthwhile for us to carry this product?

And then if it is, we’re going to reach out to the brand that owns that product and try to establish a relationship with them. And we grew at 20% per quarter for the first two years doing just that approach, sending a lot of emails and that’s where the whole SOPs thing factored in.

Steve: How do you determine what percentage of the buy box you’re going to get?

Trent: So we look at, let’s say there’s a widget on Amazon and it’s 19.99, and there’s three sellers at 19.99. And if we’re going to be a fourth, we just assume we’re going to get 25% of the buy box.

Steve: Okay. Okay. And you mentioned before that the way you do it now is you’re basically only competing against the brand owner. So now, do you kind of exclude anything where there’s more than one seller?

Trent: No, we regularly go after brands that have multiple sellers because we strongly believe those brands would be better off to have fewer sellers and oftentimes there’s a gap in their understanding, or they’re just not thinking about it. Because what you have to remember with a brand is that in all likelihood, Amazon is only 10 to 15% of their total sales because they have brick and mortar distribution across the country. And so, that is a much larger portion of their focus. And so, Amazon it’s almost a pain in their ass and there’s a lot of problems that come, typically unauthorized sellers and MAP violations. MAP stands for minimum advertised price.

And when that happens on Amazon, it causes the brand quite a bit of grief because they’re brick and mortar partners. Let’s say for example, a brand is selling their widgets to Walmart. Walmart is 40% of their total revenue, MAP for those widgets is 19.99 and they’re on Amazon for 18.50, do you think Walmart is very happy about that?

Steve: Absolutely not.

Trent: No, they are not. And do you think the brand is stressed about that?

Steve: Absolutely. So, I guess the brand has to make sure, I guess does the brand have a say in that? Can they say, hey, and kick you out?

Trent: Well, if they put the correct policies in place, yes absolutely, they can get Amazon under control. And this is what most brands or many brands don’t understand, or maybe they desire to do it, but they don’t know how to do it. And that is the biggest problem that we end up solving for brands. As an example, right now at a recent trade show that I attended and that is another method of finding brands by the way is go to trade shows. I entered into a discussion with a sunglasses brand, a $200 million a year brand and their number one problem is unauthorized sellers and MAP violations. And they said, man, if you can fix that, if you can help us fix that, we would authorize you to become a seller. And I am reasonably close. I haven’t got the yes yet, but I am reasonably close to getting it and that’s why because we understand how to solve that problem.

Steve: Okay, so let’s back up a little bit. Are you comfortable sharing some of the metrics that you look for in a product?

Trent: Sure.

Steve: Okay. So what is the minimum profit that you would expect, and what are some things that make you attracted to a certain product over another?

Trent: So let’s talk about what we did in the beginning and then we’ll compare that to how we do it now because now we’re a little bit more mature and we have far more resources than we had in the beginning, so we go after bigger elephants now. But in the beginning, we were very happy to carry even just one product from a brand as long as we could make 300 bucks a month or more, or if we carried a couple of products from the same brand, if that one account would make us 400 bucks a month or more. And these are just rules of thumb; you can pick whatever number you would like.

These are not the correct numbers; they’re just the numbers we used. Then we would carry that brand because a small brand like that, I mean, once you have a relationship, all you’re doing is reorders. So, the amount of labor involved is really, really low. And so, if you could get 3, 4, 5, 6 or 10 of those products that are like that, now you’re making three, $4,000 in gross profit each and every month, and that’s a heck of a good start. And so, for anyone who’s listening who obviously still has a full time job, and they’re thinking about doing this part time, that is not an insignificant amount of income and someone could easily manage that on a part time basis. Now, it’s a little bit more work to build it, of course, but there are ways to help reduce labor on that and we can talk about that more later, but in the beginning, that’s what we focused on.

Steve: So just to be clear, you’re actually buying these products also and shipping them into FBA, right?

Trent: Yep.

Steve: Okay. And what is the minimum buy? I would imagine a lot smaller than private label, right?

Trent: Yeah, it is. This is one of it, so one of the things that appealed to me so much about wholesale versus private label is risk of loss. So, when I did private label, MOQs were typically two to $3,000, and if I screwed it up, if I picked the wrong product, it’s quite possible I could lose the lion’s share of that money. In wholesale, that scenario is virtually impossible because you’re buying products that have established sales velocity. So, it’s not a question of are they going to sell? It’s only a question of are they going to sell profitably, or at breakeven, or maybe a small loss. And so, MOQs depends on the brand, I mean, a thousand bucks, I think we put in first orders for 700 bucks. Typically now we’re doing bigger than that. We’ve had initial orders that were 20 grand.

So, it’s all dependent upon the brands that you’re pursuing. The big thing to understand is it’s way less risk and the time to market for private label is measured in months because by the time you think, do all your product research and get samples and talk to factories and put your order in and get it shipped over and create your listing, and get your Photoshop, blah, blah, blah, blah, blah, a long time goes by. With wholesale, you can literally have products in Amazon’s warehouse as soon as a week or two after your first phone call.

Steve: Right. I guess the other disadvantage though also is you don’t own the brand, you don’t own the product and I guess vendors probably come and go periodically, right?

Trent: They do but you own the business and you own those relationships. So, there is a number — I mean probably one of the biggest in the space is Netrush. Netrush does over $100 million a year doing what we do, and they don’t own any other brands. But do you think network is worth a fair amount of money?

Steve: Yeah, I mean, it’s just like a traditional retailer, right? Like Target carries most other people’s brands, they have their own brands but…

Trent: Correct.

Steve: It’s just a traditional wholesale business.

Trent: Correct.

Steve: Cool. So, can we talk about how to land a vendor? So, it sounds like you’re getting exclusive vendors now, so what is your negotiation, how does it look like?

Trent: So, that’s always the goal but you don’t necessarily start there. So, yesterday I was speaking with a brand owner and he’s the sole seller, does about 200,000 a month on his line and he’s a little bit overwhelmed right now. So he’s a small company, he doesn’t have enough boys to do all the work and so some things are falling through the cracks. So there’s the opportunity for us. And so I said to him, I said, look, why don’t we start off with instead of trying to get this guy to sign a contract with me on day one granting me co exclusivity on his entire product line, which is a big decision and would have a long sale cycle, I make it easy. I say, look, let’s just pick a product or two and you let me order enough so that I’ve got inventory to last a couple of months.

We’ll do a test order first just so I can verify all the volumes that our tools are estimating to make sure that we know how much this thing actually sells and then let me place enough orders so that I’ve got inventory for 60 or 90 days and let me show you what we can do. And we’re going to run Pay Per Click campaigns and we’re going to optimize the listing and we’re going to respond to negative product reviews, maybe we’re going to create some bundles, there’s all sorts of things that we can do to help increase market share which is one thing brand owners want to see.

The other thing that we could be doing during that period of time in the case — now, the story I’m telling is not a good example. But another example where there’s multiple sellers, and there’s unauthorized sellers. We can also then over that period of time work to reduce the number of unauthorized sellers and restore MAP pricing. Now, if you do that well on a couple of their products, you’re golden. They’re going to say, hey, obviously, you guys know what the hell you’re doing. This has been a great experience. Now you can present them with a contract. And now you can say, look, I want exclusivity on your entire line of products. And that is a far easier yes to get.

Steve: So to be clear, these brand owners are not selling themselves on Amazon, right? They don’t want to be dealing with the Amazon side of business. And so that’s why they’re soliciting I guess third party sellers?

Trent: They’re not necessarily soliciting. Some are, I remember we won an account a year, a year and a half ago. They were actively looking when they got our email and we won and that was a huge account. So yes, they were soliciting but many times like this particular guy, he’s been solicited before by a number of my competitors, and either I had better timing or I caught him on a good day or I had a better pitch. Because either way, he’s now getting ready to hop on an airplane and come and see us because he’s committed to, or he seems committed to moving forward into a relationship with us.

Steve: Okay. And in terms of finding these vendors, you mentioned going to trade shows, but I would imagine that’s not how you get the bulk of your vendors, is it?

Trent: It can be. As a matter of fact, I just interviewed a guy on my show by the name of Ryan Grant, who’s on episode Number 246, and he does get the bulk of his from trade shows. But here’s the silver bullet of trade shows, you need to have a name to drop. So, I recently attended the Outdoor Retailer show which is a very large show, a lot of big brands there. I did my homework beforehand so I had my shopping list. I knew I had a virtual assistant go through all the exhibitors list, figure out what their Amazon revenue was, stack ranked them in order of the best to the least. And then I figured out which ones were in my sweet spot, and I made sure I went and visited all of those companies.

So, I talked to about 40 different companies over a three day period. The number one question I was asked is who are you working with in our niche now? And that was a new niche for us. So, my answer was, well, no one yet, but this is going to be a niche we want to focus on blah, blah, blah, blah, blah, blah and I’m working on winning. I have out of all of those 40 companies; I’m really only in an active discussion with one or two. Now, once I get the one or two, it would be much, much easier and that’s what Ryan told me. He says once he had a name to drop, so we do actually have a big brand name in the health and nutrition niche. So, we’re going to be now starting to go to shows for that niche and name dropping that company’s name because they are a huge player in that space and everyone will know their name and that’s a lot of social proof.

Steve: What is the brand’s motivation for not selling themselves on Amazon?

Trent: Some of them do it and some don’t. And if they don’t, it’s just because they consider themselves a wholesale company. And oftentimes, they don’t want their retail distribution partners, their brick and mortar partners to see them selling on Amazon because then they’re like, hey dude, you are competing with me, what the hell. Whereas other brands they do, they are a seller themselves. We have relationships like that, where the brand and ourselves are the only two authorized sellers and sometimes what those brands will do like our largest account right now, in the beginning, we split the buy box evenly.

And after a while, I pitch to them and I said, why don’t you guys just step out of the buy box and we’ll do some extra stuff for you with this extra profit that we’re going to make? And they said, sure. So let’s say the product was at 20 bucks. They raised their buy box or their price to $26, they get now no percent of the buy box because the Amazon algorithm is never going to rotate them in when I’m at 20 and they’re at 26. And essentially, we would get 100% or we got 100% of the buy box as a result of that.

Steve: That’s interesting. I’m just wondering why they would want other people selling if they’re selling as well. Like, what’s the motivation there?

Trent: So, there’s a couple of things. One is if a brand has 100% of the buy box and they split it with us, it actually only reduces their net profit by 10%. And the reason that is because the other half of the buy box we’re still buying those products wholesale from them and we’re paying Amazon fees that that they would be paying on that other half of the buy box and we operate on a 20% gross margin. So, 20% down with half the buy box equals 10% is all it costs them, so why would they do it? Number one is mitigation of risk. If they are the sole seller and for whatever reason their account were to get suspended, or they were to run out of inventory or if anything happens to the BSR and their products.

Steve: I see. Okay.

Trent: And so, that’s reason. That’s one of the reasons. The other one is that we have a higher level of expertise on the Amazon platform than they do; we have more resources than they do. And we say to them, we’re going to help you to do things that are going to take sales to a higher level than they are at now. And so that’s another way of adding value.

Steve: I just wanted to take a moment to tell you about a free resource that I offer on my website that you may not be aware of. If you are interested in starting your own online store, I put together a comprehensive six day mini course on how to get started in e-commerce that you should all check out. It contains both video and text based tutorials that go over the entire process of finding products to sell all the way to getting your first sales online. Now this course is free and can be obtained at Mywifequitherjob.com/free. Just sign up right there on the front page via email and I’ll send you the course right away, once again that’s Mywifequitherjob.com/free. Now back to the show.

Okay, so Trent, one of the reasons why I’m having you on is because you’ve completely automated this Amazon business through SOPs which are standard operating procedures. So, this is kind of why I asked you about the trade show thing early on, do you actually have your employees go to trade shows on your behalf?

Trent: So I did, so we had an employee that I hired who was in charge of sourcing that he left recently, so I’m temporarily wearing the hat until I find a replacement for that individual. I’m actually now in a more active role in the business which is why I went to that trade show but he had gone to the ones previous. So this individual, he was the one sending all the emails, dealing with all the replies, talking to the brands, looking at price lists, sending them the contracts to getting them signed. I had no for over about a year I had absolutely no day to day role in the company whatsoever because of our SOPs and because of the team. And like I said, because of his absence now, I’m temporarily back in, but only until I find a suitable replacement.

Steve: Okay, so can we talk about your SOP process, how these are created, how everything works?

Trent: Yeah. So that was the big differentiator for us. People ask me, gosh man, how did you get to 100 grand a month in just five months? And I said, well, I sent how many emails, it was thousands of emails to prospective brands. And that sounds simple to do but when you break it down, there’s actually a boatload of work in sending that many emails because you’ve got to find competitive sellers, that takes labor. You’ve got to extract their storefront into spreadsheets, that’s more labor. You then have to run math on every single one of the products that are in those spreadsheets, more labor, then you have to for the ones that pass your filters, you have to identify well, which company, who is the right person at that company? What’s their email address? And you got to get all that data into HubSpot, and then you got to send out an email.

That is a lot of work. And so, when I started off because I’ve always been a big believer in creating documented systems, before I started to do any of the labor and like roll up my sleeves and do work, I instead I sat down and I designed a system for all of those steps that I just described. And then I document that system. And then I hired a number of virtual assistants from the Philippines at three bucks an hour and I simply had them do all of that grunt work so that with essentially no labor of mine, and a small amount of labor from one of my employees, I was able to send out two to 300 emails a week, that’s two to 300 leads, new product leads each and every week, week after week after week.

And all I had to deal with and this was before I hired anyone else and I was the guy in charge of sourcing, all I had to deal with was the replies. We’d send those two or 300 emails, I’d get a lot of replies and then I’d be replying back and forth and moving those conversations forward and filling out account applications and getting price lists and negotiating on prices and ultimately issuing a purchase order. And without the SOPs, I never could have done that volume of emails.

Steve: So, are those processes of replying, are those outsourced as well?

Trent: No, the replies, we didn’t outsource that because now you’re in a conversation, now we have processes that guide me and guide my team in that, but it’s not outsourced to a virtual assistant.

Steve: So, all this outreach and that sort of thing, is it all rote meaning like there’s no creativity that’s involved in drafting one of these emails?

Trent: Correct, it’s pure carpet bombing.

Steve: Okay.

Trent: Now, that’s not the only way that someone should source but it worked extremely effectively for us. And so, it is one of several arrows in your quiver that you should use. And the reason that’s important is I’ll use this brand, they’re no longer with us, they were with us for only a year, a year and a half. They were a supplement company and they got one of our many emails. I mean this is how we landed all of our brands, and if you’re not sending a lot of emails, you’re not giving yourself the opportunity to find a brand that has already decided they’re looking for a third party seller.

Steve: Can you kind of describe your carpet bombing process, like what are your filters like on how you do research and how you decide who to carpet bomb I guess?

Trent: It’s kind of what I described before. We would find all these existing sellers who met certain criteria.

Steve: Are there SOPs for that as well?

Trent: Yeah there’s SOPs for everything. In my office, the going joke is you can’t even fart unless there’s an SOP for it, so everything is defined. So, one virtual assistant would be in charge of making a list of sellers, competitive sellers, other third party sellers because our thinking was simple, if they can carry the product, so can we. And if they’re making money, so can we. So, we started with that, then there was another SOP for extracting their products using a tool called price checker too into a spreadsheet. So for a given third party seller, they might have 100 products, they might have 3,000 products; we’re going to dump all those products into a spreadsheet.

And there’s another SOP for that spreadsheet. And there’s a spreadsheet template that would cause excuse me math to be done on each and every row automatically since we paste everything in to calculate our estimated profit per product. And the labor, there would be a VA would have to manually go and see for each product how many sellers were in contention for the buy box because there was no really great way to automate that one little bit, but for three bucks an hour, I don’t really care. I’m happy to pay for it.

And so, then that spreadsheet would give us a list of leads. We then figure out who the contact was for each one of those leads and a VA is doing that via LinkedIn and something called Snovio which helps us to find email addresses and then we import them into HubSpot. And then we use another tool called GMass and we send these hundreds of emails out. And that’s how it goes.

Steve: What is your hit rate like? I’m just kind of curious.

Trent: Low, less than 2%.

Steve: Less than 2%. Okay, but it’s worth it right. Once you land one of those, that could be like a six figure account.

Trent: Hell yeah, absolutely.

Steve: How many people do you have running this business?

Trent: So, right now there are three but they’re not all. So my wife works around 25 hours a week. She’s the COO. We have another fellow who is in charge of inventory management and reorders which my wife used to do. And then we have another woman who splits her time about half between my information products business, the Bright Ideas business and the Amazon business. So, I guess you could say if you consider on an FTE basis, it’s run by about two full time people. And then to make it grow, you need another one which right now temporarily is me, but the goal is to hire another person because you always have to be looking for new brands because you’re going to have attrition. So if you don’t, if you’re not putting food in, obviously shrink. So to run it two, to make it grow three.

Steve: So, can you kind of describe the — so what you’re describing sounds great, but it also sounds a little bit overwhelming. So, what is your process for getting these SOPs created? How do you even deploy these SOPs properly? It sounds like in my mind, you might have like this bundle of SOPs but how do you kind of coordinate what everyone is doing?

Trent: It’s not actually as complicated as you think. So, the old expression, how do you eat an elephant one bite at a time? So, when I started there was no SOPs. So, I sat down and I thought, well, what are the steps to do find a competitive seller, and I simply created a Google document. They don’t live there anymore. They’re not in Google anymore. We’ll get to that in a minute. But in the beginning, I just created the Google document. It says, do this and then I’d have a screenshot with big red arrows, and then do this and have a screenshot with more big red arrows and that’s one SOP. And then you just keep adding more and more and more and more SOPs.

Now, of course, now we’re at, I don’t know, 70 or 80 SOPs, and we’ve got people on a team, Google Docs isn’t cutting it anymore. So we actually built our own software called Flowster, you can find it at Flowster.app, and that is SOP software. And the reason that you need software is as you have more and more SOPs that are kind of in progress and because each SOP is kind of like a mini project, right? Every time you’re doing a competitor extraction, that’s a mini project, you’re just doing it over and over and over and over again.

And we don’t have SOPs just for product sourcing; we have them for PPC campaign management. We have them for shipping and receiving. We have them for purchasing. We have them for inventory management. We have them for listing optimization. We have them for HR, we have them for Amazon account health, and we have them for everything. So, the benefit of having them in software is now each SOP can be kind of like Trello. You can assign members to it, you can give it a due date, you can give it multiple due dates, because if an SOP has like 15 steps, maybe there’s different due dates for the different steps, you can assign those steps to different people. And the software is then sending alerts to everyone saying, hey, you’ve been assigned to this task, the due date is this, click here to begin? It’s what brings cohesion to having what would otherwise be just this huge, fragmented pile of SOP spaghetti.

Steve: Right. No, that makes sense. Actually one question I have as I’m thinking about those right now is when you’re having people look for products, sometimes there’s some gut feeling there. Like, it’s not always about the raw numbers, because I’m thinking about when I’m looking for products to sell, there’s always some amount of intuition involved. And how do you kind of document that?

Trent: So, we don’t really worry about documenting intuition and I’ll explain why. So, let’s say that we send 300 emails in a week. And the product sourcing agent, which is currently me, but I’ll be replaced by one or two plays, they will be trained over time to have the intuition. So they’re looking at, all these emails go out; boom, and then they’re getting replies. And when they get a reply, that’s when they start doing a deeper dive, do I really want to, let’s say a brand replies and they say, well, we don’t want any more Amazon sellers, which is a very common reply. Okay, so now is the product sourcing agent with the intuition, I’m going to look at that brand and I’m going to look for some key attributes.

I’m going to look at, well how much does the brand do in total? Are their sales up year over year? How are their sales over the last quarter? How’s their distribution among their products? What does their product listings look like? And for the main keywords, where do they rank in the search results? Well how much market share do they have relative to their competitors? Do I think there is room for us to help this brand make improvements? And does this brand carry the type of products that we think are really great products and that we’d love to have a relationship with? What’s their social media presence look like?

But there’s other things that the intuition part of it factors in and then that would then allow the product sourcing agent to make a decision of how aggressively or not they’re going to pursue that brand to try and get them to change their mind from a no we don’t want any more Amazon sellers into a yes. And that is where the skill comes in. So, this really large brand that we have, the one that’s got the great name in the fitness niche that is exactly what happened. I picked up the phone and I called them and no, I don’t want any more Amazon sellers. And I started asking the usual questions that I asked. He gave me the answers that I was expecting. I explained to him how we could solve the problems that he was having. And by the 18 minute mark of the phone call, he said, you are approved.

Steve: Nice. I would imagine that’s a lot to do with your skill as a negotiator. What happens when you’re just first starting out and you got nothing?

Trent: So when you’re first starting out and you got nothing, you go for the low hanging fruit. You’re going to pursue like we did smaller brands. Much of the transaction, much of the conversation is going to happen over email. Like we landed plenty of brands in the beginning, I shouldn’t say brands, products; we landed plenty of products in the beginning. We didn’t have exclusivity back then, we would just buy the product if the numbers made sense without ever talking to any human being on the phone. Everything was done over email. The purchase order was sent and we made money on the product.

What happened over time though is you’ll outgrow that as you get bigger and as you get more working capital and your appetite for relationships with brands will trump your desire to just add more products because if you have too many products, it can become difficult to manage because you’re going to have races to the bottom. So those products are going to churn. If you’ve promised brands to do things, but you have too many, it can become overwhelming. Maybe you don’t have enough margin to hire enough people. It’s a great way to get started and that’s how I got to 100 grand a month focusing on products. But now we don’t focus on products. Now we focus on brands.

Steve: What is your process for looking at your portfolio and eliminating the products over time?

Trent: Pretty simple. So again, you have to first of all decide whether you’re product focused or brand focused because if I’m brand focused, and let’s say a given brand has two dozen products and they want me to carry them all, and the 80/20 rule will probably apply. And if 20% of them are making 80% of money and that’s a good healthy account for me; I’ll still keep stock of the ones that aren’t selling, because that was part of the commitment to have the relationship with the brand.

Steve: Okay. And by just keeping them in stock, you’re just keeping them in the warehouse. They might not sell, but you’re just keeping them in there and you’re paying long term storage fees potentially?

Trent: Potentially. But I mean, let’s define how many I’ve got in stock. If they’ve got a product they want me to carry, and it’s not selling very well, I’m not going to own 400 of them. I might own 12.

Steve: Right, that makes sense. That makes sense. And in terms of — I imagine you have like a minimum profit level before you stop carrying a certain product, right?

Trent: Yeah, again, it depends if you are product focused or brand focused. If you’re product focused, I wouldn’t carry a product that makes me less than probably 200 bucks a month because there’s still a small amount of labor in looking at it and doing the reorder and carrying the inventory and 200 bucks a month is not a lot of money. But if you’re brand focused, it’s all about just how much money is this brand making us in total? And that’s always what we look at when we make a decision of whether to continue or not.

Steve: How did you make the transition from product focused to brand focused, did something happen?

Trent: Well, we got to the point where we had cash flow credibility resources and a team. And so, now we could more credibly pursue relationships with bigger brands. And we’re literally at that inflection point right now where I did some analysis of Netrush and a few of the other really fast growing third party sellers that are doing 100 million, 80 million, whatever and I said like, okay, I want to be as big as those guys, what are they doing? And they were carrying much larger brands than us, so we made a decision to place our focus more on now going after bigger brands.

And in order to do that, you better have some credibility. And we have that credibility now, because we’ve got that one really great big brand name, plus we’ve got all of our store reviews, plus we’ve got our revenue and our team and we own our building and blah, blah, blah, blah, blah. But we didn’t have that in the beginning.

Steve: So, what is your pitch now to larger brands, and has that differed from the beginning when you were just pitching individual products?

Trent: The pitch is pretty much the same. You still need to demonstrate to a brand that you’re going to help them solve problems, and that you’re going to bring value to the table. So, it’s not the pitch that changed, we just pointed the gun at bigger targets.

Steve: Okay. But I would imagine you have a set, you have set things that you say that are very convincing, right?

Trent: Yes, the number one pain by far is identifying and ultimately removing unauthorized sellers, especially those that are violating MAP, that’s the biggest problem. There are other problems, but they’re a small problem relative to that one. And then the other thing that’s not so much a problem is just a benefit is and will help you to increase market share, because maybe we can run Pay Per Click campaigns more effectively than you can because we have higher levels of expertise and dedicated people and we pay for expensive software than you do. So, if we can get more market share by doing that, or maybe we’re going to create like one of our this big brand, we create bundles of several of their products that drive entirely new sources of revenue for them and they love that.

Steve: And how do you go about removing these violators of MAP to get these people kicked off?

Trent: Yeah, that’s more of a trade secret because it took us a long time to learn, and there are ways to do it.

Steve: Okay, there’s nothing you can share that’s low hanging fruit?

Trent: No.

Steve: Okay that’s your secret sauce. Well Trent, your secret sauce is also SOPs. I want to give you an opportunity to just kind of talk about what you have to offer and where people can find you online.

Trent: So, what I have to offer, I spoke at a conference on wholesale a year and change ago and I didn’t have anything for sale to help other Amazon sellers at that point in time. And I talked about all my SOPs much like we’ve done today. And a lot of people came to the mics afterwards and said, man, oh man; I don’t want to have to recreate what you built, would you just sell it to me? And so, we decided to take our SOPs and we did turn them into a product called WEBS which stands for Wholesale E-commerce Business Systems. And WEBS are available for sale currently twice per year, and the next time they’re going to be available is actually October 22, so the interview is relatively timely. If people would like to be able to learn more, all they need to do is come to Brightideas.co, become an email subscriber and you will definitely be marketed to, these SOPs will be offered to you.

You can attend the live webinar, you can learn all about them. You can read the FAQ, you can watch the videos. All that stuff kind of starts happening, I think the webinar is October 17th and then the cart will be open for one week. And if someone believes that they’re a good decision for themselves, they can buy them during that week and if they choose not to, then they’ll have to wait for the next time.

Steve: And Trent also has a podcast called Brightideas.co of which I was a guest not too long ago. And Trent is actually going to be speaking at the Sellers Summit next year in May.

Trent: I will indeed.

Steve: So, Trent thanks a lot for coming on the show. I really appreciate your time.

Trent: Thank you very much for having me on Steve, it’s a pleasure.

Steve: Take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Now, I actually had the chance to meet Trent for the first time at the Ecommerce Fuel Live event in New Orleans and we hung out for most of the weekend. And in addition, Trent will also be speaking at the Sellers Summit in May. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode247.

And once again, I want to thank Klaviyo for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for developing real quality customer relationships. And right now they just released a cool docuseries called Beyond Black Friday where you can learn successful e-commerce marketing strategies from real companies using their platform. Now, the docuseries is free and you could check it out at Klaviyo.com/beyondbf, once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf.

I also want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop-ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. If you want to give it a try, it is free. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

Now, I talk about how I use these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own e-commerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.Mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

246: Everything You Need To Know About Sales Tax With Martina Chavez Of Avalara

246: Everything You Need To Know About Sales Tax With Martina Chavez Of Avalara

Martina Chavez is an expert in sales tax compliance over at Avalara and I invited her on the show today to clear the air in regards to everything that is happening with Amazon and nexus when it comes to paying sales tax.

Ever since the decision of the supreme court case Wayfair vs South Dakota was handed down, states may now charge tax on purchases made from out of state sellers even if the seller doesn’t have a physical presence in the taxing state. This has enormous implications to ecommerce.

What You’ll Learn

  • Martina’s sales tax background
  • Do you have pay sales tax in all 50 states?
  • What states does Amazon collect taxes on behalf of sellers and how does that work?
  • How are my Amazon revenues taxed for sales from customers in states that require sales tax?
  • The easiest way to file your sales taxes across all states

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into the strategies they used to grow their businesses. Now, today I have Martina Chavez on the podcast, and Martina is an expert when it comes to sales tax compliance. And as you know, the entire e-commerce world has been in utter chaos ever since the Supreme Court decision of Wayfair versus South Dakota ruled that states may now charge sales tax on purchases made out of state. Anyway, today we’re going to talk about what’s going on in sales tax land and how to be compliant with your e-commerce business.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Klaviyo is the tool that I use to build real quality customer relationships with my e-commerce store. And because all my transactions and email correspondence is tracked in Klaviyo, I can easily build meaningful customer relationships by listening, understanding, and taking cues from my customers and deliver personalized marketing messages. So for example, with one click of a button, I can easily send a specific and targeted email to all customers with a lifetime value of over $100 who purchased red handkerchiefs in the past year.

Now, it is for this reason why over 10,000 brands have switched over to Klaviyo. And right now they have this cool docuseries called Beyond Black Friday where they discuss successful marketing strategies that their customers are using that you can emulate with your business. So, head on over to Klaviyo.com/beyondbf, once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf.

I also want to give a shout out to Privy who is also a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. Now what does Privy do? Well, Privy is an email list growth platform and they manage all of my email capture forms. And in fact, I use Privy hand-in-hand with my email marketing provider. Now there a bunch of companies out there that will manage your email capture forms, but I like Privy because they specialize in e-commerce. Right now I’m using Privy to display a cool wheel of fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prices in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this. And when I implemented this form email signups increased by 131%.

I’m also using their new cart saver pop up feature to recover abandoned carts as well. So bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers, which I then feed to my email provider to close the sale. So head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve. Now onto the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m really happy to have Martina Chavez on the show. Now, Martina is an expert in sales tax compliance over at Avalara. And I invited her on the show today to kind of clear the air in regards to everything that is happening with Amazon and Nexus when it comes to paying sales tax. And as you may or may not know, there was a huge uproar over the collection of sales tax ever since the decision of the Supreme Court case Wayfair versus South Dakota was handed down.

Well, states may now charge tax on purchases made from out of state sellers even if the seller does not have a physical presence in the taxing state. Now this is huge and extremely important to understand the implications for e-commerce and I’ve got a ton of questions for Martina today. And with that, welcome to show, how you doing today Martina?

Martina: I’m doing very well Steve, thank you so much for having me; it’s good to be here.

Steve: So, Martina, give the audience a brief bio in regards to who you are and your background in the area of sales tax compliance.

Martina: Sure, happy to do that. So hey everyone listening, thanks for joining. So like Steve said, I’m with Avalara. I have actually just celebrated my five years at Avalara, which is very exciting. Avalara is a global sales tax compliance software solution. We also offer a whole lot of other ancillary compliance options including professional services. So we’re not just software but primarily software. And when I started with Avalara, I knew nothing about sales tax. So, I definitely didn’t go into working at Avalara with some form of expertise.

I came from a company that I was doing accounting actually at, and we were using Avalara as a sales tax software to help us sort it all out on our end for billing, and definitely had many calls with customers who would say, hey, this isn’t my sales tax. And then I would get to click into the Avalara dashboard and be like, actually, according to this jurisdictional breakdown, here it is. And so, it was really cool to be able to have that direct experience with our product, and then later move into the world of talking about it on a daily basis and learning about it on a daily basis.

So, started with Avalara in business development, working with our technology partners, so helping partners integrate our solution into their platforms or build an API so that their customers could utilize our service because most people don’t want to get into the mess of learning or trying to offer a solution for sales tax. It’s really, really complex and it’s changing constantly as I think everyone listening probably knows to a certain degree.

Steve: We’re going to dig deep into the mess.

Martina: Yeah we definitely are. So yeah, so that’s kind of how it all began and then over the years, it’s something that I’m constantly being confronted with. And now I’m working very specifically with the marketplace channel. I’ve been working in and around the world of Amazon and supporting Amazon sellers for the last four years that I was at Avalara. So I’ve kind of been growing up with this new trend of sales tax compliance for the online seller or the Amazon seller, the marketplace seller or whatever category you want to put yourself in.

Steve: Let’s start by talking about Amazon actually. So how does Amazon collect taxes today? I’ve heard that they collect in certain states, but it’s your responsibility to pay the IRS. Other times they pay depending on the state and you’re still responsible for filing. How does it work right now?

Martina: So, right now when it comes to sales tax, which is different than income tax, I just want to make sure there’s that distinction. When it comes to sales tax, Amazon does have a calculation engine that they use to support the seller on their platform which is great. It’s a free tool for the seller to use but the seller is still obligated to determine where that sales tax needs to be collected. So, if you’re living in California for example, then it’s a pretty much a no brainer that because you live here that it is your home state and therefore you’re obligated to collect sales tax here. And because you’re selling on Amazon and maybe you’re using FBA, your inventory could be in a lot of places. And before last June 21st, which we’ll get into what that date means and kind of everything that’s happened since June 21st of 2018, but the rules in each state are different around why and when you need to collect sales tax.

So, Nexus is this fancy term for physical presence that is used throughout every state throughout the US to identify who is obligated to collect sales tax. And again, each state has a little bit different variation on who they think is liable. So, a state that doesn’t collect sales tax like Oregon, you wouldn’t be obligated to collect sales tax there ever because there’s no sales tax. So, that’s an easy one, right? But if you’re living in California and say you sell into Washington, that’s an interesting one because Washington is one of the marketplace fairness [ph] states.

So, the state of Washington has ruled that Amazon and other marketplaces have to remit the sales tax that’s collected on behalf of the seller, but the seller is still obligated to register and file that that sales tax was collected. So, the seller is actually not completely off the hook. And I think that there’s a little bit of confusion there. I get that question a lot. We get that question through the sales team a lot, customers who are coming to us seeking our support. So Washington is an example of that. And then there’s going to be other states like South Dakota, which, this might be a good segue to kind of start talking about the economic Nexus side of things, but there’s other states that have different rules about when you’re supposed to collect sales tax and the seller is obligated to do that.

Once you as a seller have said, yep, I’m getting registered and you get your ID, your identification number to tell the state that you are collecting sales tax. Then you can set it all up in Amazon in your seller central profile, and then Amazon will in fact just start that calculation process for you so you don’t have to do anything.

Steve: So, just to kind of sum up what you just said, right now, Washington is one of those states where Amazon will collect taxes on your behalf when you sell into Seattle or Washington. However, you still have to do some work. You still have to register in that state, even though Amazon is still paying sales tax on your behalf.

Martina: Correct, that’s exactly right.

Steve: Okay. And there’s only a handful of states that are currently like that, right? Do you happen to know which ones off the top of your head or?

Martina: I have a handy dandy map in front of me that our company actually keeps up to date all the time. And so the crazy thing is, there’s so many different changes all the time that I’m constantly having to reference that. It’s hard to keep it all in on the top of the head, but yes, I do.

Steve: I’ll just post that maybe underneath the podcast in the show notes.

Martina: Yeah, that would be great. So I’ll send you that link for the map because this has just a ton of information on it, and you’ll be able to identify exactly which states are technically what collecting or I shouldn’t say collecting, remitting on behalf of the seller and then which states have economic Nexus and which states have affiliate or click through Nexus. And so, there’s some other forms of Nexus that sellers should be aware of.

Steve: Now, in terms of the states that are not remitting on your behalf, what do you have to do?

Martina: So, states that are not remitting on your behalf, which is most of them and majority of states are not remitting on behalf of the seller. You have to do that yourself. So in addition to filing, you also have to send in the money. So that’s really the only difference which I think is — I actually think for most people, the filing portion of it is the more challenging part because that’s the part where you have to aggregate your data and you have to know exactly how much sales tax you collected in what state and what jurisdiction it’s supposed to go to. And then you’re supposed to say, hey, state of wherever, State of California, here is my document saying that I collected all of the sales tax and it is due in XYZ location. And also here is the money.

So, really the only thing that the state of Washington now is requiring Amazon and marketplaces to do is to send them the money. Yeah. All the other complexities of it still rely or still live with the seller.

Steve: So a common question that I’ve been getting asked is, let’s say I live in California, but I don’t have a physical presence in New York, for example, why should I have to pay sales tax in New York? And I think this is like a good segue to that court case. So, if you wouldn’t mind kind of summarizing what happened in June 21st of last year, that’d be great.

Martina: Sure absolutely. So last year was a very, very exciting year in the world of sales tax. And so, what was going on prior to June 21st was there was a case of South Dakota versus Wayfair Inc. And it was presented to the Supreme Court, and basically the case involved South Dakota saying, hey Wayfair, you because you sell into our state, you owe us sales tax, we want to enact an economic Nexus rule. And it was specifically in relationship to Wayfair at the time. And so, they were saying even though you don’t have a physical presence, you don’t have warehouses, you don’t have employees living here, your headquarters isn’t here, you haven’t gone to trade shows, those are all examples of what could potentially trigger a physical presence in a state.

The Supreme Court ruled in favor of South Dakota. So, they said, yeah, South Dakota you’re right, you actually we agree with you, we think that Wayfair Inc. should be paying sales tax or should be collecting sales tax I should say for any of the sales that they’re making into your state. And so, thereby there was economic Nexus was then ruled to be a law. So, all of a sudden South Dakota is this first state doing that and all of a sudden all these other states started to enact the same law. They’re saying, oh okay, South Dakota just got that ruling; we’re going to do the same thing. And so, it’s been kind of this slow but not that slow process of lot of new states then coming to enact the exact same law.

So, economic Nexus and in the State of South Dakota to start, what they’re saying is there’s threshold. So it’s not every single person who makes a sale ever like if you’re selling something and you sell something one time and it was a $20 sale, you’re not all of a sudden obligated to start collecting sales tax in South Dakota. So they did create threshold triggers. So in South Dakota, and I can go over the triggers that come up for other states as well. But in South Dakota specifically, it was $200,000 or — excuse me, no $100,000 or 200 or more separate transactions or both.

So, if you sell more than $100,000, or if you make more than 200 transactions, so those transactions could be $10 each but there you are, you’ve then triggered this economic Nexus obligation which means that as a seller whether you’re selling on Amazon or you’re selling through your online store BigCommerce, Shopify, whatever platform you’re selling through, you are now obligated to register and start collecting sales tax going forward. So, one thing to also just be aware of, is when you register for sales tax collection in a state, you’re basically saying, okay, so I hit that threshold this year. So I’m registering to collect sales tax for basically ever for the life of my business. So even if the following year you don’t hit the threshold, you’re still registered, you’re still telling the state that I am going to collect sales tax, so that that process has already happened.

Steve: Because you have to pay sales tax in all the different states now, it seems like for a small business owner that burden is tremendous.

Martina: Yeah, yeah so great question. So yes and no, I think it depends on the case, right? So, if a seller has been selling for let’s say a year or more, and they’re only collecting currently in their home state, and maybe they’re selling it through FBA, so they have a lot of inventory and a lot of places and they already have a physical presence obligation and let’s say they’re a top seller. If they are top seller, and they know that that revenue marker is a kind of an easy threshold for them to have already hit or hit very soon, then yes, they’re going to have to start thinking about what economic Nexus means for them in a very real way.

The good news is because economic Nexus is something that just passed; it’s not something that they would have to be worried about for five years of back taxes for example. It’s something that in the case of South Dakota, that legislation though it passed, it wasn’t enacted, it wasn’t June 21st, 2018. The process takes some time to actually make it a viable ruling. So, there are other states though, that have followed suit. And California and New York are the most recent ones and those are huge states that most people are selling into. And so, I think that those two states in particular are the ones that I think are the kind of the biggest triggers for people.

Steve: Can we talk about California real quick? Mainly because I know a number of the students in my class, they got notices from California to start filing and they came to me asking questions, and I was just kind of curious what your take is. When you get one of these notices, what do you do?

Martina: Rule of thumb; don’t ignore it, so ignoring it is not going to help. California is a really aggressive state, they will keep coming after you and they’re pretty real repercussions on not being in compliance and it goes far beyond. It can go far beyond just your business, this can affect your family from credit and liens and that sort of thing. So, it’s not something to ignore. You want to talk to somebody, talk to a ideally a state and local tax expert, an accountant who really does have the expertise in state and local taxes, who can say, okay, so here’s you got this notice.

What does this mean for you? Do you start collecting sales tax? Do you register and start collecting sales tax as of today, or do you have back taxes that you should have been collecting for over the years? And if so, do we do a voluntary disclosure agreement with the state? So there are things, there are ways to move forward successfully as a business, but definitely the one thing not to do is don’t ignore it.

Steve: Since I live in California, I know that there’s like 25 different sales taxes, depending on the region. Are they really expecting a small business owner to take care of that stuff?

Martina: So here’s another piece of good news for you. You don’t actually have to keep track of the different kinds of or the different sales tax jurisdictions, because Amazon as a platform and other software solutions like Avalara will take care of the calculations for you. So, that includes knowing when there’s a jurisdiction change and knowing the tax rate in X, Y, Z location. And you’re right. There are a lot of different jurisdictions, there’s over 600 in the United States. I mean, there’s tons, we have another map that we can share with your audience to kind of give you an idea of all of the different tax rates that exist. And then, and it’s just an example. It’s just a visual example of, yeah, this thing is, it’s a beast, it’s complex, and it’s different everywhere, and the rules are constantly changing.

So, the point is that you shouldn’t have to do it manually, there’s software out there to help you with that. So, from a calculation standpoint, I wouldn’t be worried or concerned about that side of things, because Amazon already takes care of it. If you’re using another platform, like a BigCommerce or Shopify, good news, again, Avalara is actually embedded into both BigCommerce and Shopify platforms. That’s at least the calculation engine is free in both of those platforms, powered by Avalara. And then we have integrations to over 500 e-commerce and accounting platforms, so there’s really kind of no place that we wouldn’t be able to support or some other form of support wouldn’t be available.

Steve: So, I think your answer might be a little biased but let’s say I just started selling online and hopefully you won’t be biased, but do I really need to register in all 50 states?

Martina: That is a phenomenal question and the answer is no, and I’ll say this with confidence because first of all we know that there isn’t sales tax in all 50 states. So, you at least 46 states are not sales tax worthy, you wouldn’t have to collect in the in those.

Steve: 46 states.

Martina: So 46 states but the answer is no. So, if you’ve just started selling, most often you’re selling into — and let’s use Amazon FBA as an example just because it’s an easy way to kind of think about this, most often your inventory is living in maybe two to three states to begin with. And it really depends on what the demand ends up looking like and what your total inventory ends up looking like. And so, usually start with a few states because that’s where your inventory is actually living, so you start with your home state, get registered there definitely, that’s no brainer and get registered in your home state assuming you have sales tax in that state.

And then you would have to track where your inventory is landing, so you have to also abide by the physical presence rules, so those don’t go away just because economic Nexus is now a layer on top of that. And then the next thing to track is how much revenue you’re driving from individual states that have enacted this economic Nexus rule. And like I said, we have a resource for you so we have a map and then below the map is this really great breakdown of all the different states, when they have had economic Nexus enacted and what the thresholds are.

And so, you’ll be able to determine, okay, so I’m selling in California, and I know my inventory lives in Texas and in Florida let’s just say, so start by registering in California, get registered in Texas, get registered in Florida, start collecting there, watch where your sales are going. And if you see your sales going into a state that has economic Nexus, for example, South Dakota, keep an eye on where that threshold limit is at. So maybe you only sell $25,000 into South Dakota and you hit 100 units let’s say, no sweat, you do not register. You did not hit the economic Nexus.

Steve: It just sounds like such a huge burden. So, thresholds every state has different thresholds, right? Like how am I going to do frack all the thresholds of all my sales? It seems like I would need like a dedicated person to do that.

Martina: Yeah, so again, this is where software comes into play. And of course, I’m biased. I believe wholeheartedly in the software that Avalara has to be able to track all this, but there are other software options out there. And so, at the end of the day what it comes down to is there is an obligation for the seller to take their business really seriously when it comes to sales tax compliance, and unfortunately states in the US has not made that an easy burden. And it’s interesting, what I think is so interesting about the marketplace channel and one of the reasons that I love working with Amazon sellers and other folks selling online is because this is like the new frontier.

This is global commerce is changing and it’s changing super-fast and anyone selling online is a part of that change. And states have traditionally relied on sales tax coming from brick and mortar stores to support them, so whether that’s keeping the roads safe or putting in those traffic lights or whatever other services, and we all experience every day that we all benefit from like our police officers and our firefighters like sales tax is a part of that revenue. And so, states of losing revenue because people are buying online and not buying in the stores in the same volume that they used to. So, that’s why states have started coming up with all of these new ways to collect the sales tax. And it’s smart on their end, but it’s hard on the hard on the business owner. And so it is something that’s very real. But again, software is available to help all of these processes.

Steve: So, do you have any insights on where the legislation is going or what’s going on right now? I would imagine there’s lawsuits going left and right, or discussions going on and how states can possibly enforce all of this stuff.

Martina: So, good question. I actually don’t have a ton of insight into any of that. What I have insight into is just as it comes, the new legislations that are passed and new states that opt into economic Nexus. And that’s something that we keep up to date through the website at Avalara.com. But aside from that, I’m not in the rooms with the lawmakers so I don’t know. I do, I definitely know, I’m very aware that there are a lot of Amazon sellers and probably others but I feel like Amazon sellers maybe are just the most vocal in kind of expressing their upset about these new legislations and the impact that it could have on them and their business.

And so, I know that there’s some folks who are getting together to kind of try to fight it and there’s definitely two sides of the camp I think. There’s some folks that I talked to who are like, yeah, I just got into compliance and I’m using software to support me and it’s fine. I would rather be in compliance then be a risk of my family potentially being harmed by me not kind of following the rules and then having a state like California come after me and my home and that sort of thing. So that’s literally, a conversation I’ve had with a number of sellers before.

And then there’s other conversations I’ve had where sellers are like, yeah, like, I’m not doing anything, they have to come after me, they have to come after me for me to believe this. And that’s, it’s a choice and it’s a business choice. And I think this is one of the things that we do talk about this when we talk to sellers is you’re measuring your risk in involved, right. So it may be that the risk of not being in compliance doesn’t outweigh the flip side of being in compliance. So being in compliance, what does that mean as far as time and resources and maybe some financial burden as well, at least in the initial stages. It does cost more money to get registered and in states and it definitely takes time.

But going forward, once you’re registered, it’s just a pass through the, you’re not actually — sales tax is not your money. It is the customers’ money; it’s the consumers’ money. So, it’s passing through you, you end up being becoming kind of the tax man and in a weird sort of way. But then on, the other side of it is for some people, they are of the opinion of, yeah, I’m not going to get registered, I don’t really sell that much. It’s just not huge enough. So, if they do come after me, and I owe a penalty, it’s not going to be a penalty that’s really that harmful to me or my business. And so, that’s something that can be weighed. And it’s always a business decision.

Steve: So, if you can take off your Avalara hat for a minute, let’s say there’s a company that’s been selling for five years, they only collect sales tax in their home state because that’s where they have Nexus, what would you advise that they do, and how do you come up with these decisions on whether to wait till they come after you or be proactive about it?

Martina: It’s hard to take off the Avalara hat because this is what I’ve been doing for the last five years. And I do have to say, I’m not a tax advisor. So I have opinions but I’m not — I definitely wouldn’t want to be held accountable for someone making a decision based on my…

Steve: Of course, absolutely that’s a given. That’s a given.

Martina: Disclaimer, disclaimer yeah. So you’re saying you are, let’s pretend it’s you. So Steve, you’ve been selling for five years, you’ve been collecting in your home state?

Steve: California yep.

Martina: In California. Good that’s great. I’m glad you’re collecting in California.

Steve: I know right. The most aggressive state yeah.

Martina: Of any of the states, California, Texas, and Florida are pretty aggressive yeah. Colorado actually is or Denver is. Yeah anyways, we could get into all the different states, but so you’re collecting in California and you’re selling on Amazon. Is that — was that the?

Steve: Yeah. Let’s say you’re selling on Amazon.

Martina: Okay. So, I mean, there’s information you should have. This is kind of the stance that I have. I think it’s about you being armed with information so that you can make those decisions. But my opinion would be, look, if you really care about your business and you want to keep doing this business, it would behoove you to seek some professional advisement around your sales tax obligations. So, there’s accountants that you can talk to who can give you the kind of the right information but there’s options for you. You can either get voluntary disclosure agreement if your sales tax obligation is so big across many, many states.

If it ends up at the end of the day determined that you have a physical presence that you should have been collecting sales tax in, let’s say, five states plus economic Nexus thresholds have been hit in another four or five states, and you have suddenly have 10 more states that you’re needing to collect and remit sales tax and potentially should have been for four or five years, that’s a bigger case. I think most people aren’t going to be in that situation.

A lot of times, when we’re talking to folks especially, and I’m going back into Avalara hat land, but when we talk to people and we have accountants in the conversation, a lot of times the experts that we’re engaged with are of the mindset that it’s okay to start collecting from now on and you’ll just move forward because at the end of the day, the states are really just looking for people to start giving the money. They’re like, can you just start collecting sales tax, but sometimes it’s bigger than that and there’s nuances there. And that would just be something that you’d have to work with an expert on.

Steve: Okay. Have you heard of any cases where a company has just gotten totally busted and ruined as a result of this?

Martina: Yeah, unfortunately, yeah. I mean, it was like three years ago maybe, there was an entity that came to us, and a lot of times, people who come to us just kind of going off on a tangent here for a second, but a lot of times when people come to us, it unfortunately is not a proactive thing. People are becoming more proactive now, but a lot of times it’s because they’ve just gotten audited or other, and so they’re kind of like man okay, we need help. So, we’d like to promote that preventative method. But yeah, we’ve had a few sellers come to us in the past saying, hey, this is my situation. I’ve got states coming after me, they’re getting the letters.

Once you get the letters, the states know, if you’re getting a letter, the state knows that you have an obligation to collect sales tax and they are going to come after you. That is what they’re telling, they’re saying, we know, we have people on staff who we’ve hired to do this job to basically come after you and others. And we had a seller who it would have been over a million dollars for him to actually get in compliance because there was so many back taxes and that was with a voluntary disclosure agreement.

So, what’s crazy is that that’s like a long time that’s many, many years of selling and not collecting in a lot of states at high volume, at high revenue and never collecting the sales tax and not remitting anything. And so there were penalties and interest, and even though with a voluntary disclosure agreement, those penalties and interest get minimized to a certain degree, you have to pay a big lump sum all at once just to kind of be like, okay, here is all the money, it’s not 100%, all of it, you’ve given me a little break on the penalties and interest but here’s a lot of it all at once. And this person was would have owed all at once over a million dollars. And that puts them out of business. It’s just like it was too much.

So yes, so there’s unfortunate circumstances. The good news is that’s rare. It’s actually like not — it’s not the everyday scenario. Most people don’t have that kind of massive volume in their sales as online sellers, and so if they’re doing a voluntary disclosure agreement, it’s a much more manageable amount to pay. And then if that’s not necessary, then really all that they’re looking at is the immediate expense that comes along with getting registered and starting to collect and pay going forward.

Steve: Right. Okay. Yeah, fair enough. Well Martina, thanks a lot for coming on the show and lending your expertise. If anyone wants to find you with more questions, where can they get you?

Martina: They can find me at Avalara.com. You can get a lot of information online but you can email me if you have questions, Martina.Chavez@avalara.com. If you’re going to be at a show coming up, we’re going to be at Prosper, we’ll be at Sellers Summit, so we’ll hopefully see some folks there as well. I’m looking forward to that Steve and yeah, we float around a lot of different places so find us in many places, but you can reach out to me directly at Martina.Chavez@avalara.com.

Steve: Awesome. Well Martina, I really appreciate your time.

Martina: Yeah. Thanks so much Steve, I appreciate it.

Steve: All right. Take care.

Martina: Okay, you too. Bye-bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Now, I probably get asked about sales tax at least three times a week. So, hopefully this episode with Martina has answered all those questions. For more information about this episode, go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode246.

And once again, I want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop-ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. If you want to give it a try, it is free. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants where you can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post-purchase flow, a win-back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on autopilot. So, head on over to Mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s Mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

Now, I talk about how I use both of these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own e-commerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.Mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

245: A Student’s Candid Journey Selling On Amazon And How To Email Jeff Bezos

245: A Student's Candid Journey Selling On Amazon And How To Email Jeff Bezos

Today I have a special guest on the show, Maria. Maria is a student in my Create A Profitable Online Store Course who is making 6 figures with her business and last week, I invited her to come talk to the other members of the class about her experiences starting her ecommerce business.

But instead of celebrating her success as an entrepreneur, I asked her to provide a candid account of her experiences including all of her struggles, her triumphs and how she overcame various obstacles on her journey.

This is a very raw episode and in fact, my chat with Maria was not intended for the podcast. But it got such rave reviews from the other students in the class that I decided to publish it for your enjoyment.

Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Maria found her niche
  • How Maria found her vendors
  • How to negotiate low MOQs
  • How to email Jeff Bezos and get a resolution
  • How to establish great relationships with your suppliers

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

GoBrandWin.com – The fastest and most effective way to grow your email list for free using group giveaways. Click here to signup for free.

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and dig deep into what strategies they use to grow their businesses. Now today I have a special guest on the show, Maria Finch. Now Maria is a student in my Create a Profitable Online Store course who is making six figures with their e-commerce business. And last week, I invited her to come talk to the other members of the class about her experiences starting her e-commerce business.

But instead of celebrating her success as an entrepreneur, I asked her to provide a very candid account of her experiences, including all of her struggles, her triumphs and how she overcame various obstacles on her journey. Now, this is a very raw episode, and in fact, my chat with Maria was actually not intended for this podcast. But it got such rave reviews from the other students in my class that I decided to publish it for your enjoyment.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Privy who is a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. Right now I’m using Privy to display a cool wheel of fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prices in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this. And when I implemented this form email signups increased by 131%.

You can also use Privy to reduce cart abandonment with cart saver pops and abandoned cart email sequence as well at one super low price that is much cheaper than using a full blown email marketing solution. So, bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers and recover lost sales. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is also a sponsor of the show. Klaviyo is the tool that I use to build real quality customer relationships with my e-commerce store. And because all my transactions and email correspondence is tracked in Klaviyo, I can easily build meaningful customer relationships by listening, understanding and taking cues from my customers and delivering personalized marketing messages. So for example, with one click of a button, I can easily send a specific and targeted email to all customers with a lifetime value of over $100 who purchased handkerchiefs in the past year.

Now, it is for this reason why over 10,000 brands have switched over to Klaviyo. And right now they have this cool docuseries called Beyond Black Friday where they discuss successful marketing strategies that their customers are using that you can emulate with your business. So, head on over to Klaviyo.com/beyondbf to check it out. Once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf, now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here’s your host Steve Chou.

Steve: I have Maria in the class and I’ve spoken to her in the past — I think — was it a consult that we had or something like that?

Maria: It was after I hit 3,000 points.

Steve: After she hit 3,000 points. And you’ve been in the class for two years, three years.

Maria: So I started in March of 2016 so almost three years.

Steve: March of 2016, yeah, so almost three years. And what I liked about Maria is one, she’s very well spoken, two, She’s very competent, and she knows what she’s doing or she’s a quick learner. Over time, she’s developed a lot of skills. And what I wanted to do is I get asked these questions all the time from the students. And one of the main problems is that once someone becomes successful in the class, a lot of times they tend to clam up because Amazon especially is a very competitive area. And there’s always this fear that if you reveal your product, other people might jump in and copy and that sort of thing.

So, you’ll notice that whenever I go on the podcast with the students or whatnot, it’s almost always with someone who already has a solid website and their own following. And Maria has been doing very well in the past couple of years. And so, what I thought and she was gracious enough to come on office hours and kind of talk about her experiences, kind of like her struggles, her triumphs and what she’s gotten stuck on, and that sort of thing. And I don’t want to do all the talking here Maria, if you want to give a quick intro to yourself, that’d be great.

Maria: Sure. I mean, so I have been doing this since March of 2016. I found Steve’s class after doing extensive research because it was really important to me to find a class that would be thorough, that was detailed and given by somebody who had a presentation style that I could stomach. I looked at a lot of different classes and some of them I was like, okay, it might be good content, but I don’t like to hear this person talk. Steve has it all, and I love that you always are refreshing your content, etc. So that was where I began at. I began with research on Jungle Scout, I ran it by Steve and I — are you still doing that?

Steve: I do, I do it for a lot — I am actually overloaded with them. So by the way, just quick aside, if you’ve submitted a niche critique for me, please be patient. It takes me like two or three days to do it and I have a whole bunch of them. So and I like to think about a little bit and do a little bit of competitive analysis before I respond. That’s why it takes a little longer, sorry, go on.

Maria: Well, so I will tell you that I came up with the niche and I ran it by Steve and Steve said, this looks like worth investigating further. He didn’t say yes, this is going to be successful because it’s like you’re giving it your best guess. But that really mattered to me. And so from there, I ordered a test market amount of products. I put them up, I sold them in a few days at a higher price than I thought I could and then I was like, okay, here’s my niche.

Steve: That’s great.

Maria: And I’ve just gone from there. And I mean I can give you all kinds of detail.

Steve: Well, you know what? Let’s start from the beginning. So you bought your first batch. And how large was it again?

Maria: I did about 10.

Steve: Ten okay. And then what did you do with those 10?

Maria: So, I had them air shipped to me because I wanted to put them up quickly. I put them up on Amazon. And in the meantime, I looked — so I ordered something that existed. So it was like, I went on Alibaba, I found something that existed. I said, okay, I’m going to try this. As soon as I got it, I decided how I wanted to modify that product. So, I put them up on Amazon to sell them and then I started making my own design. And then I went back to the manufacturer with my own design. I had them produce 20 of them and I ran a test market with my own design, and that went better than I could have imagined.

Steve: So let’s back up a little bit. So that first one that you just listed as is, how did that do, and did you run ads and whatnot for that first batch of 10?

Maria: I didn’t, I just put it up and those they sold but while that was up and selling, I started working on the other design. And I did a pretty quick turnaround to get my own design on there. My own design sold faster.

Steve: Right. So what I was trying to — so at this point, you were still trying to figure out whether this product had legs or not, right?

Maria: Yeah.

Steve: So did you get any initial sales that kind of convinced you of that fact for that first batch of 10?

Maria: Yes. But it was really when I got the batch of 20 that was my own design and they sold very quickly that I said, okay, this is good.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk about that second batch of 20 then. As soon as you put it up, did you do anything to promote it, or did it just kind of sell on its own?

Maria: I didn’t do anything because I didn’t yet have any reviews. What I did, I had a couple friends buy them and put up reviews for me. And then this was — I mean, I wasn’t offering a discount or anything. These were just friends of mine who were helping me out. So I had a couple reviews but I didn’t do any PPC, I didn’t do anything like that. But I sold out of them in eight days, and I increased the price by $12 over eight days.

Steve: Okay, someone in the class is asking what was your original budget?

Maria: So, I didn’t — I had money that I was prepared to invest in this business. And so I wasn’t going from a budget. I just said, I’m like, okay, I’m going to start out with 20 of these. I’m going to see what happens. So, that initial 20 plus the air shipping, etc. cost me a couple hundred dollars.

Steve: Okay.

Maria: And so basically, I was making a couple hundred dollar decision to decide, am I going to dive deeper into this?

Steve: And those changes that you made with your product, can you kind of describe that process?

Maria: So, I’m just going to go ahead and reveal what I do and I’m going to ask the people in the class, don’t copy me. So, I sell [inaudible 00:08:50] and I have lived overseas in multiple places in the world where [inaudible 00:08:56] were essential for life. So, when I got the first [inaudible 00:08:59] right away, I was like, okay, here are the things that I would change based on my own experience with using this. So, it was a pretty personal decision about what I decided to change.

Steve: Oh, that’s not what I meant, actually. How did you work with the manufacturer to make those changes?

Maria: Oh, okay, sorry, I misunderstood you. So, first thing is on Alibaba I chose only gold level. I made sure they were trade assured, I did all of that stuff. I initially sent emails to maybe five different manufacturers saying, here’s what I want to do, can you do it? I followed one of the things that you had put out. And then the manufacturer who I felt like gave me the best answers, that’s the one that I bought the original samples with, which was an as is, and then that’s the one that I started corresponding with and saying, here are the changes I’d like to make, do you have this ability? And they were great and I have worked with them ever since.

Steve: So, were those changes, you just described them in words or did you — like how complicated were these changes?

Maria: They were simple enough that I could describe them in words and drawings. So, I made some drawings and then I was really careful in how I said things. And we had quite a bit of back and forth. I mean, the manufacturer was really good at asking me detailed questions, which I appreciated.

Steve: And then, how many samples were produced back and forth until you kind of came up with your final one?

Maria: One.

Steve: Really, okay, that’s amazing. Even for me for a handkerchief, it sometimes takes a couple iterations.

Maria: Yeah, I mean, with later products that I’ve done, I’ve had more back and forth but the first one they just got it right, right away.

Steve: Okay. And then did you have any quality issues at all?

Maria: No, I have been really lucky. So, I have everything inspected in China before it’s shipped and I use Asia Inspection. So, I have found that Asia Inspection almost always fails everything, but then when I go in and I read the details, I find that what they’re failing are not really things that I would fail for. There has only been once that they came up with a defect that I was like, oh, this really isn’t okay. And this was a lot later in my journey. And I emailed the manufacturer, I said, hey, sorry, this is just not acceptable. And they actually on their own dime, they went back and they corrected every single one. And they sent me photographs, they sent me a video of them doing it, but that was because I have put a tremendous amount of energy into building really good relationships with my manufacturers.

So they’re invested in me in the same way that I’m invested in them. And I really feel like this was such a good example. Like I said, this is not going to work and they said, oh, we’re so sorry. I had been very clear. So when I place an order, I make a list and I say, these are the things you’re going to be inspected on, and so you should be paying attention to these things as you make them. So I always do that beforehand. And in this case, they said you told us this and we blew it. So it’s on us to fix it, and they fixed it.

Steve: When you get your inspections, do you get it done on the line, at the end, or both?

Maria: I’ve only done them at the end.

Steve: At the end. Okay, so when you caught this error, they had already produced a bunch of them?

Maria: They had already produced 4,650.

Steve: Wow. Okay, so clearly if this was your first order, that might not have come out the way that…

Maria: Oh, it would not have, it would have been a total disaster. So, I think that a couple of things, number one is, I would never start with a big order. I would start with smaller orders and build up even though you’re going to pay more, who cares? It’s better to pay a little more and have the security of knowing that you’ve got a manageable amount to inspect and you can feel confident that the inspection is valid, etc. So I’d start small and build up.

Steve: Okay. And so, a question from the class; was it hard to find a manufacturer who would allow for such a low order number? You mentioned you only produce 20 of your custom design? How did you convince them to just produce 20?

Maria: So, what I did was I said, this is — I explained that I was going to do a test to market and that to do a test market, I needed a small number and that as long as this went well, that I would be ordering a lot more and they believed me.

Steve: Okay, did you have a voice contact or was this just through email?

Maria: All email?

Steve: Really? Okay. That is amazing. You must be very convincing. Usually to produce low quantities like that, I would have to get on the on the phone with them or like on Skype or whatever with them. So it just depends on the manufacturer. Do you remember the language that you used to get such a low number, or was it just exactly what you said?

Maria: I can go back and find it because I sent it by email. But I mean, I don’t remember off the top of my head. This was years ago.

Steve: Of course.

Maria: I mean, I can find the language, I can send you the language if you want.

Steve: Okay, what was I going to ask about that? Okay, so first of all, how much do you pay per inspection? And then, because of that incident, did you start changing your inspection towards like the front of the line as opposed to all at the very end?

Maria: So the inspections are, I’ve done sort of the same level; it’s like level two or something in Asia Inspection. If you go in, you can see their pricing, so it’s like $360, something like that. And so, it was my most recent order where this error happened that they fixed, and I haven’t ordered again yet, so I haven’t changed anything yet. And honestly, I don’t really think I would, because I feel like I have such a good relationship with this manufacturer that if I’m really clear in saying this is what I expect and this is what you’re going to be inspected on, I mean, it seems like they’ll honor it.

Steve: Right. Yeah, I mean, I’ll just tell a quick story. And you guys might have heard this on my podcast with the handkerchiefs where we got fabric that was all kind of slightly blue, and we couldn’t sell it. Now, ultimately, the manufacturer, we have a great relationship, they were willing to make it right. But that was like another four or five months gone, right? We weren’t going to get product. And so what we started doing now, and this is kind of why I was asking you is we front load the inspection to just grab like the first couple pieces off the line. And so that way, they haven’t made a whole bunch yet and we catch it now much earlier.

Maria: So, one of the things that I do is they send me photographs, they send me detailed photographs of the first ones they make.

Steve: Okay, yeah, so for us, the photograph would not have actually exposed the problem. It would have had — it’s like a slight shade of white that’s different. So we would have had to have seen the product in hand. So that’s just something extra we do now just because we got burned. This was just, the vendor has been rock solid for many years, over five years and then all of a sudden this happened.

Maria: So how much do you have to pay for that initial?

Steve: It’s the same price. It’s basically essentially an inspection at the front end and then one in the back. It’s actually cheaper if you only want them to pull like a couple pieces or so.

Maria: Right.

Steve: Yeah, because they don’t have to go through like a huge bunch. Okay, so another question for you. At what point did she start private labeling and customize your packaging like for those initial 20?

Maria: I did it with the initial 20. The only thing I ever sold that wasn’t mine was the first order of 10 where I was just testing by themselves. So it was an as is. As soon as I did the order of 20, I put my company name and everything on it.

Steve: Okay, so as soon as those 20 started selling, what did you do to kind of increase your sales and what was your process like?

Maria: So, you mean front — well so the first 20 sold and then I placed a big order.

Steve: Okay. So what was your size of your big order?

Maria: It was 3,000.

Steve: 3,000 okay.

Maria: Yeah. So it was basically a container full. And then I learned the hard way that when you lose your sales momentum, it sets you back. So, it took me a while to gain that sales momentum back. And I did PPC, I had some friends buy them, I did different things to like get that momentum back.

Steve: Did you do anything special to kind of boost sales outside of just Amazon PPC, for example, did you do anything to get reviews?

Maria: The only thing I did to get reviews and I only did this a few times was I had friends review things for me. And actually, one of the things that I did that I think works really well especially now where Amazon is paying attention to buying reviews is I traded reviews with some people. So, I bought their product, I reviewed it, they bought my product, they reviewed it.

Steve: Interesting. Okay another question; you did FBA for even those initial batches, right?

Maria: Yes.

Steve: Okay. And Sandra is asking, what do you mean by lose your sales momentum? I was actually kind of curious about that too because with 20 units, you don’t really have that much sales momentum right?

Maria: So, I just — so when I sold 20 units, they sold quickly and then I had a dead zone where I didn’t have any more products to sell. I left one in there and I jacked the price way up so that it wouldn’t just go to zero. But then when I restocked, I thought they would just sell quickly again and they didn’t. It took a while for that to get going again.

Steve: Okay, just for future reference for the class, you probably shouldn’t jack up your price on those last units. You should probably just let it sell out and then…

Maria: I know that now. At the time, that’s what I thought, was the right thing to do. That was three years ago.

Steve: Three years ago. Yeah, no, I’m not criticizing you. I’m just saying.

Maria: Yeah I know, I’m just saying.

Steve: Okay. And so all right, so things started going well. And I want to kind of shift gears a little bit and talk about some of your struggles. Like, it wasn’t obviously all smooth sailing. And I just kind of want to highlight some of the things that you had to go through.

Maria: So, I ended up switching freight forwarders. I had a freight forwarder who gave me quote, who basically there was like a big miscommunication and it was just a total nightmare. And then I was like, okay, I have all this product here, but I’m not going to ship with this freight forwarder. So then I was out searching for another freight forwarder. That was one big challenge in the beginning.

Steve: Well, can you share who you are using now?

Maria: Yes. So who I use now is called Bestocean Worldwide Logistics, they’re in California. They have been great; they give me great prices for shipping. They also do warehousing, and they have a warehouse system that’s actually like computerized so that you can do everything online and you you can see exactly what’s going on as opposed to like some third party warehouses where you’re hoping they know what they’re doing. So yeah, Bestocean Worldwide Logistics, if anybody wants the name of my rep I can provide.

Steve: You mentioned that, do you take advantage of their warehousing?

Maria: I do.

Steve: So, do they do any prep work for you before they send it off to Amazon?

Maria: So, I am only sending case packed cartons to Amazon so they’re coming from the manufacturer case packed, so all the warehouse is doing for me is putting the FBA label on and sending them in. And the great thing is their warehouse is located right by the Ontario California Amazon fulfillment center. So, usually things get there in a day.

Steve: I see. Okay, so when you make that larger, you have it shipped over to their warehouse and they do the flooring to the Ontario warehouse.

Maria: And I do it that way because my product is seasonal, so in the offseason I don’t want a lot of things sitting in Amazon that I’m just going to pay storage on. I pay less money in storage at my third party warehouse than I would pay if I just stored everything there. So, I manage my inventory that way. I watch on Amazon, as it’s getting low, I have my warehouse send in more because I want to be paying Amazon less. Amazon charges more for storage than my warehouse charges, so I do it that way.

Steve: Yeah, so that’s just a quick tip for the students out there. Amazon over the years, they’ve just been jacking up their storage fees especially over the holidays, it’s like three x higher. And if you do your research, you’ll find that warehousing can be like up to six times cheaper than what Amazon charges to hold their products. So the way that Maria is doing it, having it stored in a warehouse and having it kind of shift piecemeal so that you don’t have too much stuff in Amazon’s warehouse at any given time will save you money.

Maria: Yes.

Steve: Does your manufacturer also create your packaging for you or do you have another person do the packaging for you?

Maria: They do it all. They outsource the packaging. So, in the manufacturing time, one of the things that can make your manufacturing time longer is they’re getting different pieces of the package from different places. So for example, there’s an insert, there’s a plastic bag, there’s a cloth bag, each of those is coming from a different place. So, they’re managing all of that, but it can just affect timing and you want to make sure your manufacturer knows how to do it. I have two manufacturers, they’ve both been great.

Steve: Okay, does your warehouse do any labeling for your product or are they just boxing stuff up and sending it in?

Maria: So, they are not boxing anything, the boxes are coming packed from China, all they’re doing is putting an FB a label on it, but they can do anything and everything. They can label individual products, they can do individual product fulfilling, they can do it all.

Steve: But for your purposes, each one of your products are individually labeled with your FNSKU, right?

Maria: Right. I have an insert that has that on it. So there’s no labeling involved. It’s all; the only label is the label that goes on the carton to send it to Amazon.

Steve: Okay Kathy, I will post all the information about Maria’s freight forwarder below this video so that everyone can have access to it. All right, so more on struggles, sorry. So we were talking about … Yeah, we got sidetracked there.

Maria: So I mean, the majority of my struggles have been dealing with Amazon, like Amazon has overcharged me fees. Amazon is taken down listings when they shouldn’t have; Amazon has done all kinds of things. And I have been — the number one thing I can tell you about selling on Amazon which Steve’s on blog posts said about a week ago is you have to watch them like a hawk. And that means you got to play around with all their silly reports and find the reports that give you the data you really need. I have like Seller Central; their customer service drives me insane. So, multiple times I have emailed Jeff Bezos himself, and I’ve been successful in speaking with his reps, and that’s how I’ve gotten things fixed.

So for example, they had overcharged me a fee for one of my products for like a year and I just fought and fought and fought and I got to Jeff Bezos his person and I said, this has been overcharged, I can prove it. She tried to argue with me but then she reimbursed it all.

Steve: Can you talk about what that fee was?

Maria: It was the FBA fees, so not the percentage that they take, but the fee that they charge for doing FBA.

Steve: Did your item get misclassified somehow? Is that why it happened?

Maria: They never said so. I had I think I started out saying this needs to be re-measured, and they came back with the measurement but it’s still based on what was on their website and then what this person was telling me, they didn’t add up. So, I just kept sending her a link to the website saying this is not what your website says. And so, I don’t know if she blew it or if something on the website was incorrect, but I could prove that they were overcharging me. So they reimbursed me for all of it.

Steve: How many interactions before you decided to email Jeff?

Maria: I only email Jeff if it’s something that I think is like a bigger level Amazon issue. So, I’ve emailed him about this fee change, because I think that to me was like, is there something wrong in your algorithm that’s overcharging this on a Prime Day? So on Prime Day in 2017, when my sales were going like gangbusters, they took the prime tag off of my listings.

Steve: That actually happened to a lot of people. I feel it was on purpose.

Maria: I went straight to the top; they came back, so it took a while. It usually takes like two weeks to hear back from one of Jeff’s reps and they told me that they can do whatever they want with the prime badges. And I said, okay, that’s fine but the problem was you guys sent out a media guide saying, here’s what you should do on social media to promote Prime Day. And I had followed that. And so I said, essentially what you did was you made me spend money to drive traffic to Amazon, but then I didn’t get to benefit from that as a seller. And they said that because I had made a business decision based on information that they sent me, they gave me some money.

Steve: Okay, so you’ve had pretty good luck emailing Jeff.

Maria: I have. I mean, I’ve had other times where I’ve gone straight through and I have had them say, we do understand where you’re coming from, but we’re not going to do anything. I’ve gotten compensation multiple times. And I think that I mean, I’m very careful in how I structure emails to him. I make them very factual and make sure that I’m giving data that can actually be acted upon and not giving any opinions, not putting any emotion to it and making it really scientific. So somebody can read it and be like, oh, wait a minute, this doesn’t make sense. And those get responses.

Steve: Would you be willing to share one of those emails?

Maria: Sure.

Steve: Okay, cool. Once again, I’ll post it below the video if Maria can find it. A question from the class, you mentioned you now sell multiple products. Did you just grow in your niche, or do you have a diverse selection of unrelated products now?

Maria: Yeah, I’m only in my niche.

Steve: Can we talk about some of the specific Amazon struggles that you’ve had and which ones have impacted you the most?

Maria: I mean, I feel like every struggle I’ve had with Amazon has impacted me. Like when I figured out that they were overcharging me this fee, I was so angry because I was just like why are they being so dishonest? And how can — when I went back and forth with Seller Central and they always come up with strange things like some of them. One of the reps I talked to reimbursed me like a couple of cents, but they weren’t really paying attention to what I was saying, they weren’t following the detail. And then when I finally got to Jeff Bezos, his rep, and then it got fixed, he was like, okay, that was worth my time. And then I go on.

So, I kind of feel like with each struggle with Amazon, I go through a phase where I’m really mad at Amazon, I think I’m crazy to be on Amazon, I think it’s time to shift over to my own store, etc., etc. And then I force myself to get over it and go on. And the truth is, I mean, this has happened to me multiple times. And I think it’s just the price of doing business on Amazon. I mean, I’m in touch with people who are much bigger sellers than me, and they have the same thing. I think it’s just part of the nature of the business on Amazon. Has that been your experience?

Steve: Absolutely, which is I think the class pretty much knows this either through the podcast and whatnot. But whenever an Amazon issue pops up, my wife just gets a really bad mood and it last for weeks, or however long it takes. So, that’s why we’ve made a conscious effort to focus more on our own shop. Actually, that’s my next question for you, Maria. You’ve gone through all this stuff. And it’s a struggle and it’s come out good for you. You’ve gotten resolutions, but how much time and mind share has that taken you to get to that point? And are you focusing more now on your own site or are you still all in on Amazon?

Maria: So, I’m my goal for 2019 is to get as much business off of Amazon as I have on Amazon. And that’s my absolute focus. So I am, like it’s the beginning of the year. So I’m doing kind of a re-optimization of my listing on Amazon doing a re-work of the keywords etc. As soon as that’s done, I’m going to let Amazon fly a little bit. I mean, you got to always watch them like a hawk. But I’m going to try and reduce the amount of time I’m spending dealing with that and really put my efforts into I’m focusing on business to business sales.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Ahrefs for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I’m a huge fan of their tool and in my opinion Ahrefs is the best all in one SEO tool out there to rank in Google search. And recently, I completed a search engine site audit for mywifequitherjob.com and Bumblebeelinens.com and Ahrefs was indispensable. For example, I used Ahrefs to do a deep dive into all my posts to find the highest volume, lowest competition keywords to target in search. And in fact, recently, I used Ahrefs to rank a blog post in Google from position 20 to position five for a big time keyword in the span of just one month by switching around my title and H1 tags.

I also use Ahrefs to spy my competitors’ sites to see what keywords they are ranking for, and then I write a more comprehensive post and eventually outrank them in search. Now those of you who know me know that I hate spending money on tools, but I actually pay for Ahrefs and that should say something in itself. Right now, I’m giving away nine three month Ahrefs memberships for free. To sign up, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway, once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway to win a three month Ahrefs membership. Now back to the show.

Yes, I was just going to suggest there’s probably a lot of organizations that will buy from you in bulk.

Maria: Yeah, yeah. And I’m not interested in doing individual sales off of Amazon because I don’t want to be doing customer service etc. But I want it business to business like individual sales Amazon can do that but the rest I want.

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about mindset here, especially if you can remember when you first started out, just taking those risks. Did you just go into this saying, hey, I’m going to invest a couple thousand dollars in this and whatever happens? How did you finally just be willing to take that first leap and place that first $4,000 order or 4,000 unit order I should say?

Maria: Yeah, so I’m really good at research. I had watched like so many things in your library. I had corresponded with you to ask you questions, I felt reasonably confident. Another thing that has been absolutely key in my journey, though, is that I started meeting with another student once a week, and we’ve met once a week for almost three years. And our relationship has been essential because we help each other, we figure out what’s working, what’s not, we make suggestions. And then, another student in the class, we don’t get together regularly, but she’s also been really key in helping me feel confident.

I am a very determined person. So, I just decided, I’m like I decided I’m like, based on all of the research that I’ve done, based on all of the webinars that I watched, this should work. So it’s going to work. And then I just worked really hard to make sure that it did. And that meant paying attention to a ton of details. It meant continuously learning because it shifts so often. So, I mean, I still put a lot of energy into hearing the latest changes and whatever, and then adapting accordingly.

But basically, from the beginning, I just decided, like, I’m doing this and I’m doing this all the way. I will say that if in 2017, if 2017 hadn’t been as successful as it was, I might have said, oh, maybe I should switch niches. But 2017 was very successful and so it was just confirmation in like you’re doing the right thing. And then in 2018, I grew by 77%.

Steve: I’m just trying to get an idea of where your mindset was. Let’s say the first batch of 20 didn’t sell out immediately, let’s say you sold maybe four units, would that have been enough to push you over the edge, or would one sale have done the trick for you?

Maria: No, it definitely mattered that I sold them all quickly and that I was able to raise the price significantly while they were selling. Like every day I raised the price by the dollar or more. Had that test market not gone so well, I may have revisited the niche. I probably would have contacted you and said, hey, what else should I try? I mean, really, that test market made a lot of sense to me. The other thing is that because this product is kind of personal to me, like I had done a lot of research about just the global environment and sort of how does this product fit into the global environment and I was really confident that there would be a market based on that research as well.

Steve: All right, I think the reason why I’m asking you that question is because these days, it’s a lot more rare for you to just throw something up and then sell out 20 units. You have to do a little bit more these days. And so I guess you’ve launched several products since then, right?

Maria: I have three products and three products have made me a six figure seller.

Steve: Right. So for those other ones, I guess at this point, you’re already confident and so you probably just put them up and then just started running ads and it was all peachy, right?

Maria: So for the second two, yeah. I put them up, I had a couple of friends by them so that I had two reviews and I started running PPC right away. And I also, my timing was really good. If you were to start with [inaudible 00:35:48] today, it would be much harder because there’s more competition. So, I had the advantage of having gotten in when I did. So that’s something to consider like if you want to get in on something I think before it becomes to popular in theory.

Steve: Sure. A couple questions from the class. Where are you located, and is this a full time business for you now?

Maria: I am in Alexandria, Virginia, and yes, it’s a full time business.

Steve: And were you working when you started this?

Maria: No.

Steve: All right, so we’ve talked about struggles. We’ve talked about how you got started; do you have any tips for some of the students in the class who are just kind of starting out?

Maria: So, I think one of my tips would be when you’re doing product research, I mean, I know there are sort of two lines. One is to fall in love with the product that has the best numbers and the other is to find a product that somehow speaks to you. So for me, it worked where a product that had good numbers happened to also be a product that spoke to me personally, so spoke to my own life experience. And I really think that that connection was very helpful. So, I think if you can find a product where you get good numbers, but it’s also something that inspires you or is connected to you some other way, that’s a good thing to pursue.

Steve: So, given that you just said that, if things weren’t going so hot in that first 20 units, would you have probably just kept with it for a while longer because this niche kind of spoke to you?

Maria: I might have I mean, I might have tried a different design, so I might have said, okay, maybe this first design I came up with wasn’t the best one to try. I mean, because looking at the bigger picture, saying what’s happening in the world? So, the temperature is only going up, bugs are only getting worse. That was a pretty good impetus for me to say this seems like a logical thing to get into. If I wasn’t looking at that bigger picture, then if something didn’t sell right away, I might say probably not a good choice. But I’ve always been looking at this from a big picture but then also from details, looking on both sides.

Steve: Are there any mistakes that you made early on that you’d care to share and that other students would hopefully avoid going forward?

Maria: I actually think that the first order that I did of 3000, I think I was overly ambitious. I think I probably should have made that first order a little smaller, because as it ended up, that model sells less than the two models that I did later. I mean, it’s still a good model, but it’s just kind of interesting how that went. I don’t have any regrets because I learned from doing it, but I think if you can get a manufacturer — so like if I had first ordered 1,000 of that model, I might have made modifications to it. I might have decided I didn’t want to continue with that model and that other models would make me more money. So yeah, and the thing is hindsight is 2020. At the time it totally made sense to me to go ahead and order a container of them and go forward, but now when I look back I say, that was pretty ambitious and it would have been okay to start with 1,000 and then reorder.

Steve: It’s funny that you say that because whenever students asked me how much they should get for their first order, if it’s anywhere close to the holidays, I usually advise them to get more than they think that they’re going to need which is kind of what you…

Maria: But I mean close to the holidays I would agree with you. I mean if I was in the season, so had my timing been different, had I’ve been ordering those 3,000 that’s in March and they had arrived in May, I probably would have sold them like gangbusters. Instead, I did my test market during peak season but then the order production time took Time and so I didn’t actually get those until the fall when they were starting to get [inaudible 00:40:07], so some of it was timing. So that’s another thing to think about is timing especially if you have a seasonal product. I absolutely agree with you, if you have a product that’s going to sell hot over the holidays, then yes, buy more than you think you should. I agree with you 100%.

Steve: This is a lot of people are usually squeamish about that first order. So they’re like, hey Steve, should I just get 200 units. I’m like 200 units is not going to last you.

Maria: Yeah, I mean, I think there’s a couple things. One is, even if you do a test market and your test market is successful, you may decide that there’s something you want to change if it’s your own design. And so if you start out with fewer, you can change that design quicker. But if you’re not in that scenario, then it’s totally, then I think I would look at it very differently. So, only from a design perspective would I say start a little smaller, double check your design, make sure there isn’t anything you’re going to want to change further and then go into a bigger order. And by small, I mean like 1,000.

Steve: Okay, are there any things that you’re doing now for your later product launches that you weren’t doing in your first launch because you figured a few things out? Are you doing anything differently today to launch a product?

Maria: I’m not.

Steve: Okay. So it’s the tried and true formula of creating a really good listing, Amazon PPC, anything else that you’d care to share?

Maria: I think the key is have — so I know that now apparently Amazon is connecting friends with friends. So have friends of friends buy things and put up a few reviews for you. I pay people, so I will say if you’ll buy this for me, I’ll send you a check for the product if you put up a review, like I will do that because that gets you your first reviews. It gets you on the board and then start PPC. I would do that with two.

Steve: Right. Okay.

Maria: I’m not talking about doing this with 10 or 100 or whatever.

Steve: Of course.

Maria: Start small because it’s just kind of getting the ball rolling. I’m a big believer in, you got to get the boulder in motion. And once the boulder is in motion, physics takes over. So, get the boulder in motion and then, do all you can to support it.

Steve: Okay. Does anyone in the class — I mean, we’re almost close to 50 minutes here and I don’t want to keep you too long here. Does anyone in the class have any other questions for Maria? I’ll continue talking but if you have any questions, just post them on the live chat because Maria is gracious enough to be here and talk very openly about what she sells and her struggles and that sort of thing. And so, I think this is a really good opportunity for anyone who’s curious. So, anyone who’s just kind of starting out and a little bit hesitant about the entire process.

Maria: Another thing I did want to mention is that I think that I mean I have to do this all the time, it’s some backing yourself up. It’s like making yourself feel good about what you’re doing. And one of the things that I use is mantras. I don’t know if anyone has ever done that. But you can get up in the morning and you can tell it, kind of give yourself what’s your focus for the day. So you might say, I am powerful and then you write that down a whole bunch of times. And as you’re writing it, and you’re reading it, it just helps you get a mindset. And then I find that that carries into my day.

Steve: Okay, a couple of other questions that have just come in. You mentioned trading reviews, where did you find people who are willing to do that?

Maria: So, this was in the old days when we had the forum and I asked on the forum.

Steve: Actually, we still have that that forum. I know I said I was taking it away, but I just kind of left it around because a few students asked me to just keep it around. So I haven’t removed it just yet.

Maria: Well, and I should say to give credit there was another student who came up with the idea and then we have pursued it.

Steve: Okay all right. So you got a whole bunch of thank yous, I don’t know if you’re on the classroom page right now Maria but everyone has found this extremely valuable and very informative. I was going to ask you, how do you plan — so first of all, how many hours do you work on this business a week?

Maria: So, one of one of the reasons why I did this is I wanted to have a lifestyle business where I don’t have specific work hours and relax hours. I mean, I would say probably 40 to 60.

Steve: Really okay.

Steve: If you were to break down the time that you spend, do where the breakdown is? Is it on product research, Amazon issues, how does it break out?

Maria: I spend a lot of time on research, and it’s not just product, it’s researching — so for me what’s going on [inaudible 00:44:52] what’s going on with the disease, where there are outbreaks, because I have a Facebook page that I post on every single day. So, I’m trying to keep people informed. I see my business as educational in addition to providing a product.

Steve: Do you have a blog as well or is it just a Facebook page?

Maria: I do, I have a blog on my website. So I have a website that just links all my products to Amazon because I’m not yet selling from my website because I want that to only be business to business. But I do have a blog on my website. I am not blogging all the time. And Stephen, I had talked about this a while ago. I don’t know if you remember, but it’s like in some ways with [inaudible 00:45:37], there’s a limited number of things you’re going to discuss. So, I’ve kind of done those posts and then I revisit them. I do try and come up with new ideas. But Facebook is one of my primary things that I’m using to just kind of communicate with a broader field of people and to demonstrate like this is not only about a product, this is about keeping you informed.

Steve: Do you have anyone on your staff to help you?

Maria: My dog.

Steve: Your dog. Okay that’s great. So there you have it Maria. Maria is doing this solo essentially right now.

Maria: But I really, I consider my team to be Steve, a couple students that I am in regular touch with, my faithful order, my manufacturers of, my warehouse people. I consider that to be my whole team, and so even though technically like I’m the one doing it, there’s a lot of people that are involved.

Steve: Of course, of course, so no full time employees I guess?

Maria: No, I’m in.

Steve: Okay. Well Maria, this has been great. I really appreciate it, and the class does too. You might want to hop on the live chat, maybe later open it up and just everyone is like yeah, thank you so much. Dan was just saying, thank you everyone for making this a safe space where we can openly discuss our products and not feel too vulnerable.

Maria: I did begin by telling you [inaudible 00:46:59] don’t be bad, so don’t do that.

Steve: I will ban anyone’s account if you sell [inaudible 00:47:05].

Maria: Yeah, the other — I mean, my main message though, to fellow classmates is, it’s possible. I mean, I went from zero to six figures in…

Steve: A year and a half.

Maria: Yeah, a year and a half. So it’s very, very doable and you have to really just keep motivating yourself and keep saying I can do it, I believe in myself, and you got to be right about that. Like you can’t have a pipe dream and pursue a pipe dream. You got to make sure your dream is grounded in reality.

Steve: Well, Maria, I’m going to stop the broadcast. Hang out a little bit, I want to talk to you a little bit, but thanks a lot.

Maria: You’re welcome. Good luck.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode. Now, you probably noticed that I had to bleep out Maria’s product from the podcast and unfortunately, all the extra resources mentioned in the podcast are for students only. But I hope you got a lot out of this episode. It’s not always smooth sailing, but as long as you are persistent and detail oriented, you will eventually succeed. For more information about this episode, go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode245.

And once again, I want to thank Klaviyo for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for developing real quality customer relationships. Right now they just released a cool docuseries called Beyond Black Friday where you can learn successful e-commerce marketing strategies from real companies using their platform. This docuseries is free and you could check it out at Klaviyo.com/beyondbf, once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf.

I also want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop-ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. If you want to give it a try, it is free. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

Now I talk about how I use these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own e-commerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.Mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

244: Tim Schmoyer On How To Create A Successful YouTube Channel

244:  Tim Schmoyer On How To Create A Successful You Tube Channel

Today, I’m really happy to have Tim Schmoyer on the show. Tim is someone who came highly recommended to me by Colin Jones who will be a future guest on this podcast.

He is a veteran when it comes to audience growth on YouTube. And he specializes in helping YouTube creators spread their message to reach people online.

His channel has over 400K subscribers and this interview comes at an opportune time because I’m actively trying to grow my new show, The 5 Minute Pitch.

What You’ll Learn

  • Tim’s motivation for starting VideoCreators.com.
  • The types of videos that work well on Youtube?
  • How to build traffic to your videos and establish an audience
  • How to get a video to rank in search
  • What you can do in your video to grab a watcher’s attention

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

GoBrandWin.com – The fastest and most effective way to grow your email list for free using group giveaways. Click here to signup for free.

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into the strategies they use to grow their businesses. Now today I have Tim Schomoyer on the podcast. And Tim is my go to expert when it comes to building successful YouTube channels. And it just so happens that interviewing Tim comes at a very fortuitous time because I just released my brand new show where 32 entrepreneurs pitch their products for the chance to win $50,000 in cold hard cash.

Now my new show is called the 5 Minute Pitch. And you can think of it as a more relatable down to earth version of Shark Tank where the judges actually provide actionable feedback to the contestants. Now my fellow judges are Greg Mercer, Scott Voelker and Mike Jackness, and you can check out the show at 5MinutePitch.com/launch, once again that’s 5MinutePitch.com/launch.

Now before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Klaviyo is the tool that I use to build real quality customer relationships with my e-commerce store. And because all my transactions and email correspondence is tracked in Klaviyo, I can easily build meaningful customer relationships by listening, understanding, and taking cues from my customers and deliver personalized marketing messages. For example, with the click of a button, I can easily send a specific and targeted email to all customers with a lifetime value of over $100 who purchased a red handkerchief in the past year.

And it is for this reason why over 10,000 brands have switched over to Klaviyo. Right now they have this cool docuseries called Beyond Black Friday where they discuss successful marketing strategies that their customers are using that you can emulate with your business. So, head on over to Klaviyo.com/beyondbf, once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf

I also want to give a shout out to Privy who is also a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. Now what does Privy do? Well, Privy is an email list growth platform and they manage all of my email capture forms. And I use Privy hand-in-hand with my email marketing provider. They’re a bunch of companies out there that will manage your email capture forms, but I like Privy because they specialize in e-commerce. Right now I’m using Privy to display a cool wheel of fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prices in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this. And when I implemented this form, email signups increased by 131%.

I’m also using their new cart saver pop up feature to recover abandoned carts as well. So bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers, which I then feed to my email provider to close the sale. So head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve. Now onto the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m happy to have Tim Schomoyer on the show. Now, Tim is actually someone who I have not met in real life but he’s someone who came highly recommended to me from a friend of mine by the name of Colin Jones who will be a future guest on this podcast. Now who is Tim? Well, he is a veteran when it comes to audience growth on YouTube. And he specializes in helping YouTube creators spread their message to reach people online.

His channel has over 400k, subscribers and meeting Tim actually comes at a very opportune time for me, because I’m thinking about starting my own YouTube channel for real this time. I’m actually sitting on about 11k sales right now by accident and not doing anything with these people at all. And hopefully Tim can help both me and the audience out. And with that, welcome to show Tim, how are you doing today?

Tim: Hey, thanks for having me. I’m doing great.

Steve: So Tim, give us a quick background story in your motivation for starting VideoCreators.com.

Tim: Yeah, so I actually started back – I started on YouTube without any sort of motivation to do something like Video Creators, which is my business today where we work with creators and help them grow their audiences on YouTube. It actually started back in 2006. I was in graduate school halfway across the country from my family. And I was dating this girl and was trying to figure out a way of introducing her to my family back home. And I was doing a blog at that time, which I was using the way most people use Facebook today. Back then Facebook wasn’t a thing yet.

And so, I was just posting on there what I ate for dinner the night before. And then this YouTube thing came along. I’m like, oh, instead of emailing them video files, I could just post them here and they can just click play, it’ll be a lot easier. So, I started making videos with her going out to eat, going out the restaurants, going out to the park, on movies. Today we would know them as vlogs but back then that wasn’t a word. It was just being awkward in public with a camera. So, I would go out make these videos, I post them on YouTube, better than my blog and my family could watch them.

Well then, this weird thing started happening where other people started watching them too. And I was a little bit nervous because this was during Myspace days now where if someone knew who you were on the internet for some reason, they will come down and kill you. Right? I was like, who is Catholic, you’re 69? And should I be concerned that they’re watching my videos and commenting? So, I was trying to figure out like, who are these people? Why are they watching my videos? Where are they coming from?

And I started asking around other people who are posting on YouTube and everyone was like, we don’t know, Tim, but we’re trying to figure it out and if you if you figure it out, let us know. I’m like, okay, like a good challenge. And so from the very beginning days of YouTube, I was the guy trying to figure out how does this platform work? How do people discover content here? What keeps them coming back? What gets people engaged, what builds community all around on my video?

And in 2013, I started doing this audience development YouTube professionally full time for a lot of different companies and people, but in 2013 I launched VideoCreators.com which is business I run today. It is a small team of nine people who work for me, and together we’re just all working with clients and helping train people, doing their YouTube strategy for them and so far we have helped our clients gain 14 billion views and 61 million subscribers.

Steve: Wow, that’s a huge number.

Tim: We have a lot of fun with it. And for me it’s all about reaching people and changing their lives which is ultimately I think is about my girlfriend at the time now wife, we got married, and now we have seven kids in eight years somehow.

Steve: Oh my goodness.

Tim: We didn’t know that was possible, but we’re just seeing tons of people watching our family videos just like having their lives change, people who didn’t like to commit suicide because videos we’ve made. And people saying, I was about to to get divorced, but I watched your video or you and your wife are learning how to love each other better and I shared that with my husband, we talked about it and now we have hope again for our marriage, just want to say thank you. And just tons of stories I could tell you, but I know you want to talk about more than that. But that’s what gets me most excited. And I just love it when other people can spread that message that reaches people and changes lives.

Steve: That’s really awesome Tim, and when it comes to YouTube and today’s podcast, I actually want you to start from the beginning, but I don’t really want to talk about the mechanics of shooting a video or the equipment that you need, because all that somebody can find online. Let’s just assume that everyone knows how to shoot audio and video and let’s start actually by talking about what types of videos work well, and if there’s a different mindset involved in getting traffic on YouTube. So for example, does it involve keyword research, is it very deliberate and how you put out these videos and tag them.

Tim: Yeah, so that’s a really big topic to discuss. And the short answer is that there’s many ways to get discovered on YouTube. A lot of people come to YouTube, especially bloggers come to YouTube thinking primarily the way they think with Google, which is primarily search. And so, they are thinking in terms of keywords and outranking each other and it’s very competitive. But on YouTube, I mean, it’s the second largest search engine in the country, second only to Google.com itself — or not in the country, in the world. But YouTube is much more than just search. I mean, there’s that search feature, but a lot of people also can discover you through suggested videos, through the homepage and through playlist and through recommendations.

And so, what’s different about YouTube versus what people are familiar with on Google is if Google does their job well, you’re on their site for maybe a few seconds, and then you’re gone. But YouTube has the opposite goal, their goal is to get you on their platform and stay there as long as possible. And so, discovery is there’s a lot more discovery happening than just search. So, that totally answers your question but just think bigger than that.

Steve: So obviously search is a component of discovery, right? So, let’s talk about that first and then focus on how to get people to stick on your channel and continue to watch you.

Tim: Yeah, I don’t usually target search any more personally, it’s been about a few years. And the reason for that is one is really competitive, and two the principle is like where is your most valuable customer, and go after them. And in terms of YouTube, your most valuable customer/viewer is typically not a search driven customer/viewer, because those people are just looking for information real quick and then once they get the information, they’re gone. They’re scrubbing ahead, they’re like, okay, it’s taking too long, but just looking for information. And according to almost everyone’s analytics I’ve ever seen, the search traffic is worth the least from an average view duration perspective, which is which viewer gives me the most amount of watch time which is just the amount of time someone spends watching your video.

And so, if the goal, YouTube’s goal is to get people to come back to YouTube as often as possible, engage with as much content as possible, then you want people who are going to be watching longer. And often those people come from end screens, playlists, suggested videos and things like that. So in order to hit search, what I’ve been doing for the past few years, it’s actually targeting suggested videos where I get more watch time.

And then what happens is, as I successfully do that, Google starts figuring out who my videos are for, who’s responding well to them. And then they just, literally, they just put my videos in front of the right people, whether they’re searching or they’re on their homepage, whether they’re watching a competitor of mine or whatever, YouTube just learns who this is for and puts it in front of them. So like I said, search is how most people think with Google but on YouTube it works a little differently.

Steve: Okay, so does that imply then that the titles don’t really matter from a keyword perspective, and then you just want to create titles that encourage someone to actually watch the video?

Tim: Yeah, you’re on the right track. Yes and no. So yes, they still matter, but in my opinion, they matter primarily for people like when we’re thinking about optimizing here we have to remember we’re optimizing for people, not for robots. So, everything that ranks in positions of videos and search and discovery mechanisms across YouTube, all of them are based on viewer signals, which is like I mentioned, how long this someone has been watching your video, do they click on it, watch for 10 seconds, and then leave versus this other video, the exact same title, keywords and everything. Do they click on that video watch for three and a half minutes? Well, Google is going to say that the one with three and a half minutes of watch time per person must be more valuable than the one with 10 seconds.

And so, the one that’s only hooking people for 10 seconds is going to drop pretty quickly in results and suggested. And so, the title matters, but not because you’ve repeated the keyword 16 times and really convinced Google that this must be about that keyword. But it’s more because the keyword is what the person who’s looking for that information expected to see. And so they clicked on it, this must be about what I’m looking for. And then the content has to deliver because at the end of the day titles and tags and descriptions, nothing matters if the content itself isn’t actually crafted to hold someone’s attention.

Steve: Okay, and so does the keyword tag when you’re creating a video, does that really matter?

Tim: No, I mean, so we add tags tags, tags which is a form of metadata, you’re telling Google here’s the tag that this video is about. Google primarily uses those now just to check misspellings in your your title and description. So, if you like accidentally misspelled someone or something over there, they’ll be like, oh, here’s the where they actually meant but that’s about it.

Steve: And so in terms of getting on the suggested videos, what are some ways to do that?

Tim: Uh love it yeah, so there’s again this is a big conversation but there’s a couple of basic things that need to happen. Number one is your content needs to regularly attract a similar or the same audience. So, you can’t have like a video about here’s how I don’t know — tie a tie, then here is how I make playdoh, and then here’s what to do if your child’s diaper is dirty. I’m a dad so…

Steve: Yeah I know

Tim: Thinking about this morning trying to get kids ready, but yeah so it’s like those are all the three different potential audiences interested in those videos. And so, Google is like, well, this video is for that audience, this video is for that audience but if you want your newer videos to keep being recommended to people, it’s got to be like yeah, you need to have a specific audience. Google starts to feel pretty confident like oh, we get it, this channel is about people who are trying to climb out of debt and need financial help, right? Or this channel is about people who are trying to grow their audience on YouTube, and they start feeling confident, like who your videos are for.

And then once your videos are regularly targeting those people, then those people need to be consistently number two, be getting the value from your content that they want. So you need to train them that every time I listen to My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, I’m getting exactly what I need. And the same thing is true on YouTube. Like what’s that value proposition or that thread that ties all of your content together so that Google starts feeling confident this is who this video is for and this is what this is about.

And then what happens is when a new person who’s coming to YouTube who has not yet connected with your content search like looking for something or or Google just starts noticing that they tend to start clicking on these types of videos, then they like, oh, they’re probably also interested in My Wife Quit Her Job here. Let’s just put that in front of you on the homepage or as I suggested video and get you into their content as well.

Steve: So that implies that only focus like a focus channel does better than a channel that just talks about random things.

Tim: Better depends on what your goals are obviously, but if your goal is to grow a subscriber ship and grow a community of people who keep coming back to you looking for this, then yes that’s true. You can do have like a random channel but you’re going to have individual videos that grow and you’re just kind of going after maybe adsense revenue at that point.

Steve: Interesting. So I was just thinking about all the blogs out there. Are those guys making a lot of money or?

Tim: Potentially. I mean not all of them are. I mean the thing that you probably know more than probably YouTube creators is that the the size of your audience is not tied almost — well I shouldn’t say in any way, there are some ways it is tied, but but there are channels with like around half million subscribers. That’s like half of the entire YouTube English speaking creative community is around a million, so I’ve got like half my market already subscribed to my channel. I make more — our business makes more I should say than other people. I got a client of mine who now has 10 million subscribers but at the time they had 6 million they came to me saying, Tim, I’m going to quit if you can’t help me figure this out. And I was making more than that person was. So, the size of your audience doesn’t make it — isn’t correlated to how much revenue you earn, necessarily.

Steve: Okay. And then, when someone types in something in YouTube, what kind of determines the rankings and how can you get your stuff to rank higher?

Tim: In search or suggested or both?

Steve: Well, let’s start with search and then move on to suggested.

Tim: So, getting yourself to rank in search really comes down to some of these same principles, which is the title and the thumbnail, do they work together to tease a value that someone in my target audience wants? Not necessarily needs, people don’t really click on what they need; they click on what they want. All right, so my audience wants more views, more subscribers and more money, so if I make a topic around one of those, it tends to perform better. And so, I want to create a video around a topic that I know my target audience is really interested in.

Then the next thing I would recommend is go and do that search a few times on YouTube and incognito window so that your previous viewing history and search history and things aren’t taken into consideration and just see what pops up there and look for what’s in common among all those videos that are ranking top four. Is it new like it was just published a few days ago? In that case then, YouTube just experimenting with it and it probably it may or may not be there in a few days from now.

Maybe you notice that all the thumbnails have like a bright smiling face on them or they all have a question mark on them. Or you go, oh this isn’t doing this title is actually crafted differently than the way I was going for it, and then you realize that definitely has a stronger human element to it. And I can see why it’s not “perfectly” optimized, but the human element there is a lot stronger so it gets more people to click. And so, maybe you notice that.

And then next thing I would look for is how do these videos start because a lot of people, they craft YouTube videos; they kind of model it after what they’re used to, which is television. But on television, when you turn the TV on, the video is already playing; you don’t have to click on a title and thumbnail. But on YouTube, the customer journey so to speak, the viewer journey actually starts with the title and thumbnail. So, you look at the title and thumbnail, and then you pay attention to the first 15 seconds of how those videos open because the title and thumbnail sets an expectation for the viewer of, here’s the value that you want to consume. And then the first 15 seconds either quickly affirm for that viewer that yes, what you clicked expecting to get is coming in this video, otherwise they leave.

And so, maybe you start evaluating how these top videos for the search query are doing that or not doing that. And often there’s a lot of opportunity there because sometimes they’re doing it terribly. So, that’s like the main thing you’re going to maybe for that particular in our example that we’re talking about right now, that’s the main thing that you go like, okay, all these videos are ranking number one for this but none of them are connecting the first 15 seconds of the title and thumbnail. So when I do my video, I need to make sure that I do that.

Steve: So it sounds, like just to kind of summarize is the click through rate matters and then the stickiness of the person matters in the rankings.

Tim: That’s right. That matters more than the actual text in the title and thumbnail yeah, except for the title and thumbnails which gets them into the video in the first place. So that’s important for that reason.

Steve: So when it comes to the thumbnail, I’ve actually heard that there’s a lot that goes into this. So, I was wondering if you could just kind of talk about some thumbnail tips.

Tim: Yeah, really important because a lot of people don’t realize that it doesn’t matter how amazing your video content is if someone is not enticed to click on it in the first place. So, the title and thumbnail is like the billboard, that’s like the marketing piece that really gets people into your video. So, for the thumbnail, a couple principles to consider, one is that most of YouTube’s viewership now is mobile and that we really need to craft these that are really small, tiny size like 72 by 100 pixels or something like that, right? So when it’s really small, can all the information that the viewer needs to see and consider, does it stand out?

So, if you’re using text and your thumbnails, is it still readable? Or if there’s like you’re trying to show like a human emotion or there is something that the viewer really, really needs to see, is it still viewable when it’s super small? So, your thumbnail should be at 10 ATP or 4k, like you should match the resolution of your video but we need to make sure that you can consider that we can see it in a small size, but also then some of the other principles all follow that which is it needs to be clear. It needs to have math like high contrast between the foreground and the background, the thing you want the eye to be attracted to needs to pop off the screen.

Smiling faces typically do better than non close ups of faces. Some sort of human emotion does a good job, whether it’s a surprise or shock or what or just a question or thinking like human emotion does well. Yeah, so all those need to be taken into consideration.

Steve: So, it seems like a human — the thumbnails at least that I see most commonly now always have a face. So, does that kind of imply that you should put your face on the thumbnail?

Tim: If that’s what the person sees when they click play, then yes, because remember the title and the thumbnail set an expectation. But there’s a lot of channels out there for example, like just tutorial channels where all you see is the hands, no face on there. And so, in that case your face isn’t as important because people aren’t clicking to connect with the person, they just want to know how do I build this table or whatever? Others like a kid channel, they just care about ABC series so they don’t they have to have faces either.

Steve: I’m just looking at some of these thumbnails right now actually on my computer and it seems like a lot of these people are outlined in white. They’re these big funky letters for the fonts, neon colors, are these all things that you do with your channel?

Tim: What types of channels are they?

Steve: They are tutorials actually.

Tim: Yeah, so the other thing to consider is the age of the video because thumbnails, like the style thumbnails tend to change like the style and fashion tends to change over time, so what works on YouTube two years ago doesn’t necessarily still work amazingly today. It’s not that they’re bad but but the style a few years ago was definitely to stroke everything in white and put it for us and color in the background. And now it’s kind of moved more towards like Instagram type of feel where it’s just like an amazing picture with that being color graded but not necessarily doctored in terms of texts and things. You’re like, oh, there’s a story there, I really need to see how they did that, or yes, that’s the cake I want to learn how to make or something. So, they tend to be a little bit more straightforward today.

Steve: And in terms of video content then, if you have any sort of pointers on how to create videos that encourage someone to watch all the way to the end, it sounds like it’s a ranking factor, so what are some things that you do to do that?

Tim: So, the other quick outline that I would recommend everyone starts with and not that this makes sense for everyone all the time, but it’s like learning how to write. You need to learn the rules of grammar and how to write so that you can break them and do that intentionally rather than just haphazardly later, right.

Steve: Sure.

Tim: So, the outline I would recommend at least considering when you first get started is starting with your title and thumbnail not your actual video. And so, that means sitting down and you know like the beginning of this customer journey/ viewer journey is they got to see the title and thumbnail. So, draft 20, 30, 50 whatever different titles for this piece of content and keep keep tweaking it. And then what’s the image I am going to use to represent this content that’s going to entice someone to want to click and watch, and start there. That way you can open the video already knowing what the person saw in order to click, and you can open the content pitching the content based on what they click because you already know the title.

Otherwise, what too many people do is they make the content first, they upload it and now that it’s uploaded, they’re trying to figure out the title and then like sometimes it matches but then often like the value actually comes at eight minutes into it. But you can’t title it that way because no one is going to click. At the end of the video, the title might make sense, but you need to make sense in the first 15 seconds. So you need to start there. And that’s the only way you can match the first 15 seconds to connect with the title and thumbnail. And then you need to open — the first thing you need to do then open that video with a hook which is like I said earlier just reaffirms for the viewer that what they click expecting to get is coming in that video.

So, it’s like an educational type video series tutorial for example, it opens like you guys really want to learn how to make this cake. It’s amazing. I love it, it is like the most beautiful fancy cake I’ve ever made. And everyone who comes to your party is going to think that you are some professional chef, but it’s actually really simple. Let me show you how to do it in this video. Right. So just something like that for that, or if it’s a narrative based content, it could be just opening up with a conflict or a motivating story, right? Yeah. Or some people do like coming up on, you can do that but that’s basically the same thing as you just teased the climax of the blog.

If you do a blog, well, you tease the climax of the story and then you go back until the backstory. So you open with a hook. Then number two, I recommend you have some sort of branded intro. And that could be anywhere from three to five seconds but absolutely no longer than five seconds. Anything longer than five, you’ll start seeing audience abandonment on your videos. So three is ideal. And what that needs to…

Steve: Why is number two important in your opinion and how did you test that?

Tim: Yeah, so what happens is a lot of people when they do this is they’re just putting up their logo and making their logo do some like fancy flip or something. That doesn’t add any additional value, it reinforces your brand, but what we’re doing with it is it actually needs to pitch the value proposition of your brand or your channel, in this case to someone in your target audience. And that sets the context now through which people should evaluate and consider subscribing. Like oh, this is a whole channel about growing my audience on YouTube and learning to reach people and change their lives, like heck yes, I’m here, I subscribe.

Versus like My Wife Quit Her Job and maybe the quit sign does a nice little flip in the middle and people are like, I don’t really know if it’s for me, is this not for me, right? And so, that three seconds in my case, it says, Master YouTube, that’s the what, spread your message, that’s the why, Video Creators TV. So, it’s not like a full thing but I’m telling people this is what I do and this is why we do it and then branding.

Steve: Okay, that makes sense.

Tim: And that gets people like a quick intro to who you are what you’re all about, which is one of those questions they’re asking about before they subscribe. Is this for me? And is this content that’s valuable for me or not?

Steve: Okay, great. Yeah, this is just like the principles of e-commerce. As soon as someone lands on your site, they need to know what you sell and why they should buy from you. Same…

Tim: Exactly, yes. Yep. Yep. Yeah, a lot of these principles are straight from business marketing world. It turns out people are people whether they’re on Google, YouTube, a blog, Facebook, whatever, like we’re all people, so the principle is transferred. And then the video should — if you’re doing like a talking head number three is it should like just welcome people very briefly, hey guys, my name is Tim Schomoyer, welcome to Video Creators, we are all about helping you grow your audience so you can spread a message that reach people and changes their lives. And then you get into content.

But in order to do that, you get into content. So the number three, the welcome should be very quick. And I actually do most of my welcome with a lower third that pops out so I don’t have to take as much time verbally to talk about it. And so people can kind of just visually see that while I’m talking. And then again, to the content itself and…

Steve: What’s a good length for the video now that we’re talking about content?

Tim: The way to evaluate length is based on how well you can hold someone’s attention. So, sometimes people say three minutes, but that’s only true if you’re only good at holding someone’s attention for three minutes. Some people are great at holding someone’s attention for 10 minutes, half hour, or some people can’t do it for three. so it really depends. My principle is if you have a two minute idea, take two minutes to share that story of that message. Don’t try to artificially inflate it into 10 and don’t try to take a 10 minute idea and squish it into two because someone told you a two minute idea was better. Serve the viewer the best you can and if that takes two minutes or 10 minutes, serving the viewer is the most important thing.

Steve: Okay.

Tim: So, deliver the content and then you wrap it up with some call to actions. I have a couple of different call to actions to make depending on what the goal of the video is. Another mistake a lot of people make is they try to do too many goals with each video. Each video they want to get tons of views, they want to rank number one in search, they want to generate a ton of leads and sales for their thing, they want to go big on Reddit, they want Huffington Post to pick it up, they want it to engage a new community. I’m, well, well, well, slow down.

A video will perform much better if you have one primary goal for it not 15. Just like your website, the front page of your website is designed with a specific goal in mind which is different than the about page which is different than the contact page which is different than this sales page, right? And so, what’s the primary goal of this video? And that determines what your call to action is. I think you should have — there’s probably — well there’s four different goals you could have for content.

One is discoverable, and if this is meant to be discoverable video, then the primary call to action should be to get them to watch another video which is you on the screen saying, guys, now this cake was amazing but if you have a birthday, you probably want to consider this cake right here and you’re like pointing to it on your screen. Say like, click this video right here and we’ll really dive into like how to turn this same recipe into an amazing birthday cake or something, and I’ll see you guys in the next video.

So, there’s nothing like hey, hope you enjoyed the video or see you next time or bye, just like another sales technique, which you’re probably familiar with, which is you just talk about the product as if they’ve already made the transaction. You start talking about the vacuum cleaner like, oh, wouldn’t be nice like this would suck up everything in your home and can you just imagine coming home and rather than having to pick up everything, you can just vacuum? And people are like, oh yeah. So, you’re doing that same thing with video, don’t sign off, just talk with the assumption as like they’re going to keep watching and they’re going to keep hanging out with you. And they are far more likely to actually then give that next video more watch time and increase the session time that your videos are having from getting people from video to video and all that is just really good signals that give your your videos a lift.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Ahrefs for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I’m a huge fan of their tool and in my opinion Ahrefs is the best all in one SEO tool out there to rank in Google search. And recently, I completed a search engine site audit for mywifequitherjob.com and Bumblebeelinens.com and Ahrefs was indispensable. For example, I used Ahrefs to do a deep dive into all my posts to find the highest volume, lowest competition keywords to target in search. And in fact, recently, I used Ahrefs to rank a blog post in Google from position 20 to position five for a big time keyword in the span of just one month by switching around my title and H1 tags.

I also use Ahrefs to spy my competitors’ sites to see what keywords they are ranking for, and then I write a more comprehensive post and eventually outrank them in search. Now those of you who know me know that I hate spending money on tools, but I actually pay for Ahrefs and that should say something in itself. Right now, I’m giving away nine three month Ahrefs memberships for free. To sign up, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway, once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway to win a three month Ahrefs membership. Now back to the show.

Let me ask you this, how do you prioritize all that? So you can guide them to another video, you can ask them to subscribe, you can actually take them off your website and try to get an email, how do you decide what you want to do?

Tim: Yeah, let’s come back to that because that’s the fourth video. So, the first one is discoverability and the call to action, get them to watch another video not necessarily to subscribe actually because if you get them to watch multiple videos, YouTube will follow them around with more videos from you on their on their homepage, on suggested videos, and things and that’s more valuable than just getting a subscriber who never watches you again. Two, the next goal would be community, and for me the main call to action there is engagement, so comment like guys, how would you make this cake? This is how I made it, but man, I’m open to other ideas.

And this is typically content that’s a little less produced and just the goal there is to grow then know, like, and trust factors after you’ve already brought people in with your discoverable content. The third video is…

Steve: Are you getting them to content to write comments on your video, is the thumbs up a factor also?

Tim: No, thumbs up and comments don’t actually mean anything. People often get correlation and causation confused on YouTube. I see a lot of YouTube experts making this mistake all the time. On the surface it looks like if you get more likes, your videos perform better. But it’s only because the people who are engaged enough to give you likes are people who watch your videos longer. So it’s just correlation not causation. So what you really need is people just to watch your videos and to give you a like, it’s fine but it doesn’t actually change how your videos perform because Google said this is too easy for people to gain that. So they don’t count it.

Steve: Okay, yeah, go on, I keep interrupting you.

Tim: Yeah, no, this is good, this is great. So whenever you need, just keep interrupting me, otherwise, I’ll just keep talking. So number three, these are your sales videos. And this is now where you’re going to try to get people off. So in terms of like an email sequence or something, we’re doing the exact same thing, we have a lead magnet which is our discoverable videos. And then we have our community videos which is like the first several emails of that email sequence which grows into like and trust factors, because people value the information, they otherwise wouldn’t have gone out and sought for that type of thing, they know, like, and trust us.

And now we get to the last email, the sequence which is to ask for the sale or in our case post the sales video. And the goal, the call to action here is to get people off of YouTube. Now the reason you don’t want to mix this with your discoverable content is because one of YouTube’s goals is to keep people on YouTube as long as possible. And so, if your video successfully keeps ending the viewing session and getting people off of YouTube, that video will not be discoverable for that much longer, right. So instead, we’re doing it just like a normal funnel like with email so we’re doing that with videos.

So the sales video, that is just intended to go to your subscriber base. It’s not intended to get a ton of views. It’s just going to pass through that feed of people and then like a week or two after you publish it, it should no longer be getting any videos. And that’s where you’re getting people off to go sign up for something or buy something, or there’s a sale going on, or a brand deal opportunity, or whatever the case may be, just get the heck off of YouTube. And that’s that one.

Steve: So when you’re talking about getting people off of YouTube, you’re talking about embedding a link in the video that they can actually click on, right?

Tim: Yeah, or a link in the description. It’s going be like that first link they can click under the video orifice to your website. You can put that right on the video for the people to click on.

Steve: So, when people click on those links, that actually negatively affects the discoverability of that video is what you’re saying?

Tim: Potentially. It’s a little bit more complicated than that but for our conversation, yes, if it does it effectively and consistently, which is what you want. If you do that well, then that video will not be positioned as favorably.

Steve: Interesting. Okay, so let’s say I have the video now. How do you actually promote a video to just kind of get it off its feet, so to speak?

Tim: So, if you have a built in audience like you already have, then I would be emailing those videos to my list, be promoting him on Facebook, Twitter, just kind of wherever I already have an existing audience, just promote it there. And the goal isn’t necessarily like a lot of people try to get all their Facebook people to subscribe to them; they try to get everyone in the audience to subscribe to them everywhere. And I’m more of a fan of getting someone from Facebook to subscribe to you on YouTube doesn’t necessarily help you because they’re engaged on Facebook not youtube. So, I at first will just promoted to everyone I can just to get that initial watch time and traction on it.

After that, it comes back to what we kind of talked about earlier which is consistently posting content for a specific audience that delivers a specific value every single time that people just grow to know and expect is coming from you. And it’s about doing collaborations, it’s about looking for videos that are performing really well in your niche and making similar content that could be suggested to it, not making the same video, but like, for example, my wife and I, with one of our kids, we homeschool our kids. And we saw this one video about how to do golf ball paint, and it’s getting tons of traction.

And basically it’s you hold a pen, you put a piece of paper in the bottom, squirt some liquid paint in there, and then you just roll a golf ball around in there and it makes like a cool design on the paper. You’re like, oh, that’s cool. Like, we don’t have any golf balls. And my wife is like, oh, we got an oak tree though. And and so we made a similar video called, how to do golf ball paint with acorns, right? And so that video, you can see how it was not the same video but it could clearly be a related video or a suggested one next to that video. And so our goal was just to get the spin off views then of people who were watching that big video to then start watching our video and then gain traction that way as well.

Steve: So, you’ve mentioned repeatedly that getting a subscriber is not as important as just getting people engaged in your video. So first of all, is that correct? And two then, what is the point actually trying to get a subscriber?

Tim: Yeah, it’s a good question. S,o subscribers are valuable because they will typically give you more watch time than a non subscriber will and that makes sense. They are familiar with your brand. They’ve already learned to love your content. And so, as your subscriber base grows, each new video you publish, you potentially get to launch that new video with more viewership and more watch time, which as we’ve kind of referred to already helps with how that video gets positioned all across YouTube.

So there’s value from that perspective, but the reason I don’t push it as much now, I mean, I still do, it’s still visually there on screen, the subscribe, and I’ll often say even on discoverable video, I’ll say something just very briefly like, so subscribe to this video and I’ll see you guys over in the next one or just something like that. I’m not making this full blown pitch for it. And the other reason for that is today’s social media is also mature enough that we know what it means to follow someone on Instagram or Twitter, we know how to like a page, people know how to subscribe to a channel. And often I just do that visually instead of like taking the time to call it out instead. So, they’re so valuable but on a discoverable video, the goal for me is actually to get people to watch more content.

Steve: So, one question I had for you and I’m not sure if you up do this, but I have all these podcast episodes, should I not be putting those on YouTube because those tend to get horrible engagement?

Tim: Again, it depends on your goal. If it’s on the same channel that you’re trying to grow with different type of content that is more optimized for YouTube, you could and just community and just count it as community content. But typically yes. So those podcasts on YouTube don’t perform as well as native content that’s designed for YouTube. If you wanted to kind of mix it up a little bit, kind of the way I’ve found, this is how I do it on my podcast actually, is I record my podcast as a live stream on my channel. And so, it’s a piece of content that people are watching and listening to.

So, I present the material like I normally would just as a recording live and then my producer then gets a lot of the good questions that were in chat while I was talking, but submit a shared Google Doc for me while I’m talking. And then I just answer some of those questions at the end of my podcasts less live stream and I include those in the podcast recording, but then it lives a little bit better on YouTube than before.

Steve: I guess the question is, can putting a bunch of non engaged content hurt your channel overall?

Tim: Potentially because what happens is you’re unintentionally teaching your audience, your subscriber audience to subscribe for the native content that’s designed for YouTube. They’re thinking, oh, I don’t have to watch every video that this channel puts out. Steve puts out great content, but only like that one I don’t have the watch. And you never want to start training your content that or your audience that they don’t have the watch everything you put out. I mean, they just want naturally but you certainly don’t want them to start filtering if you don’t have to. So I would either put that type of stuff on a second channel or just stop completely.

Steve: Okay, that makes sense. So, I just kind of want to end this interview by having you outline some of the most common mistakes that new youtubers make. And if you can just sum up the ones that you see, I imagine you see these all the time.

Tim: Yeah, we talked about a lot of them already so far, but the main one is that people just focus on optimizing for robots and not for people, and they don’t understand that the robots are designed to surface what people respond well to. So, instead of getting caught up in all the algorithms stuff, which we can talk about it if you’d like, but it’s just far more advantageous to focus on the viewer rather than on the system. that works better in the long run.

Steve: Yeah, so if I were to just sum up everything, it seems like just engagement is key. And as long as you have people watching all of your videos, YouTube will figure it out eventually.

Tim: If by engagement you mean people watching, yes.

Steve: Watching the entire video.

Tim: Yeah, because sometimes engagement people think like interaction, which is helpful and yeah, so those people do equal more, they’re worth more from an average view duration perspective. But at the end of the day, if you have a channel that’s going after toddlers, you’re not going to get comments and thumbs up. They don’t even know how to do those things, but they’re going to give you a massive amounts of watch time, right? So, engagement in terms of how they watch the video.

The second thing I guess a mistake is that people give up too quickly. And maybe your audience is a little bit different. But on YouTube, it looks so easy when you’re watching the top creators. You’re like, oh, all they’re doing is hanging out, making videos with their family. Like, I can do that. Oh, all they’re doing is playing video games, I can do that. But we forget, sometimes, I think your audience is probably more mature than maybe the average YouTube viewer is – I’m not insulting anybody, but I’ll just maybe go with that assumption for now which is that we understand when we watch an athlete on TV, there’s a whole backstory that are missing. There’s like, they’ve been practicing this since they were six and now they make it look effortless.

Or that musician who you’re like, oh yeah, I could play the piano like that, that doesn’t look too hard. Or that actor or actress who plays her role so amazingly well. Like when someone is good at what they do, they make it look easy. And a lot of creators, I think, watch a lot — yeah, they watch other YouTube creators, but they’re only looking at the ones who are at the top of their game. No one is comparing themselves to someone who’s at the bottom of their game. And what we don’t see which is what my team and I see is we see all the people who are struggling at the 100, couple of thousand, even 10,000 subscriber level, those are all the channels you don’t see because they’re small.

And so it gets frustrating because it’s easy for us to see just the people at the top of the game and get frustrated like why, it feels like I’m doing everything that they’re doing, and yet I’m not winning. And then I guess a third thing, a third mistake is that people — like we tend to think that the only thing people want is the content itself. But what makes channels actually win on YouTube is actually the human connection that people feel with the creator. So, you can give a perfect tutorial, let’s just use the same example, a perfect tutorial on how to bake a cake. And you give step one through eight for example, and you deliver it and execute and maybe the cinematography is just beautiful, and then a true story actually.

I worked with a creator who had seven full time people on their production crew, all television background, shooting on like $10,000 cameras and couldn’t break 24 views on a video. And the content looked amazing, and they come to me like, Tim, this content looks great but why is it not performing? And there were frustrated because there was a guy in his basement with a frickin webcam getting millions of views. And they were like, our content is so much better than that guy’s content, why is he getting millions and we’ve been doing this for 10 months now and can’t break 24 views?

And it makes sense when you think about it in terms of this guy I was working with. I was like I’ve watched 20 some of your videos now and I still don’t even know the host’s name. I don’t know — it was a vegan channel — I’m like, I don’t know why veganism matters to you, or what like, should I consider it? You just gave me the hard, cold, straight up, dirty facts and that was it. This other guy, he has a story people connect to. They understand why he’s doing this. They understand what his motivation is and they feel like they’re connected to him. And so, his videos are performing far better all day long with a webcam in a basement because he’s connected with people.

And so, the end of the day, remember that each of these views that we have in our videos, they’re not just like little tickers that just count up. Every view represents a real person and so we’re actually connecting with people. And I don’t know how much time we have here. We could talk into what gets people to connect but just…

Steve:We have a couple of minutes if you want to just summarize that because I mean, I think it is important right, people in course, like I sell digital course, people tend to buy the course because of the teacher as opposed to necessarily the content. So, I imagine this principle applies to videos as well.

Tim: Oh, yeah, and pitching, not the what you do but like the reward that they’ll get if they buy the course/ watch the video or something not just like, yeah, like solving the problem. So, there’s a few things that I recommend people do to kind of make it easier for people to connect with you and your content. And a lot of this for me goes back to a book called Primal Branding by a guy named Patrick Hanlon. And he looks at all the top brands that develop cult like followings and he asks, what made it possible for this brand to get people to love them so much, so deeply? And he breaks it down to seven aspects of the primal code.

And all the channels on YouTube that are just growing or killing it, they have pretty much all seven of these aspects just firing on all cylinders so well again, that you don’t even notice it unless what to look for. And we’ll just go through a couple of the big biggest ones right now, which is one of them is your backstory. Number one, like your key cult is your creation story. And that is people just need to know like who are you? Where do you come from? We know Google started in someone’s garage, right? We know like Steve Job’s story, we know who these pioneers are, the people who started these brands, these companies, we’re not connecting to logos, we’re connecting to the people who started these these logos and these brands.

And so, when I opened up to you in this podcast, you asked me how did you get started? I told you my backstory, my creation story. And so, for people to start caring about you, they need to know kind of where you came from. Number two, they also need to know what do you believe, which Patrick calls it the creed, but we’ve been referring to it a little bit here called the why as well. But I believe YouTube is a great place to reach people and change their lives.

I told you one little story that impacted me in terms of in that regard, but the strongest communities online and offline, they always revolve around shared beliefs. A lot of people think they would revolve around common interest but they’re actually like — common interest will give you something to talk about but when you believe the same thing, it like sucks you in. And so, stating that might sound scary and intimidating, but YouTube channel is so much competition that you really do need to state not just what you do but you need to say why you do it. What do you believe about why this is important? And the people who share that belief with you will jump on board so fast, as opposed to if they don’t have that information.

And you also need that, maybe number four is because the creed will separate the non believers and you actually need the haters. The Democrats wouldn’t be anything without the Republicans, Folgers would be nothing without Starbucks, Apple would be nothing without PC. You need these opposing people because of the strongest communities when they link arms together; they’re standing against something and which means that you need to stand for something in order for anyone to stand with you.

So, this guy with the vegan thing in this basement was like people knew, they knew his story, they knew what he was for, they knew what he was against, they knew what he believed, they knew who the non believers were, and then they also another one is the rituals. And the rituals are just the repeated interactions for people to grow to love and expect with with your brand. And so the best creators — do you watch a lot of YouTube by any chance?

Steve: I do actually yeah.

Tim: So, if I say like Pound It, Noggin, See Ya, do you know who that is?

Steve: No I don’t, I only watch a certain type of video, but yeah.

Tim: Okay, what type of videos do you watch?

Steve: Personal development, e-commerce, tutorial related ones, but I did notice that a lot of them sign off the same way.

Tim: Yeah like like Dude Perfect is the one I just mentioned, they have about 30 million subscribers. They have so many rituals if you start looking for them throughout their entire — the content, the celebrations they do, and the way they sign off. PewDiePie currently the largest but soon not to be the largest channel on YouTube used to do like Blueface and would do [inaudible 00:51:56] fingers and do this PewDiePie type of thing. And it’s like as you say like another creator I know will start every vlog with this camera in a different location. And he would pick up the camera then be like audience, that’s another ritual audience, why are you in my plants? And so every video opened like a question, why are you under my desk? Why are you in this shoe box? Why are you?

And so, it’s just like a ritual the audience just grew to love and expect. So we could go on with that. Rhett and Link have those too, they open with a hook and they say, let’s talk about that. And then they have icons and the icons are the things that just represent your brand, like in terms of Rhett and Link, it’s their hair. You know who Rhett and Link are by the way?

Steve: Yeah I do, I do actually.

Tim: Okay, so you know what I’m saying when I talk about their hair?

Steve: Yeah.

Tim: Their background, their sets is iconic on crutches of creation story, everyone who watches them knows their creation story, that they’ve been best friends for first grade, started making videos, started a commercial company and grew to this YouTube thing. They talk about their relationship, the Baxter, the relationship in almost like every other episode. So, we can keep going but some of those things make it easier for people just like, oh, I know who they are and what they’re about and it’s easier for me to make a connection with them now. And if you can…

Steve: [Crosstalk 00:53:13] is just about exposing your personality to the viewers, right?

Tim: Yeah, and your story, what you believe, what you’re all about, and then giving them some things to latch on, like, the icons and the rituals and stuff too.

Steve: Okay, Tim, this has been an amazing episode.

Tim: Yes, sorry, I just keep talking.

Steve: No, no, no, you know how I am. I tend to interrupt people and I haven’t interrupted you that much because everything that’s been coming out of your mouth has been really good stuff. Well, Tim, I want to give you a chance to talk about what you do and where people can find you online.

Tim: Yeah, so my team and I, we love working with creators and just helping them with their strategy and doing their analytics and everything for them to really help them grow a channel that reaches people and changes their lives. We do that through – well, right now we’re doing every weekday we have a new video video at YouTube.com/VideoCreators which is content designed just help people grow their audiences. We do a series, right now we’re in the middle of — called how they got 1 million subscribers. And we just sit down with million subscriber plus channels and ask them to reveal all the tips, tricks, and secrets, and tactics that they implemented to grow their audience to 1 million subscribers so that we can do the same.

I also have a podcast on iTunes, SoundCloud, Stitcher, Google Play, Spotify, just search for Video Creators weekly episode every Tuesday where we talk about a lot of the same principles as well, and dive into them in-depth. So, check us out there.

Steve: Cool. Well, Tim, I really appreciate your time. Thanks a lot for coming on the show.

Tim: Yeah. Thanks for having me.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. I’m actually really excited to implement the action items from this episode and looking forward to grow the 5 Minute Pitch audience. Now once again, if you all want to check out my brand new show, head on over to 5MinutePitch.com/launch. For more information about this episode, go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode244.

And once again, I want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop-ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. So if you want to give it a try, it is free. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post-purchase flow, a win-back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on autopilot. So head on over to Mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s Mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

Now I talk about how I use these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own e-commerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.Mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

243: Marcus Sheridan On How To Get Results With Your Blog

243: Marcus Sheridan On What To Do When Your Blog Sees No Results

Today I’m thrilled to have Marcus Sheridan on the show. Marcus runs the Sales Lion where he consults and teaches companies how to do inbound content marketing.

Today, he’s known as one of the premier thought leaders in the digital sales and marketing space. I’ve been following Marcus for years so it’s cool that we got to connect at Social Media Marketing World for a few minutes and that’s how he ended up here on the podcast. Enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • Why inbound marketing is the key to growing any business
  • What content works well and how to get results with your blog
  • How to become an authority in your niche
  • Types of content that attracts readers and customers no matter what the niche

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

GoBrandWin.com – The fastest and most effective way to grow your email list for free using group giveaways. Click here to signup for free.

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and dig deep into what strategies they use to grow their businesses. Now, today I have Marcus Sheridan from The Sales Lion on the show. And Marcus is an old buddy of mine that started blogging around the same time that I did. He’s definitely one of the better speakers that I’ve ever seen. And today we’re going to talk about inbound content marketing. It’s an incredible episode, and I guarantee that you’ll come away with some actionable nuggets.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to privy who is a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. And right now I’m using Privy to display a cool wheel of fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prices in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this. And when I implemented this form email signups increased by 131%.

Now, you can also use Privy to reduce cart abandonment with their new cart saver pops and abandoned email sequence as well at one super low price that is much cheaper than using a full blown email marketing solution. So, bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers and recover lost sales. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve. Now onto the show.

I also want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is also a sponsor of the show. Klaviyo is the tool that I use to build real quality customer relationships with my e-commerce store. And because all my transactions and email correspondence is tracked in Klaviyo, I can easily build meaningful customer relationships by listening, understanding and taking cues from my customers and delivering personalized marketing messages. So for example, with one click of the button, I can easily send a specific and targeted email to all customers with a lifetime value of over 100 bucks who purchased handkerchiefs in the past year. And it is for this reason why over 10,000 brands have switched over to Klaviyo.

Right now, they have this cool docuseries called Beyond Black Friday where they discuss successful marketing strategies that their customers are using that you can emulate with your business. So, head on over to Klaviyo.com/beyondbf to check it out. Once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf, now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here’s your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Marcus Sheridan on the show. Now if you don’t know who he is, Marcus runs The Sales Lion where he consults and teaches companies how to do inbound content marketing. And today he’s known as one of the premier thought leaders in the digital sales and marketing space. Now, I actually started my blog in 2009 and kind of in my periphery, I’ve been following Marcus for years. So, it’s really cool that we got to finally connect at Social Media Marketing World for just a couple minutes, but that was enough and that’s how he ended up here on today’s podcast. And with that, welcome the show Marcus, how are you doing today man?

Marcus: Steve so great to be here man, excited to speak with you and hopefully I’ll say something that your audience says, you know what, that was worth to listen right there.

Steve: I’ve seen this man speak, he is excellent. So Marcus…

Marcus: I have fun.

Steve: I got the date correct maybe but you started blogging like 2009?

Marcus: Mm-hmm, yeah glorious time man, that’s in internet years, that’s about three decades ago.

Steve: We are like dinosaurs I should say.

Marcus: You know what? That was actually back when people used to comment on blogs.

Steve: Yeah, those are the good old days, exactly yeah.

Marcus: That’s a good old inside blog joke there and I love it. Times have changed, man. Times have changed.

Steve: I remember at the time, you created the leading swimming pool website on the internet. Can you kind of talk about how you got started with that and how that transitioned over to The Sales Lion? Like what’s your story just for the benefit the readers who don’t know who you are?

Marcus: Yeah, I’ll try to give the very short version here. I started swimming pool company out of college with two friends in 2001. Things were going okay for us up until the market crashed in 2008. And by the beginning 2009, I thought we’re going to go out of business and I was getting ready to file for bankruptcy. But that’s when I started to read all these fancy phrases like inbound content marketing, social media blogging, all that stuff. And really what I heard in my simple pulled out mind was, Marcus if you just obsess over your customers questions and you’re willing to address them honestly and transparently through text and video on your website, you just might save your business right?

So, I embraced this philosophy that we call, they ask you answer, which basically said, hey, we’re going to be the best teachers in the world when it comes to in our case fiberglass pools. And so, like I said, to make a long story short that’s what we did. We became essentially the web entity of pools, and it became the most traffic swimming pool website in the world in the business, and last year we were the largest installer of fiberglass pools in the US. Now, I’m not a pool guy anymore, I still own a third of the company. But in this process, I started to just to write about what I was doing, which as you mentioned, Steve came at the end of 2009. And so I’m like, you know what, I’m just going to write the stuff that we’re doing, this whole they ask you answer, it’s working and I believe in this.

And so, I was just writing about it and then all of a sudden companies said, hey Marcus, can you teach us how to do that? And some conferences said, hey Marcus, can you come share that story of what you do with your pool company in our event, and it just started to snowball from there. And so, I was getting so many requests. I’m like; there is a business model here. And so I transition slowly out of River Pools.

And by 2012, I was essentially full on with speaking and consulting. And my agency, The Sales Lion, which is what it was called, is now a part of Impact. I’m one of the owners at Impact and we’ve got about 65 employees, and I give about 70 keynotes a year around the globe on sales, marketing, business communication. It is a dream, my friend, and it’s all because the economy crashed. Like if the economy hadn’t crashed Steve, it wouldn’t have happened, which is amazing how that works. But at the time, I thought it was the most stressful period of my life.

Steve: That is crazy. That’s more than one talk a week.

Marcus: Yes, yeah. I often, I mean, I’ll generally give that 1.5 talks a week. That’s correct.

Steve: Yeah, that’s great.

Marcus: It’s moving. Yeah, moving along.

Steve: So Marcus, the reason I wanted to have you on today is to kind of talk about content marketing and how to use it to promote your business. A lot of my listeners are e-commerce sellers, but we don’t have to talk about that per se. But if you can kind of tailor your answers towards an e-commerce biz, that would be pretty cool.

Marcus: Yeah.

Steve: So first off, like if you were running your own e-commerce business, I want to know like, what content works well, how to get results, how would you approach that problem?

Marcus: Yeah. So when we started the process of the ask you answer, within about six months, I could see there’s clear patterns of content that works, content that doesn’t work in terms of really moving the needle from a sales perspective, from a search SEO perspective, a whole nine, and we today I call that the Big Five. There’s essentially five subjects that before somebody goes to buy something, they want to understand these five things. It’s the psychological need that we have to feel at ease and to feel informed. And fundamentally today in today’s economy, we don’t want to make a mistake and we know that we don’t have to make mistake but we want to know these five things. So here are the big five.

The big five are, as buyers, we are obsessed with how much something costs. Now, we’ll talk more about that, Steve but that doesn’t mean we just put a price. That doesn’t count because every e-commerce person puts a price that doesn’t count as talking about costs. Okay? So we’re obsessed with all my costs and learning about cost as buyers, we are obsessed with understanding the negatives, the problems, the issues, how could this blow up in my face if I purchase it, if I buy it, whatever it is, service, product, it doesn’t matter. Okay, so that’s number two problems.

Number three, we’re obsessed with comparisons. In other words, generally, we don’t just look at one thing, we’re looking at two or more of a similar thing, product, service, again, it doesn’t matter. So, we love to compare. Number four, we’re obsessed with what other people say about it, of course, reviews, and then number five obsessed with the best. So generally speaking, we don’t search for the worst. We search for the best, right? These are the big five and here’s what’s fascinating. I’ve seen this again and again and again. When companies obsess over these big five, and they make that their just clear, clear directive, their compass, if you will, that’s what’s going to move the needle, because these five subjects are the bottom of the funnel.

And whenever you’re selling a product or a service, especially in the e-commerce space, you want to start at the bottom, not the top of the funnel. The mistake that a lot of people make, if they are producing content, it’s really, really fluffy, right? So let me give you an example if that’s okay Steve.

Steve: Yeah absolutely.

Marcus: And these are going to be pool tables but I don’t want anybody to think because right now if I turn on our e-commerce on our site, I’m sure we do at least a million dollars in revenue just in e-commerce alone because of the traffic that we have. I mean, now some months we’re getting close to a million visitors, I mean we’re doing really, really well. And so, there’s a reason for this, we would kill in this space. But because I’m a manufacturing installer, I don’t elect to go down that road that. So, this is this is an example of how we did with fiberglass pools. Okay, so when I started the process of they ask you answer, one of the first questions that people used to ask me all the time as a support guy was, so Marcus, I’m not going to hold you to it but give me a feel of how much is this going to cost?

Of course they might have been talking about a fiberglass swimming pool or an inground swimming pool or whatever. What’s crazy is when we started out this process, nobody in the world had addressed how much does a fiberglass swimming pool costs on their website? The reason for the Steve is because businesses don’t — they’re afraid generally speaking, they’re afraid to talk about, like I’m going to give it away to my competitors, I might scare them away. I mean, there’s all these different things. And so, we openly talked about it and we said, here’s all the factors that are going to drive it up, here’s what could keep it down, here’s the different packages that you can expect, here’s why some companies are expensive and why some companies are cheap.

That was critical and fundamental Steve, and this is the part that most ecommerce companies do not do is whenever you sell a product especially if it’s a significant major product within your skew set, you always want to make sure that you have definitive articles and videos just on how much does that particular type of product or service cost. If you don’t do that, you’re never going to play in the search space and you’re going to devalue and potentially commoditize the thing that you’re selling, which is a problem. So, to make a long story Steve, that one article has generated over $6 million in sales, how much does a fiberglass pool cost?

So, if you search anything today about how much does inground pool cost, how much does it cost to install a fiberglass pool? I mean, anything like that, if you’re in the United States, we’re the first ones you’re going to see to this day, it’s a cash cow. Okay, that’s number one. Number two…

Steve: Hold on one second, let’s elaborate on some of the things you just said about cost. I heard you say that you outline what companies do and what they don’t do and what factors into the cost. I was thinking like when you said that that psychologically, customers are going to now ask the competitors whether they do that certain thing and compare that to you.

Marcus: Right, that’s correct. That’s correct which is what you want them to do. Just like, let’s say you have an e-commerce platform but you also have a great blog and they mutually feed each other right? So your blog feeds e-commerce, but your e-commerce should be feeding the blog and people are like, what do you mean by — how can — if they’re on the platform, why would the platform feed the blog? Well, if it’s a good platform, you can do things like this, like hypothetically, you could set it up and I guarantee you 99% of your listeners have never done this before. So, let’s say that on your ecommerce platform, you have underneath the price a little arrow with a link that says, see why it costs this much.

Now, if a buyer sees a price and then sees a little arrow pointing to a link says, see why cost as much and it’s clickable link that takes them to an article and video that definitively explains why it costs that much. Have you commoditized or decommoditized that thing that you sell? Of course you’ve now decommoditized it. And now you’ve done a major, major value add to that particular visitor. But the problem is, more often than not, in the e-commerce space, it’s just cut and dry. They got reviews. Oftentimes, they do have reviews now on most of these platforms, but they don’t talk about the good, they don’t talk about the bad, they don’t talk about the ugly. Well, they might talk about the good, but they don’t talk about the bad and the ugly enough, and they don’t really explain it well enough.

And so, I’m constantly dealing with this. Most of the research I do, especially when I’m shopping ecommerce situations, I have to go and find the prices on the e-commerce platforms, then I have to research on another site that has nothing to do with that particular site to really understand the cost factors like why is this in costing as much as it is, and then I’ll go back to the e-commerce site, that’s dumb. It doesn’t make sense. Of course there’s conversion loss at that point anyway. And so this is why if you really, really do this well and again, if you’re selling a ton of stuff, choose the 20% that are generating 80% of your sales. Focus on that and it’s magical. This is service, product, it doesn’t matter. I’m telling you, for 90% of my clients around the world, I’ve done this with big companies, small companies, 90%, the number of traffic leading sales generating content has to do with cost and price.

Steve: This is very interesting. I’m just thinking in my mind, this would be a great place to point out your unique value proposition for each product as well, right?

Marcus: Of course, that’s exactly right. That’s exactly right. And this is where you can really blow away transparency because you’re able to say things like, hey, look, this isn’t the most expensive one, and it shouldn’t be, this is for the person that is looking for the middle of the road, but they’re looking for this, this and this, but they’re okay, not getting this, this and that. And if you feel like you are that person, well then, this might be a great fit for you. And it’s certainly a great value for that buyer. Most people don’t communicate like that right? Do you see what I’m saying? It’s just like just flat out here’s what it is, and it’s not this is for you if, this is not for you if. It’s unfortunate that most companies don’t think like that.

Steve: I guess my biggest concern here is you’re actually taking them off of the-commerce site to a different article and then they have to make their way back, right?

Marcus: Yeah, you open it up in a separate window. And if most of us are paying attention to our conversion rates of those shopping cart pages anyway, it would make us vomit to see how much we lost, right? And so, all you have to do is you split test this out, right? And you can definitively see it. Now, if you have a chance to have it on the actual page, great, have it on the actual page. But the thing is, it’s difficult to do that because most platforms aren’t built that way, right? And you can’t really build out a beautifully robust article slash video interactive format if you do it that way.

Steve: I guess now that I’m just thinking about right now, as we’re talking, you could just have a button and it could be like a pop up that is nicely formatted that you can just easily close and still remain on the product page.

Marcus: Yeah. So you could do the pop up in the pop up should have, read the full article here if the summation isn’t enough, but you can’t — here’s my philosophy on this Steve, and this is why is this such a big deal to me. We can’t treat people like they’re dumb, we have to treat them like informed humans that are smart shoppers. And so, it’s my strong belief that if we have a choice between let’s not inform them well, allow them to be ignorant and hope that that will increase conversion, or let’s allow them to learn more in the moment, if they’re still not psychologically satisfied with the value prop of that particular product or service knowing that if they do see it upon reading it, it means they’re more serious anyway. And the ones that do say, yep, that’s for me are going to come back and buy.

I just refuse to believe that the majority of cases, the person is going to say, wow, my gracious, that was helpful. Okay. Let me go find on some other place now.

Steve: Yeah, I think I tend to agree with you. That’s very interesting. Okay. Yeah. Do we have anything more to add on cost before we move on to the next one?

Marcus: Not so much on cost? Yeah, I mean, I think that hits the mark on cost. And again, I want to stress this as article in video at this point. We got to be doing it that way.

Steve: Okay, cool.

Marcus: So let’s talk about problems for a second. Problems is prolific. Once we feel like all right, I think I want to go down this road, then our natural question is, but how could it blow up in my face? And this is oftentimes why we seek out reviews, but the problem is, if we’re review dependent as an e-commerce shop, or as a business, that’s flawed. We need to beat the punch with these, in other words, get in front of it yourself. Let me get an example, again we’ll go to pools, this applies to everybody, so don’t think you’re different if you listen this because I’m telling you I’ve done this with too many services and products. I know that nobody is the exception to this.

And so, what happens is in my case with pools [inaudible 00:18:22] ask me all the time for example, so Marcus what are the problems of fiberglass pools? Very, very common question, and once again Steve nobody in the world, I’m not exaggerating, at the time had addressed that singular question on their site, why? They were afraid to address the elephant right. The smartest companies, they know that the greatest way in life to resolve concern is to address it before it even becomes a concern. And so, I openly talked about the problems of fiberglass pools on our website. And because we talked about it, it’s wild. Every year the number one keyword phrase that generates the most traffic to the site is fiberglass pools problems, or excuse me leads to the site is fiberglass pool problems.

So, that article has made a couple million dollars in sales at this point right. And it’s not just there, like when somebody says, hey Marcus; do fiberglass pools pop out of the ground? Okay, I’ll write about that. Are fiberglass pools cheap? Okay, I’ll write about that. These are consistent questions that we would get. So, I’m not going to bury my head in the sand, I’m going to openly address them when we get in front of them and then I can own the conversation set of one of my competitors, so it’s what you want to do.

You want to look at your different products and services that you offer, you want to say, on all the times that you’ve been asked, so I heard that, or is it true that, or somebody told me that, or I was reading, when anybody says anything like that, that denotes something negative is coming. And now, if you get on the front end of addressing it, you have a significant chance of earning the person’s trust and respect. But the key is you can’t be biased.

Too many people, especially in the e-commerce space are just biased, which loses that trust factor, you can’t become the trust agent at the same time be extremely bias. So, an example of how you might phrase this again, I’ll just go back to the simple pool example. So, we might say something like this, fiberglass pools aren’t for everybody. They don’t get wider than 16 feet, longer than 40 feet, deeper than eight feet; you can’t customize them anywhere you want. So, if you’re looking for a pool that is wider than 16, or longer than 40, or deeper than eight or super customized, it’s probably not a good fit for you. But if you’re looking for a low maintenance pool, that’s going to last year lifetime, has less than 16 my 40, less than 8 feet deep, and you can find a shape that does fit your needs, well then this might be the perfect fit for you.

But you notice here, we present the ugly first and then we come back, just psychology, with but this is how it could be a great fit for you if you fit these classifications. So, the idea is when somebody’s going through the process of buying something, the whole time, they’re nodding their head saying, yep, yep, yep. Or they’re shaking their head saying, no, not me, which is fine. Because we don’t want people buying our products anyway, that they’re not a good fit for, not if we have integrity, right? If we sell from a place of integrity, we want people to be very informed about the said product or service so that they don’t make a mistake. So, that doesn’t come back on us or our shop or our product, and they say, these guys never lead me astray. That’s the whole idea. That’s the essence behind problems.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Ahrefs for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I’m a huge fan of their tool and in my opinion Ahrefs is the best all in one SEO tool out there to rank in Google search. And recently, I completed a search engine site audit for mywifequitherjob.com and Bumblebeelinens.com and Ahrefs was indispensable. For example, I used Ahrefs to do a deep dive into all my posts to find the highest volume, lowest competition keywords to target in search. And in fact, recently, I used Ahrefs to rank a blog post in Google from position 20 to position five for a big time keyword in the span of just one month by switching around my title and H1 tags.

I also use Ahrefs to spy my competitors’ sites to see what keywords they are ranking for, and then I write a more comprehensive post and eventually outrank them in search. Now those of you who know me know that I hate spending money on tools, but I actually pay for Ahrefs and that should say something in itself. Right now, I’m giving away nine three month Ahrefs memberships for free. To sign up, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway, once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway to win a three month Ahrefs membership. Now back to the show.

I love it. I love it. I know there’s this leather store that does the exact same thing. They point out the flaws in leather and they basically educate you on the different types of leather. And then they show you a demo of their leather, where — it’s called Saddleback Leather, I don’t know if you’ve heard of it, but then they show that they’re leather is basically indestructible, and it’s incredible.

Marcus: Yeah, yeah, that’s exactly right. So it what’s funny is, there’s other good leather out there, but they actually understand that unless we show it, it doesn’t exist. I mean, in 2018 and beyond the idea that we would sell anything and just say it and not show it is almost laughable. We have to be in the mindset of unless we show it, it doesn’t exist. They show it really well. It really sticks and it’s crazy. So many other companies could do that, but they don’t. So that’s the essence of problems. You got to get in front of it. Again, the moral of the story is as a business, you have a choice. You can allow your competitors to own those negative conversations or you can own them. That is your call. But clearly one is better than the other.

Steve: I love it also because it’s counterintuitive.

Marcus: Exactly, a lot of stuff is counterintuitive. And that’s why I’ve given over 200 workshops to different companies around the globe. I’m in New York City right now to give a workshop to sales and marketing team tomorrow basically helping them understand why talking about these things is good instead of burying your head in the sand like most of their competitors and not addressing them, right. Yeah, the problem is, you don’t see many sites doing this well unless it’s like a review site or a third party site. The actual businesses, they don’t generally do it well.

Steve: Right. And to find out the problems just use any keyword tool or do a survey, like how do you find out what these problems are?

Marcus: Yeah, I mean, hopefully you’re in tuned to what the marketplace is saying, just keyword tool in the world is just listening really well. But beyond that, yes, I would use a keyword tool and search for them. And in that case, I would search for like negative reviews, things like that of the particular product to see what people are saying, and then you can really run with it. But depending on the type of product too, you can just — there’s some standard ones out there, like is XYZ product cheap?

I mean that’s like a very legitimate question that a lot of people ask right, that’s a common one that people ask right. How long does XYZ last, an honest review. That’s another example of a really good double up right there. We doubled up on how long does it last which is a problem statement, and then an honest review is review statement, so we doubled them up together and now it’s even more effective. So that’s just a way to do it.

Steve: Cool. Let’s move on to number three.

Marcus: Number three four versus and versus has picked up finally a lot more. I mean, I was talking about it long before a lot of companies were doing it. It’s still incredibly prolific and important. And as I’m talking about these things, some people are going to listen to this and say, well, I’m just afraid that the marketplace is flooded with all these already and it’s just too saturated for me. That’s a very, very scarce mentality, not healthy for a couple of reasons, A, by you answering these, it forces you to be a dramatically better communicator teacher and force you to know your products better.

Also when people come to your site, they’re going to be way, way more informed and they’re going to get your opinion out instead of everybody else’s. This goes on and on for the reasons why we should do it. So, with versus, every product and service generally means that somebody is looking for a comparative item, all right. For me, these poor guys they were looking for fiberglass versus concrete pools, fiberglass versus vinyl pools, and in the swimming pool space, what was funny about that one Steve is no fiberglass pool guy in the world was addressing fiberglass versus concrete pools. Of course the reason was because they were saying our biggest competitor is concrete pools.

So, this is where we’re going to do, we’re not going to talk about them on our website and when we will talk about them, well then, nobody will know they exist which is about the stupidest mindset ever. But that’s literally, that’s how so many pool guys thought, right? And so, my mindset was, I’m going to ask this question every day, so you heck yeah, I’m going to address it. So, I openly talked about them. I compared them very honestly; I didn’t say one was better than the other because that would be a lie. And again, it was a matter of hopefully this article is going to help you decide which is the best choice for you and then gave pros and cons of each right. So that’s what we did.

Now, what you want to do is you want to think of every comparison based question that you’ve ever been asked. And if you talk with your customers, oftentimes you’re saying things like, so if you were me, which would you choose? Or in e-commerce space this is people that bought this also looked at or also searched for. But the easiest way to do this one is I do like to go to Google and I always just put the product plus the word versus or compared to, and then you get a slew of potential results that you should be talking about, you should be showing and this still works extremely well to this day.

But again, the key that most companies screw up man is you just come across as one sided and it just doesn’t work that way. You can’t come out and say, all right, so this video we’re going to explain why fiberglass is really your only choice and concrete frankly is a poor option to consider. That’s dumb, why in the world would people do that? Yet that’s oftentimes the language of companies, that’s not going to induce trust, you got to be real.

Steve: This is — I’m just thinking about my own products right now in the digital space, I run a class, which is a pretty high ticket item. It actually makes sense for me to create my own review versus some of the other competitors out there and just point out both my strengths and the weaknesses. I think that would actually help because I know for a fact that a lot of people search for reviews of my class.

Marcus: So that’s number four, perfect transition there, Steve. So oftentimes, we leave reviews up to everybody else. I don’t think we should. I think we should also include ourselves in that conversation. Now, there’s different ways that you can do this. You can gather up a lot of the reviews from people that have used it, but you should clearly target that keyword phrase, but here is where we’re going to go even further than that Steve. We should target our competitors’ reviews too. And let me give an example of how I did this incredibly successfully. I’ve made a few million dollars off this.

So, I was the first person in the swimming pool industry that in fact in pretty much probably any like home improvement industry because I was teaching this and people are like you’re crazy. In 2009 and 10, I guess I started teaching this, people were like you’re nuts. So let me give an example, because my philosophy was they ask you answer, I was obsessive with listening. And one night, it was probably around 2010 or 11, I had given this — this is at the end of me being a poor guy.

And I gave this couple of quote for a pool. And they said, Marcus, we like you. We think we want to do business with you. But if we don’t get this pool from you, is there anybody else that you might recommend? I thought to myself, go on it. You know, I hate this question. And of course, when most companies get asked that question, they’re like, oh, there’s nobody quite like us, the way we do what we do, right? And so yeah, that’s right. And so the person’s is like, oh, whatever. So, I went home that night and as I dug on it, they asked a question so I’m going to answer this.

And so, I wrote an article and anybody that’s listening to this, you should look it up, and it was who are the best pool builders in Richmond Virginia, review/ratings. And I came up with a list of five of the best pool builders in Richmond Virginia. Now, come right out and say I didn’t even put myself on the list of five. You might say why did you not? Well first off, if they’re reading the article on my website, they’re already looking around; they’re already thinking I’m a pretty cool guy. The second reason is if you’re going to create a best of lists and then you put yourself on set list, well then, that denotes bias. And again, every business should be built on trust. And so, I’m not going to do something that is going to make me look biased and it’s going to cause me to lose credibility.

But the other factor is this, if you go to that, if you just typed in like best pool builders Richmond, Virginia right now, I mean you’d find it immediately in search results, and you’ll see exactly how I wrote it. But I talked about each one of my competitors. Now, here’s what I would suggest on this, you don’t inject opinion, you stick to the facts and you just make clear comparisons, right? So I could clearly compare my competitors in the sense of this is where like this swim pool company has been around since 1972, and they’re located in the mechanics area of Virginia. They specialize in inground vinyl liner swimming pools, and have a heavy emphasis on automatic swimming pool covers. They also install fiberglass pools and have a full service department.

Now, all that information I got directly from their website and basically using their words, right. So, I don’t express any negatives. If a company ever does express negative, it should be sourced from an outside article. And even still, I’d be very, very careful, right. I tend not to mix with any of that, I only stick to the facts and I try not to inject opinions when it comes to other people stuff. But because of that, today if you went online and you search for things like reviews, Pla-Mor Pools Richmond Virginia which is a very major competitor of mine in Richmond Virginia, and Pla-Mor is spelled Pla-Mor.

So, if you search for reviews Pla-Mor Pools Richmond Virginia which is a very common search, that article is one of the first ones you’re going to see. It’s always one or two in search engine results. And it’s crazy Steve, a few years back I had this lady come to me and she said, Marcus, the craziest thing happened. I was so close to signing a contract with Pla-Mor Pools but before I signed that contract, I decided to go online and research their company. And as I was researching their company, I stumbled across this article that you guys had written. I said my goodness, these guys are honest, so honest, I should probably call them too. And of course Steve, you know what happened because otherwise I wouldn’t be sharing the story right?

Steve: Yeah.

Marcus: That article cool generated just that year alone $150,000 in sales. And sometimes people say to me, aren’t you afraid you’ve now introduced them to the competition, which is silly because it takes them about point four eight seconds to know who your competitors are. And so, you know and I know that consumer ignorance is no longer a viable sales and marketing strategy right. Now, with the digital age they’re going to find out. And so, if we automatically say to ourselves, look, they’re going to be informed, they’re going to be intelligent, I’m not going to treat them dumb, I’m going to treat them like intelligent human beings with the capacity to learn and understand and make smart decisions.

When we do that, it gives us the ability to be way more honest, to say way more, give way more information. I mean, just the possibilities are endless because now there’s nothing handcuffing us, there’s nothing holding us back. It’s very, very exciting and it’s very, very fun. So, I just combined the final two reviews and best into one there but that’s an example of how we did that. And I’m telling you I’ve done that with so many companies to this day. It just wins and it continues to win.

I just want to let that tickets for the 2019 Sellers Summit are almost completely sold out. Now, what is the Sellers Summit you ask? It is the conference that I hold every year that specifically targets e-commerce entrepreneurs selling physical products online. And unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, mine is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an e-commerce business.

Now, recently, I put up the curriculum and the speakers who will be attending and we have an all-star lineup, including Ezra Firestone, Mollie Pittman, Scott Voelker, Greg Mercer, Mike Jackness and more. Now, the Sellers Summit is going to be held in Miami Florida from May 15th to May 17th, and for more information, go to Sellerssummit.com, once again that’s Sellerssummit.com or just Google it. Now back to the show.

So, my only concern with what you said was that you don’t include your own company in the top five for example.

Marcus: Yeah.

Steve: The problem is when people do searches; they might not even recognize that they are on your site, and they just look through the straight five and then pick one among your top five and avoid your company all together. Does that happen?

Marcus: Yeah, yeah, that could actually happen. And so if I was selling an item with e-commerce, right, an item on e-commerce, I would include in that list, okay. But I would come out — now it’s different with a swimming pool company, right? And you have to read the article to understand why it’s different. It just doesn’t sound the same. Now, I would come out and say, though, now listen, we sell — it would sound something like this, let’s just choose a dumb one, toothbrushes. I would say something like this, here are Marcus’s toothbrushes.

We get asked all the time about other brands that we believe are good, and because we believe so much in educating our customers over just having them buy from us, we’ve created this article, this video today that’s going to give you an honest assessment of the top 10 brands that we’ve seen in the marketplace for soft bristle toothbrushes. Now, keep in mind as you read this, two of these we sell. But of course, we sell them because we believe in them so very much. So, although we include them in the top 10, we also include eight others that we don’t sell. And hopefully, this is going to give you a great sense as to what is available in the marketplace and why we chose what we chose.

Steve: Interesting, I suppose if it’s something that you don’t sell, you might even be able to establish some sort of affiliate arrangement also.

Marcus: You can clearly do this with affiliates. And the other way that you do it Steve is with indirect industries, right? So in other words, let me give you an example. So, if I’m selling swimming pools, I might do something on swimming pool heaters. And the reason why I would want to do that because if they’re looking for a heater, they might also be in the process of buying inground swimming pool and just looking for the heater for a set pool, you see what I’m saying?

Steve: Yeah.

Marcus: And so, it’s a smart play to indirectly do this. I mean there’s just lots of ways to do this. I mean, I’ve done this with like I’ll give you an example, let’s say and this doesn’t necessarily apply to e-commerce but the same principle. So, let’s say you’re a pet sitter and so you would want to do articles or videos on both always — it’s really always both but on the best veterinarians in your area, because now you’re giving — it’s great credit for them, you’re getting on their radar and people are searching for that, and if they’re looking for a veterinarian, there’s a good chance they need a pet sitter as well. You see what I’m saying?

Steve: Yeah absolutely.

Marcus: So, that cross pollination is really, really effective with best off stuff and it’s still, to this day man, it’s just so effective. Obviously, with any of those, preferably you want to put the year if you can, because it definitely makes a difference in search engine results.

Steve: Okay. And then just adjust the year accordingly obviously as time passes.

Marcus: Yeah, yeah. I mean because we’re in a, what have you done for me lately world, we just got to keep producing new content isn’t necessarily a bad thing.

Steve: Well, let me ask you this, so we’re putting out all this content but it might not necessarily rank anywhere and people might not necessarily be able to find it. And so how do you attack the problem of actually ranking and getting people to read these articles?

Marcus: Well, everything we just talked about was a straight SEO play. I mean, it’s very bottom of the funnel based major search. Every single client that I’ve had, in the first year we never get less than 10x growth in terms of traffic. And I don’t even call it SEO, even though that’s essentially what you’re doing because obviously, Google’s obsession is that you specifically and relevantly answer the question better than anybody else. And so, the thing about a lot of e-commerce shops is they don’t produce super quality content oftentimes. For example, I know you know this; the average number one ranked page in SERPs is above 1,000 words, right?

And so, whenever we have a client producing a piece of content and we’re vetting it out, unless it’s above 750 or more that’s the — 750 words is the bare minimum acceptable number for any piece of content any of our clients produce, because we help train clients with content marketing okay. So, anything less than that, preferably we like the bar to start at 1,000 words. Now, I’ll be like holy freak, are you serious? Yes. That’s the marketplace, that’s the game we’re in, because meat is good, this is what search engines want. You get all this stuff that like everybody wants short bite sized, not search. Sorry, anyhow works. We want meat and potatoes, man, and that’s why bigger, beefier is better not wasteful. Not wasteful, but bigger, better and beefier is better.

Steve: Yeah, I mean, I would argue that it should be 1,500 or even 2,000 words plus at least…

Marcus: Yeah, you’re exactly right. You’re exactly right. And I say, 750. That’s the low bar of the low bars.

Steve: Yeah. What is your take on the site design as opposed to just the straight content? Like, does the site have to be beautiful? I mean, what is your experience on that, because a lot of people spend a lot of time and money designing a beautiful sight.

Marcus: Yeah, and then conversions are less.

Steve: Yeah, in e-commerce space, for sure that’s the case yeah.

Marcus: Yeah, it’s very, very common and this is because a lot of website designers are arty-farty and there not conversion based. And anybody that’s gone through a website redesign has probably seen that and experienced that which is why we’ve got to be obsessive testers. I mean all of us do. And we never sacrifice — I’m going to put conversions and UX together here because I think done right, great UX leads to conversions. It doesn’t hurt it right? Because to your point earlier, the question about but if you have that Marcus is it going to hurt conversions? I think incredible education increases conversions, right. It’s always been my experience. And so my point is, I think that always needs to be our primary focus and secondary focus is the visual side.

That being said, I do think we have to be outrageously obsessive of this point about video. I think most people should see themselves as media companies, pretty much everybody especially on your major products and services. If you don’t have a really robust video that truly says who it’s for and who it’s not for, that’s actually more important, well then, you’re missing the mark in terms of psychology.

Steve: So Marcus, we covered a lot of stuff today. And what I want to do is I kind of want to summarize it and kind of put it in a cohesive content plan, so to speak, so that the listeners can come away with something that’s actionable. So, if you want to just give a few actionable tips on how to just get started with what we talked about today, that’d be great.

Marcus: So, one of the things that we do that’s been incredibly successful is we have what’s called the content matrix, right? So the content matrix is what you do. Let’s say you’ve got, I don’t know, 20 major products that you sell online or services. So with those 20, let’s create a chart or a graph if you will, and at the top of the chart, you have each one of the major products that you sell. Now, that’s the top of the chart. Now, on the left side of the chart or graph, put the Big Five, put best, cost, problems, versus, reviews, and best. And then take each one of those and fill in all the cost questions that are involved with that particular product, fill in all of the comparison based questions, all the negative based questions, all those things that we’ve talked about.

If you do this, and let’s say that you have 10 products that you sell, let’s just use 10, well, it’s not just that you’re going to have 50 pieces of content, you’re probably going to have a couple of hundred pieces of content that come out of it if you’re doing this the right way, right? Because just on versus alone, there’s probably a bunch of versus that you might do, right. And there’s a bunch of cost ones potentially that you might do. I mean, it just depends on how it said. So, the content matrix works and within a couple of hours of just really focus, you’re going to have 12 to 24 months potentially it could be of content to produce through texts, through video that’s very exciting, that’s very, very helpful.

I think that’s one of the majors and also urging anybody that this is not a straight e-commerce play but it does matter conjunction with video which is such a big deal. I’ve been doing so much with this with clients and experimenting is crazy. We’ve consistently seen over and over again that putting a video next to a form that people have to fill out a form on your site like on a landing page on average increases conversions around 80 to 90%. But here’s the thing that a lot of companies will mess up is they won’t title video. So they slap a video next to a form, that’s not good enough. What you want to do is the video has a title and the title should be something like this literally, should you fill out this form or see exactly what will happen if you fill out this form.

Steve: Interesting.

Marcus: It’s really powerful when you have that titled. So the person comes on that landing page or whatever it is, and you’re trying to get their information for whatever reason, and they have a form. There’s four major fears that people have when they fill out forms. Number one, are you going to call me to death if you’re asking for my number? Number two, are you going to spam me to death if you’re asking for my email? Number three, what are you going to do with my information, privacy. Then number four, exactly what is this process going to look like if I fill out this form? So you want to address all for those fears in this video. You do it nice and easy and relax, right?

So, it’d literally be something like this. I might say okay, so you’re sitting there right now and you’re saying to yourself, should I fill out this form really, are you going to spam me? Are you going to like email me or call me to death? All right, let’s talk about exactly what this is going to look like. So then you explain it. At the end of the video, it doesn’t have to be long at all. At the end of the video you say, so hopefully that addresses your concerns. If any questions let us know. Otherwise, fill out the form; we can’t wait to talk with you soon. Unbelievable results, generally like I said, 80, 90%. I’ve seen a bunch that were between 150, 200% lead to conversions. So those are magical. You see very, very few companies doing that right now, it’s a major opportunity Steve.

Steve: Would you suggest doing this on like an e-commerce checkout page though?

Marcus: Absolutely, absolutely all stinking day long. And again, the beauty behind this guys, is we can split test this stuff, so you don’t want to take my word for it. If you doubt it, split it and you know what, oh yeah, the poor guy was right. At least test it because I’m happy to — there might be situations where it’s more effective 90% of the time, but 10% it’s not. That’s okay; let’s use it for the 90.

Steve: So, just to kind of reiterate what you said, so in the checkout process, you want to just kind of outline the forms that you will experience, what the outcome is going to be, and reassure them that you’re not going to sell their information and that sort of thing.

Marcus: That’s right, overcome those four major fears, major conversion list buddy.

Steve: Interesting. Okay, I’ve never thought to do that at all.

Marcus: That’s why we’re talking.

Steve: I know, so what else you got Marcus.

Marcus: I got lots of stuff.

Steve: We got five minutes left or whatever. If you got anything else, that’d be great. These have been awesome nuggets.

Marcus: Yeah. Well, and hopefully it means to the listeners, look, if you get the book they ask you answer, it’s on Amazon, Barnes & Noble, all the stuff. It was rated the number one marketing book in 2017 by Mashable. And it really breaks all the big five down and talks about this really, really well, all the principles definitively apply to e-commerce. I mean, it really, really does. One thing that I would suggest to people to consider doing Steve, if you are not using some of these simple personalized email video marketing tools by now, you are behind the eye ball, for customer service and e-commerce, they are unfricking believable.

So, an example of these tools would be GoVideo by Vidyard or Soapbox by Wistia or there’s some others out there. And many people when a purchase is made, they’ll send some automated, hey, thank you. But even better especially if they spend a bunch of money with you, if you create a quick personalized video that says, hey Steve, you just went on our site and you purchased this, man, I’m so excited for you, I just want to thank you. But if you do that, and they see the thumbnail of you holding up a card that says, thank you Steve for your purchase, and it comes to them the same day, they’re going to be blown away. This is stuff that Amazon isn’t doing yet.

And that is the power of personalized video; it’s free. If you get GoVideo right now by Vidyard is the company that makes it, it’s a free Chrome extension and anybody that is not technical can learn how to do in about 60 seconds. Everybody that’s listening to us right now for that ultra, powerful customer service experience should be sending out personalized email videos. And it makes all the difference.

Steve: And so just to be clear, this service, so I’m not familiar with the service, you can actually personalize a video and generate on the fly?

Marcus: Yeah.

Steve: Okay. Yeah.

Marcus: Super, super fast. So, it’s like if I wanted to Steve, and I might even do it after we get off this, I might just send it to you directly just because it is amazing. There’s two major problems with emails that we have. Okay, number one, do they open it? Number two, do they consume it after it’s been opened? So those are the two major problems, so how do you do it? You got a subject line that says something like this. Hey Steve, I made this video for you. Okay. Now as soon as you see that, you have to open it, psychologically you don’t have a choice, right? You don’t have a choice.

Then when you see a thumbnail of a video and on that video I’ve got this little whiteboard or note that’s saying, hey Steve, I just wanted to thank you, whatever, hey Steve, or whatever it says, or just Steve exclamation point. Once again, you can’t help but to click on the video and watch it. And the whole thing oftentimes will take me less time than actually writing out an email, and it’s so outrageously personalized and it’s just different than what anybody else is doing. Again, GoVideo by Vidyard, it’s free Chrome extension guys; get it right now unless you’re using some other type of personalized video program.

Steve: I love it Marcus. Hey, I want to give you a chance to talk about your services and your books and all the other services that you have to offer.

Marcus: Yeah, well, I’ve got an agency; it’s called Impact Brand and Design, ImpactBnD, Bravo and Nancy, Impactbnd.com is my agency, but my personal site is Marcussheridan.com. And I speak all over the world and if you’ve got — I know there’s a lot of solopreneurs here that don’t necessarily need a workshop, but if you’re thinking about somebody for a conference or whatever, recommend me because this is what I do and I have a lot of fun with it. And my obsession is the audience and their takeaways, and hopefully, that’s what this audience has gotten today Steve. They’re like, man, that’s a clear nugget. That’s a clear nugget. That’s a clear nugget, not a bunch of fluff, not a bunch of hypothetical jargon. They’re like man, this is actionable and I can take it and apply it to my business tomorrow. That’s always my goal.

Steve: Absolutely. In fact, Marcus I may not publish this episode and keep all these nuggets to myself.

Marcus: That’s awesome.

Steve: But thanks a lot for coming on the show Marcus, really appreciate your time.

Marcus: My pleasure.

Steve: All right. Take care.

I hope you enjoyed that episode. Marcus is amazing at planning and writing copy that converts and I know that I’m personally going to listen to this episode one more time in case I missed anything. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode243.

And once again, I want to thank Klaviyo for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for developing real quality customer relationships. Right now they just released a cool docuseries called Beyond Black Friday where you can learn successful e-commerce marketing strategies from real companies using their platform. This docuseries is free and you check it out at Klaviyo.com/beyondbf, once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf.

I also want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop-ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. If you want to give it a try, it is free. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

Now I talk about how I use these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own e-commerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.Mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

242: How Allen Walton Created A 7 Figure Store Selling Spy Equipment

242: How Allen Walton Created A 7 Figure Store Selling Spy Equipment Online

Today, I’m thrilled to have Allen Walton on the show. Now Allen is someone who I met at Ecommerce Fuel Live a long time ago but we didn’t really get to know each other until we hung out at Billy Murphy’s Mancation earlier this year.

Anyway, Allen runs SpyGuy.com which is an ecommerce store that sells spy equipment online. His store has been featured in Forbes, Entrepreneur, CNBC, Fast Company and he was recently featured on the Tim Ferriss podcast as well.

What’s cool is that he bootstrapped his company from the ground up and turned it into a solid 7 figure business.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Allen got into the spy equipment business
  • Where Allen sources his products
  • What the margins are like for dropshipped goods vs goods that you carry inventory for
  • How to prevent customers from doing price comparisons online and on Amazon
  • Why spy products have no brands

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

GoBrandWin.com – The fastest and most effective way to grow your email list for free using group giveaways. Click here to signup for free.

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deep into what strategies they use to grow their businesses. Today I have my friend Allen Walton on the show, and we actually recorded this interview a while ago. But in the past couple of months, he’s been featured on the Tim Ferriss podcast and the Tropical MBA podcast as well and he’s got an amazing story that I know you’ll enjoy.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Klaviyo is the tool that I use to build real quality customer relationships with my e-commerce store. And because all my transactions and email correspondence is tracked in Klaviyo, I can easily build meaningful customer relationships by listening, understanding, and taking cues from my customers and deliver personalized marketing messages. So for example, with one click of a button, I can easily send a specific and targeted email to all customers with a lifetime value of over $100 who purchased red handkerchiefs in the past year. And it is for this reason why over 10,000 brands have switched over to Klaviyo.

Right now they have this cool docu series called Beyond Black Friday where they discuss successful marketing strategies that their customers are using that you can emulate with your business. So, if you’re interested in watching this series, head on over to Klaviyo.com/beyondbf, once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf .

I also want to give a shout out to Privy who is also a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. Now what does Privy do? Well, Privy is an email list growth platform and they manage all of my email capture forms. And I use Privy hand-in-hand with my email marketing provider. Right now I’m using Privy to display a cool wheel of fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prices in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this. And when I implemented this form email signups increased by 131%.

I’m also using their new cart saver pop up feature to recover abandoned carts as well. And bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers, which I then feed to my email provider to close the sale. So head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve. Now onto the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Allen Walton on the show. Now, Allen is actually someone who I met at Ecommerce Fuel Live a long, long time ago, but we actually didn’t really get a chance to know each other until we hung out at Billy Murphy’s Mancation earlier this year. Anyway, Allen runs SpyGuy.com, which is an e-commerce store that sells spy equipment online, and his store has been featured in Forbes, Entrepreneur, CNBC, Fastcompany, and he’s actually recently on the Tropical MBA podcast. Anyway, Allen bootstrapped his company from the ground up and turned it into a solid seven figure business. And with that, welcome the show, how are you doing today Allen?

Allen: Hey I’m doing well, thanks for having me.

Steve: So Allen, I was actually on your site shopping last night, and then I realized that I was going to get retargeted on Facebook with Spy Guy ads which made me kind of preemptively tell my wife that I was interviewing today just in case, call me a little paranoid. So Allen…

Allen: Now, we do get customers that – sorry to interrupt you but we do to get customers that get really frustrated with us when they see retargeting ad because they’re really concerned about somebody on their computer that sees an ad for Spy Guy, they get really upset. Even if we just email an order confirmation, they get infuriated.

Steve: Just curious though, I actually didn’t end up getting any ads so my my worries weren’t real but are you running retargeting ads on Facebook?

Allen: Not right this second we aren’t, but we’ve been kind of testing it over like the last month or so just to see if we can make it profitable because it’s actually been kind of difficult.

Steve: Okay. And we’ll get into that a little bit because we did chat about it earlier. So Allen, before we get started with the guts of the interview, why spy equipment? And how did you actually get into this business? It seems a little random to me.

Allen: Yeah. It’s super random, actually. So I live in Dallas, have my whole life. And when I was growing up, there was this spy shop here in Dallas that was called Spy Supply. It’s no longer in business but I used to go there with my family, like on Sunday afternoons or whatever after church. We’d go to the pancake house that was next door and I’d always be really curious about the spy shop that looked sketchy as hell. So wait, am I fast, is that okay?

Steve: Yeah, that’s cool.

Allen: Okay. So it’s a really sketchy looking spy shop. I didn’t want to go in, I just kind of like wanted pear in through the windows. And so grew up still eating at that pancake house that was next door, and one day they had a help wanted sign out front. At the time I was like 21 years old, I was living at home, my parents really wanted me to get a job. And so my mom made me apply. It’s really kind of that, but I applied for the job and I ended up getting it. And so that’s kind of how I got into it. So selling CCTV systems to like big businesses and people with homes that wanted security cameras, but they also did sell a lot of spy related gear, so like hidden cameras, GPS trackers and whatnot.

And they worked with like police departments and private investigators and plus it was kind of like a novelty store, so sometimes we’d get celebrities that came in and just want to poke around so that was always really fun. And that’s how I got started I guess.

Steve: Why is it such a covert industry?

Allen: I don’t know. It’s very frustrating. There’s no brand names on any of the products that we really sell. You can’t get any of these items in big box retailers or anything like that. You pretty much have to get them all online. Or if you live in a big city, there might be a small small spy shopp or security store in your town, but there’s no mass manufacturing going on. The big brands that are out there probably don’t want to have their brand name on a hidden camera, might just ruin their brand image kind of. Yeah, and possible a lot of the people that get in this industry, they’re just sketchy people as well. So like it’s sketchy industry run by sketchy people selling sketchy products and a lot of paranoid people going on. So yeah.

Steve: Wait, so these items don’t have brands, so how does it work? How do you source your products?

Allen: So when I started, working in that brick and mortar spy shop, that’s why I learned where they were getting some of the items from. A lot of it is coming from Asia, obviously and then there’s US distributors, so that’s how I started. The brand though, how do you even look it up?

Steve: Like if someone wanted to get into this, it’d be difficult, right?

Allen: It would be really difficult. I mean, you can see some — if you go to Alibaba or whatever, and you type in some keywords, then you can find some of the products that are on there.

But the thing is there’s a lot of factories in China that are all making the same stuff. It’s like they’re using a public mold or something like that, or maybe it’s just a bunch of trading companies that are sourcing it from some factory that I can’t find on my own. So, it’s just very confusing. And I’ve made the trip over there trying to figure it all out, contacted as many people as I can. It’s just really bizarre. Like, you have no idea who’s the actual brains behind making some of these items, who’s the actual factory that’s making it, it’s really odd.

Steve: Interesting. So do you actually carry inventory of your products then or do you drop ship them?

Allen: Yeah, we carry inventory on all of the items that we sell. Sometimes we are running low or just completely out, then we can talk to the supplier that we’re getting stuff from into drop shipping it for us. If it’s an item that’s made in the US, if it’s an item that’s been made here, we just make sure that we have it in stock at all times.

Steve: So what do you think that — you mentioned they don’t have brands, so are you allowed towhite label these? Like, can you slap your own brand on these items or no?

Allen: Yeah, people do it all the time. If you go to Amazon or you just look around the spy shops that are online it’s pretty much all white labeled. Most people just keep it in the same crappy gift box or whatever that the Chinese supplier is giving them. They don’t even bother changing out the instruction manual. But yeah, if you look at Amazon, you’ll see the same item that’s being sold — excuse me, you’ll see the same item being sold by like 20 different suppliers under 20 different names. They’re all terrible brand names. It’s like somebody just did alphabet soup or whatever and just threw it on the Amazon product title. So yeah, it’s just very odd.

Steve: Interesting. So you carry your own inventory, so how do how much to carry and what to carry? Because you have a lot of products in your site, I was just shopping on there the other day?

Allen: Yeah, experience I guess. So, I’ve been doing this for almost a decade now, about five years on my own I suppose. So, just kind of seeing what customers are drawn to, what works, what gets returned often. So like, I actually take a lot of pride in our product selection on the website because we only carry the items that customers actually really like and items that we like and are low stress and don’t require a ton of tech support. We just want to avoid all of the headaches of dealing with returns and customers who are happy and saying that stuff about us online. We just eliminate that entirely by not carrying products that we don’t like.

Steve: Yeah, that makes sense. I was actually shopping for some stuff on your site just kind of comparing on Amazon. And as you mentioned earlier, there’s a lot of stuff that looks very similar but because it’s not really branded, it’s really easy to get things confused. So, how do you make your stuff kind of stand out among your competitors?

Allen: That’s a good question. I suppose we make it stand out because we’re offering more information. So, we have better product photos and we actually have a studio here where we take our own product photos, we have videos for most of the products that are on our website. Whereas if you’re looking on Amazon, or some of our competitors, they don’t have any videos at all. We have product descriptions that share all the details. So, we tell them exactly what is this case made out of on this hidden camera. So for example, there’s a really popular generic, it’s the type of product that’s just a free for all on Alibaba.

You can source it from a million different suppliers. But the thing is, I’ve been selling that product for like eight years, and I’ve seen all the different iterations of this product. It might be in a plastic enclosure, but somebody else is selling it in an aluminum enclosure. The aluminum one feels much more higher quality than the plastic one, there’s some weight to it, it feels higher quality. But then you also have the internal components. So I might be offering a camera that’s 10 ADP, and it’s higher priced than the one that you see on Amazon, even though they look the exact same. But what that Amazon seller isn’t saying is that the camera side is actually like four ADP or 7 ADP.

So even though the stuff looks the same, it really kind of is different. And we get customers all the time that call us asking why our price is higher or asking what the difference is. And that’s another value proposition we have is that we actually have a phone number where you can call and we’re happy to answer questions and match you with the right product.

Steve: Interesting, so you actually provide tech support on all of the products that you sell?

Allen: Right. So we offer expert advice. So if you haven’t bought anything from us, and you’re looking around, you’re trying to figure stuff out because people aren’t just buying this stuff like just because, they’re buying it because they have a need for it. And so they have questions, they have a lot of concerns, they’re trying to be discreet a lot of time, and so we’ll offer that up front advice and then we do lifetime tech support on all the products that we sell. We just do that on our own; we don’t have another company that does that for us.

Steve: Would you say then that you close a lot of your sales over the phone in person as opposed to just on the website?

Allen: Yeah, we did a test on it earlier this year. I’d love to find a way to make this like an ongoing test like we do it every month, but it’s really kind of annoying to run this test, but maybe 15 to 20% of the sales that we get are orders placed over the phone.

Steve: Wow. Okay. I guess that makes sense. So that implies then that the people that are answering phones at your company, they have to be very knowledgeable about the products.

Allen: Right. Yeah, we currently have four people doing sales and tech support, they do it all and we educate them on all the products that we sell. So we have everything in stock that we actually show them how to do everything. We have internal videos that we use for training. My most senior tech support person is actually the guy that trained me when I started at the spy shop here in Dallas like 10 years ago.

Steve: Oh, that’s funny.

Allen: He’s the guy that actually taught me all of the stuff that I know. And then when I went on to start my own business, maybe like a year later, I needed help. And I thought it was going to be so hard training my first employee, I just reached out to him and asked if he wanted to come work with me. And he said, yeah, so that was really nice. And he handles a lot of the training for my new employees.

Steve: Okay, that’s pretty sweet. So, was he still working at the Dallas shop at the time?

Allen: No, this is where it gets a little confusing. I worked at that store for about two years. And then five years ago, I started my own company. But there was a gap in there about three years. So like 2009, 2011, I was working in a brick and mortar spy shop for somebody else. And then in 2011, I actually got hired by a really bad TV show called cheaters.

Steve: Yeah, I actually vaguely remember that.

Allen: Okay. Yeah, they were a customer of mine and I was friends with the detective on the show. And the guy that created the TV show wanted to start his own brick and mortar spy shop. Long story short, I met with them, I convinced them to do an e-commerce website because I felt like that was the direction things were going in. And so they hired me to start an online spy shop for them, which they advertised in all of their TV show. They actually had like a 15 second commercial that ran in the TV show. And so when I went to work for them, I actually took the guy that trained me, my friend Vince, we went over to that venture. We worked there for about three years and then I went to start my own thing.

And then a year after I started Spuy Guy, I needed help. And so he was still working over there and I convinced him to come and work for me.

Steve: Interesting. So is that store still alive, the cheaters one?

Allen: No, that one died a couple of years ago. It was a big mess, and I’d be happy to talk about it with you in case you’re curious. I’m not sure you want to air it because the guy is very litigious.

Steve: Oh, that’s cool. Yeah, we’ll talk about it after after the recording. So, when I was going shopping for this, it was actually quite confusing, because there’s just so many different options and whatnot. And so one, like how do you get traffic to your store? And then how do you manage to close the sale once you do get someone there?

Allen: So when I started out, I realized that SEO was going to take absolutely forever, it was gonna be really hard because my niche is pretty competitive. So I learned paid ads, I learned how to do Google AdWords. I probably bought like three different books on the subject, a lot of YouTube videos. I don’t know if it’s still around but there was a really good blog called PPC Hero that talks about.

Steve: Yeah, it’s still there.

Allen: Okay, cool. Yeah, I learned a lot of stuff on their blog and through videos that they had posted on how to create campaigns, manage ad groups, create a list of keywords and optimizing for quality score. And right about the time that I started my business, I wasn’t making a whole lot of money. I was trying to do the four hour workweek thing and really trying to automate the business, but I needed to grow it and, it doesn’t take four hours a week or whatever to grow a business. And so, I actually took on an apprenticeship, some guy I found on Craigslist, he was just living in the suburbs of Dallas but he was solo managing some really big AdWords accounts for companies like SimpleHuman like they do…

Steve: Yeah, I know them [overlapping 00:16:56].

Allen: Yeah, exactly. So he was managing SimpleHuman and See’s Candy. They’re not big in Dallas, but I think…

Steve: They’re big out here in California. Yeah.

Allen: Yeah, he was managing their ad account in addition to a bunch of other ones, and he needed help. And I was like, all right, this sounds like a really good opportunity to learn PPC. And so I went to work with him for — I was only there like two or three months but I learned a lot about managing PPC campaigns. And that’s how I really scaled my business when I first started it, and it’s still a huge percentage of our sales today.

Steve: So when you say Google ads, are you talking about AdWords or Shopping, display ads?

Allen: Oh, yeah, so AdWords and then product listing ads, PLA it used to be called, I guess it’s just Google Shopping now. Yeah, so those two things. We tried the display thing, can’t really get it to stick.

Steve: That’s been my problem too although I just had someone who’s an expert on that on the podcast. I just haven’t gotten around to implementing what she’s taught yet, so I’ll do it. Okay so AdWords, were you running these ads by yourself first and not being successful until you took on this apprenticeship?

Allen: So my company launched in May and then I took the apprenticeship on in June. So just like a month later. I had been running my own campaigns for a month, and it was working, but it wasn’t enough to pay all the bills. And so the PPC apprenticeship was a good opportunity to earn a little extra cash. Not a whole lot, I was only getting like $1,000 a month, but it certainly helped and I learned a lot of info and I’m really glad I did it.

Steve: What were some of your key takeaways that you learned from the apprenticeship that you were not doing actually before you joined?

Allen: Oh, that’s a good question. I haven’t thought about this in a while, like over four years. So I learned a lot about spreadsheets. I never use spreadsheets before and I was learning about pivot tables and be look up and all this other stuff that I’m pretty sure is really basic for somebody that is in Excel all day but it was brand new to me and conditional formatting. So I was learning how to easily tell which ads were profitable. I was learning a lot about reporting and how long…

Steve: So the AdWords interface isn’t good enough to tell what’s going on, because you can actually do a whole bunch of filters and everything now within the AdWords interface.

Allen: Oh, it’s been a while since I’ve looked at it. I ran my ads for probably eight months. And then I met somebody at the very first Ecommerce Fuel event in Austin, his name is Travis.

Steve: Yeah Travis. Okay.

Allen: Yep. He’s been doing all of my PPC for the last several years. And so I haven’t been in the weeds in quite a while.

Steve: Okay, fair enough. So AdWords is like, or Google Ads I should say is a decent sized chunk of your revenue. What are some other ways that you’ve been able to get traffic to your site aside from that?

Allen: We do get organic traffic, not a whole lot; it’s like less than 10% of our overall sales. And something that I just been really neglecting for years even though I know a lot about SEO, I’ve been neglecting it because I largely just got complacent with my business. And I hadn’t set new goals. Money was my main motivator for a really long time. But once I was making a sizable amount of money per month on my e-commerce website, I just kind of like fell into a phone for like a one to two year period where I didn’t have to do anything all day and I was still making good profit. So, I just kind of like didn’t do anything.

And now I’m paying the price for it because I got Google like suspending my account for like weeks at a time because they don’t like what I’m selling.

Steve: Did you say Google suspending your account. Is that just for PLAs or just in general for AdWords as well?

Allen: Yeah, it was for Shopping.

Steve: Shopping, okay.

Allen: I got in trouble with text ads, but with Shopping they’ve been really…

Steve: They’ve been cracking down a lot of industries actually for that recently.

Allen: Yeah, I’ve been looking at that and when they do that, it’s so difficult because you have no idea what to do. It’s like all of a sudden, like your sales drop like a rock. And you can’t get ahold of anybody there. They won’t let you actually talk to the policy team directly. You have to go through and just some phone support person that’s totally unhelpful. And so you can’t find out exactly what’s going on. They’re not clear and their description of what problem they have with your ad or website or whatever. So it’s very frustrating to just suddenly wake up one morning and then see no sales coming from Google Shopping, and then you realize they shut down your account without telling you, and it takes like or two weeks to get it running. It’s beyond frustrating.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Ahrefs for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I’m a huge fan of their tool and in my opinion Ahrefs is the best all in one SEO tool out there to rank in Google search. And recently, I completed a search engine site audit for mywifequitherjob.com and Bumblebeelinens.com and Ahrefs was indispensable. For example, I used Ahrefs to do a deep dive into all my posts to find the highest volume, lowest competition keywords to target in search. And in fact, recently, I used Ahrefs to rank a blog post in Google from position 20 to position five for a big time keyword in the span of just one month by switching around my title and H1 tags.

I also use Ahrefs to spy my competitors’ sites to see what keywords they are ranking for, and then I write a more comprehensive post and eventually outrank them in search. Now those of you who know me know that I hate spending money on tools, but I actually pay for Ahrefs and that should say something in itself. Right now, I’m giving away nine three month Ahrefs memberships for free. To sign up, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway, once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway to win a three month Ahrefs membership. Now back to the show.

Would you say then that a lot of your sales are just like word of mouth sales? I would imagine like once someone trusts your store, and because the whole industry is kind of sketchy, then I can imagine word of mouth being a huge factor.

Allen: It is. Yeah, especially after we started getting reviews on our website and stuff, getting reviews on the website really helps because it convinced people who are shopping to do business with us, and then I feel like I run a pretty good business. And so, they would order from us, they’d be satisfied and then maybe they have a friend of theirs that’s going through some issue, and it’s just a word of mouth referral. And so, we do get a lot of direct traffic. Actually, I’m glad you brought that up because we do get a lot of people that just are coming directly by typing Spuy Guy into the URL I’ve noticed.

Steve: How did you get your press mentions? Like I know in the beginning, you’ve been on CNBC, Entrepreneur, Forbes, Fast Company. Did you go out and try to get those? Do you have a PR person or did those just kind of fall in your lap?

Allen: So it all started when I got mentioned in Forbes and I’ll tell the story about how I got involved if you like.

Steve: Sure.

Allen: I’m a huge Tim Ferriss fan. So like 4-Hour Workweek was a huge influence on me years ago and one of the resources that he talks about in there is Haro, helpful a reporter out. And basically three times a day I get an email with reporters, bloggers, journalists, whatever you want to call them. They’re looking for sources for their stories. There’s another one that’s out there, it’s called PR Newswire or something like — I can’t remember off the top of my head. Profnet I think is what it’s called. But it’s a very similar service, a little bit higher quality, but it also costs a lot of money.

And so I was using those two services to find people who were asking questions about things that I knew about. It might be digital marketing, it might be entrepreneurship, sometimes they talk about spy related stuff I guess or security related issues. So I try to be as helpful as I can in those emails, so that they can quote me in an article. And one day I open up [Inaudible 00:25:08] and I see a request in there in the business section and it’s like looking for million dollars solopreneurs. And I was like, oh wow, nobody’s going to respond to this because there’s probably not a whole lot of people that are running a business by themselves and doing a million dollars in revenue.

And I noticed that it’s a Forbes next to it. I’m like, I have to respond to this. I have to do the best answer I can in this email so that maybe they’ll reach out for a phone conversation and I can get quoted in Forbes and so it worked essentially.

Steve: I’ve never had any good luck with Haro actually.

Allen: It’s been awful lately, like the last two years I haven’t gotten like anything. Fortunately, that Forbes mention — so this is a little tricky, I made sure to name drop Tim Ferriss a lot and the interview that I do with Forbes so that if you got mentioned in it, then I could like send it to him, and then he’d post it and share it with his audience. And long story short, that worked.

Steve: Clever.

Allen: That Forbes article went live, three days later it hadn’t had any clicks or anything like that. But they made Tim Ferriss like front and center on the article. They had an image of him that’s like the banner image. And so what I did was I set my phone, I installed Twitter on my phone, and I had set up to text me or whatever, whenever Tim Ferriss was posting on Twitter. And this was back when he wasn’t doing the podcast I think, so most of his tweets were authentic and he’s like typing it on there and asking questions of his audience and whatnot.

And so whenever it was an authentic post, I would send a link to the Forbes article saying that it mentioned him. It only took me like two tries, but then he retweeted it to his audience. He sent it out in his five bullet Friday, posted on Facebook, and then all of a sudden it went from like 1,000 views over three days to like 300,000 views in like June period or whatever. And so I think like Inc.com, they spun the article or whatever. So it was just a rehash of the original Forbes article. And then when I do other help a reporter out responses, I like be sure to say, hey look, I was mentioned on CNBC and Forbes, and I’ll link to those articles and stuff. So it gives me credibility with whoever is seeing that response and then they are more confident in featuring me.

Steve: That’s a very good strategy and that apparently works, yeah I can see how that would work.

Allen: Yeah. Another really great resource if you’re looking for PR is Ryan Holiday’s book, Trust me, I’m lying. I found it fascinating. And I’ve actually used a lot of the tactics and strategies that are in there to get press mentions.

Steve: Why don’t you just name one for people who haven’t read the book?

Allen: Oh, okay let me think about it.

Steve: Okay, we can come back to it.

Allen: Okay. Sure.

Steve: All right. So I would also imagine you mentioned earlier that you have businesses that buy from you, right? What is your strategy there on getting these b2b customers?

Allen: I guess it’s b2b, I never really considered it. We do have customers that are business owners, and they’re trying to combat employee theft. We have police departments and private investigators that are purchasing equipment from us. And I don’t really have a strategy there, they just find me. Maybe they’re looking for what I sell, and they’re doing some comparison shopping or whatever. And then they see our website, they see the phone number, and they call and ask us questions and whatnot.

Steve: Okay, so you don’t go through your customer list to see if anyone looks like they could be like a large customer?

Allen: We do. So, whenever we see a customer place an order and it says like private investigator or PI, or investigative services, or whatever, they have their business name and the title, we’ll make a note of it and realize that this is a customer that, okay, these types of customers and this police department, we can probably get multiple orders from them. Whereas with regular customers, they’re pretty much one and done. So, lifetime value for my customer is whatever they place on the first order.

Steve: Right. Yeah, that’s kind of what I was getting at. So just kind of curious what your strategy has been, because a lot of these people are one and done. Do you get a lot of repeat business in general?

Allen: No, not at all.

Steve: Oh, really? Okay.

Allen: It’s brutal. Yeah, if I can do it all over again.

Steve: See, you get a steady flow of customers, obviously. And so they’re just funding you have through search.

Allen: They’re finding us through search primarily, Google Shopping and AdWords. That makes up the majority of the traffic that we’re getting. We’ve played with Facebook, it’s so difficult to target people that need spy equipment. Like there’s no demographic in particular. I’ve looked at all this stuff on Google Analytics, they break it into four different age groups or whatever. And it shows you the percentage of people that are coming to your website and what age group they are in like 25, 25, 25, 25, male, female, slightly more female than male, which is shocking.

Steve: That’s interesting actually. Okay.

Allen: Yeah. So more male visitors, but more females convert. It’s weird. I loved another reason behind that. But there’s no common interest or trade or demographic or whatever you want to call it that a customer would need, a shopper would need to become a customer of ours.

Steve: I’m not sure how I would feel if I saw spy equipment ad in my feed too, like, as we talked about earlier, right? Like if my wife was just browsing my Facebook or using my computer and all of a sudden she saw like hidden camera stuff, she’d probably ask me about it.

Allen: Right. We haven’t had any luck with product ads or anything like that on Facebook, we’ve tried the retargeting thing. It’s just breaking even really. And I’ve had multiple people, not just my account manager, but I’ve had multiple people that do Facebook ads for living, look at my account and be like, oh, yeah, this is really difficult. Okay, I have some ideas for new strategies for Facebook. It just takes up a lot of like we need more ad creative and we need to make use of more videos and more content on our website. And just content production is expensive, it takes a long time. I think that we’re starting to figure out a strategy that might work with Facebook.

Steve: Okay, what is your email strategy? I actually didn’t notice any pop ups and offers when I landed on your site. So, I was just curious.

Allen: Yeah, I don’t have one. So, I mentioned earlier I went and started cheater spy shop, and I was there for like three years. And we did email marketing when we’re there and I know from that experience, we just weren’t making any money on it whatsoever. Why?

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Allen: There’s probably several reasons why, we don’t really get new products. There’s not a whole lot of people that are developing spy equipment at all. So, it’s largely the same stuff that’s been selling for a long amount of time and customers are not repeat purchasers. So, if they order something on the website, we get the email and we try to hit them up for more sales, it’s pretty much a no go there. I do think that we — I know for a fact we can make email a lot better than it currently is because we’re only sending a couple emails a year like Cyber Monday, Black Friday, we do a little bit of Valentine’s Day related stuff.

Steve: Valentine’s Day, hilarious. Okay.

Allen: Yeah. Well, so here’s how it goes is that if somebody is like having an affair or whatever, they’re going to have to celebrate Valentine’s Day twice, so one with their spouse and then the second person is on the side, and so they usually do that like on February 13 or whatever. And so what we’ll do an email series in the lead up to Valentine’s Day to be like, hey, this is a perfect time to catch an affair if you’ve been suspecting.

Steve: That’s too funny.

Allen: Yeah. But you’re right, I don’t have a pop up on the website, been looking around. I heard you’re Privy thing on the podcast recently, so I’m taking a look at it because I do know that we have a lot of customers that are people visiting our website that don’t buy the first time that they visit or the second time that they visit, and we really do need to be emailing them. It’s something that has been on my radar and I just haven’t gotten around to it for several reasons I guess.

Steve: I actually went ahead and did a bunch of shopping before this. I just looked around and I can say that I think what’s very attractive at your store and it’s probably why it’s so successful is the fact that you curate the products and then you explain them and you provide tech support, which is something that you’re not going to get at all on Amazon and these other sites. They are kind of sketchy too. And the fact that you’re willing to put your face in a video also really adds a lot to the credibility of the site.

Allen: Yeah. So I’ll tackle the last one first. Here is the thing, I hate being on camera, I’m just always hated it. I feel like, I look goofy. And more importantly, I just didn’t want to be associated with spy equipment at all. I was really hesitant to put my face on the website, because I don’t want this to be what I’m known for. This is just [overlapping 00:34:27] right. I’d rather be, I’d be happy to put my face on something if I was like, really super, if this was a product or industry where it’s very shareable. Right? Nobody is sharing spy stuff on Facebook and Instagram and whatnot. If I could be in a different industry, like selling music equipment, or if I were like a really hot model and I was selling like, bikinis or whatever, I’d be happy to put my face out there. But I didn’t grow up wanting to be associated with spy gear or anything like that.

And so for the first like two years that I did my company, my face wasn’t anywhere on there because I didn’t want people know that this is what I was doing. But I’ve just learned to embrace the fact that I’m in a really weird industry with a lot of people that are genuine and need help, and nobody out there is filling that need. And so I kind of put myself out there, I was like, hey, look, I’m the guy that you can trust. I have everything in stock. I’m not drop shipping everything, you can actually call us and ask questions and we’re happy to help you out. And that was radically different than what everybody else was offering when I hit the scene.

Steve: I think that works really well. Like as I was shopping, the video that you put out, it just looks — it was, the lighting and everything was great, but it was just very authentic. I think that’s the right word. And it made me want to trust you because you’re not like the sleazy guy trying to hawk spy equipment.

Allen: Right. Yeah, I don’t. I don’t think of myself as sleazy. I’m just trying to be an honest guy matching a product to a customer that really needs it, because some of these customers are going through like really frustrating situations. And not to bring the mood down or anything like that, but they might have a parent that’s in an Alzheimer home and they think they’re getting abused. So they want a hidden camera. Or maybe they have a kid who’s autistic and they think that something is going on and they’ll like put a recorder in the backpack and then find out that the teacher is like verbally harassing this kid, or they’re being harassed like a woman might be harassed at work, and she needs to prove it.

And so, they’re going through these situations, they’re going through divorces, it’s all really sad. And a lot of times, they they call us and they want to unload on us because it’s so frustrating for them. Unfortunately, we’re not licensed therapists or anything like that. And so we listen to their story, we try to match them with the best product that will help get rid of that issue that’s causing them some sort of emotional or financial distress. And so, by putting ourselves out there is like, hey look, we’re here to help you out. We’re not just trying to make a quick buck selling a crappy product, we really only sell the best stuff. I think you’re right. I think it does shine through.

Steve: I think so for sure especially among the stores that I was looking at comparing them to yours, actually.

Allen: Yeah. And one more thing I’ll mention about it is that we get so many people that call here and like straight up asked for me, or like maybe I’ll have an employee that’s sick or maybe I’m at the office and my employee’s phone rings for a sales call. And I’m like, hey, you know what, I want to take that call. I just kind of want to keep my finger on the pulse of the business. And so I’ll do the sales call. And I’ll say, hey, my name is Allen, thanks for calling. How can I help? And they’ll be like, oh, you’re the guy in the video because they recognize my voice.

Steve: Oh, yeah. Right.

Allen: Right in the video. And I’m like, yeah, and they’re like, oh, that’s awesome. Why am I talking to you? And I’m like, well, I own the business and sometimes I answer the phones just to find out what’s going on and talk to customers because I like it. And so they like that and then I’ll take an order over the phone.

Steve: Nice. So I know recently you’ve done some adjustments to your website, you did a redesign, I want to ask you, what are some of the key takeaways that you had from just kind of changing things around this past year? Like what are some of the mistakes that you tried to address, and and what did you try to emphasize about your store?

Allen: Yeah, so when I started my website like four and a half years ago, I used a default Shopify theme. The guys over at out of the sandbox, they are a development company that specializes in Shopify themes, they make really good themes. And so, I went ahead and bought one for like 150 bucks at the time I think that was good enough, and then I got into an argument on Reddit with some guy about logos and how they didn’t really matter all this other stuff. And I ended up hiring him to design a logo for me, it’s kind of funny.

Steve: It’s hilarious okay.

Allen: So, we made the website, it was very scrappy. I got the whole company started including like forming the LLC and all the legal stuff for under a grand. And so it was very bootstrapped effort. And we had the same website largely for like the next three and a half years where I just didn’t change anything at all. And then it finally got to the point where I was going to conferences, I was meeting people like you, I was meeting a lot of people who took a lot of pride in their businesses whereas when I looked at my business at the time, I was like, I could be doing a lot better, I could have a much better website and plus it’s how I make like 100% of my income. I really need to up the design of the website.

And so I had found somebody that was I thought did amazing work designing websites, I found another person that I thought did amazing work with branding, and so I worked with those two people to come up with the website that I have now. I kind of have a funny story your listeners might enjoy. I had the logo when I started this back in 2014, and it was just like this sketchy looking detective logo or whatever. It was a guy in a fedora. And a year later, I noticed that an extremely similar logo was being used for the Google incognito like the Google Chrome.

Steve: Yeah, incognito mode. Yeah.

Allen: Yeah. So they’ve had three different incognito logos since they launched Chrome. And the first one was like a dude in a trench coat. It looked really super scary looking. And then after my website was live for like a year, they changed the logo and it looks almost exactly like the logo that I had created a year prior. And then they modified it again like a couple of years later, and then it was even closer to my logo. And so I had a lot of customers that were like you just stole the Google incognito logo and put it on your website. And I’m like, no, I swear I was first. And it got to the point where I was like I got the sketchy looking detective dude as my logo. My color scheme is black and white. I could probably redo this to make it a little bit more trustworthy. And so that’s why I went through the whole brand redesign process.

Steve: Like your numbers were fine at the time, right before you did the design.

Allen: Oh, yeah, they were great. We were really hesitant to change anything at all. Again, like, for the first several years of the business, I was just interested in running a four hour workweek style business that was very hands off, and I achieved that goal. But eventually I was like, you know what, I really want to scale this thing to be bigger than it was before. I want to be proud of my website and my brand. I’ve got my face on this whole thing, it should really be the best thing that it can be. It’s time to put some money into this website.

And my marketing guy was very — he was like, dude, I don’t know, this is working really well. You don’t want to suddenly have a huge drop in sales. We know this thing converts. And so, I was like, yeah, we can always go back to it. It was an experiment, I learned a lot and I’m glad we did it.

Steve: What were some of your key takeaways from the whole experience?

Allen: Key takeaways. I would not work with two people again. When you’re small e-commerce business like I am, you should not have a whole bunch of projects going on at once, because everything moves slower. It becomes very difficult moving from one task to another. So I was looking at manufacturing my own products. I was looking at redoing the website, I was looking at filming new videos, I was looking at all sorts of different aspects of my business and putting on different hats and stuff was very frustrating.

So going back, I would have just made the new website like my only priority for like the next six months because it was very intensive. It was hard to go between all of these different projects, it’s just too much of your brain ram being taken up. And then also working with two different people that were not communicating with each other was so difficult.

Steve: Who were these two people? You had a designer and someone else or?

Allen: Yeah, so I had a branding expert, whatever you want to call it. And she was coming up with the art style for my website and the color scheme and the branding voice and the logo, of course, and all of this other stuff. And she was also really good at — she’s very conversion focused when it comes to like designing websites. The problem was that she didn’t do Shopify stores at all. So, she would come up with like have the wire framing of [Inaudible 00:43:43] like down to the pixel. But then I had to move all of that stuff over to a Shopify developer who’s very good at what they do, but the two of them were not communicating with each other in the process. Like I just couldn’t make that happen for whatever reason. And so I had to act like a middleman like…

Steve: Oh I see.

Allen: Yeah it was very frustrating.

Steve: Well, all that’s behind you. So Allen, looking forward, what are some of your plans and hopefully people don’t need spy equipment but where can they find you online if they need something, and will they get you on the phone actually if they do call?

Allen: Yeah, sometimes they’ll get me on the phone. The website is SpuyGuy.com. It used to be Spy Guy Security but I bought SpyGuy.com about a year ago which is like a whole another interesting story about negotiating a domain and stuff.

Steve: [Overlapping 00:44:40] what was your rationale for doing that if you already had Spuy Guy Security for so long?

Allen: Spuy Guy Security, I think it’s like 14 letter domain or whatever. Spyguy.com, it’s just six. It sounds like a Silicon Valley startup. Like it’s just very straightforward. It rhymes. It’s catchy, it’s memorable. We have a logo to go along with it. So it’s very memorable. Spy Guy Security is a lot more, I don’t know. It sounds more professional I guess you could say. But I think that the succinctness of SpyGuy.com, it’s kind of like an intangible thing I guess you could say. It’s very, yeah, I don’t know, I haven’t been thinking a lot of that.

Steve: Fair enough, man. All right, so SpyGuy.com. And if you need spy equipment, feel free to hit him up. And yeah, if you guys can’t tell from this interview, Allen is a very genuine guy. He just tells it like how it is, and he’ll help you out. So Allen, thanks a lot for coming on the show, man.

Allen: Yeah. Thanks for having me. It’s been fun.

Steve: All right, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Now, what I like about Allen is that he’s just a regular dude, and he’s a complete open book. And it’s always refreshing to hear a realistic account of all the ups and downs of entrepreneurship. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode242.

And once again, I want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop-ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. If you want to give it a try, it is free. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post-purchase flow, a win-back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on autopilot. Right now they have this cool docu series called Beyond Black Friday that I highly recommend that you check out and that can be found over at Klaviyo.com/beyondbf, once again that’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.com/beyondbf.

Now I talk about how I use both of these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own e-commerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.Mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

241: How My Blog Performed In 2018 – Year End Review

Year End Review - How My Blog Performed In 2018

My wife just closed the books for 2018 and in this episode, I’m going to do a year end review for MyWifeQuitHerJob.com including all of the projects that I’m currently working on.

What You’ll Learn

  • How to do a site audit for SEO
  • Where I’m speaking at in 2019
  • What’s new for 2019
  • My key takeaway for 2018

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

GoBrandWin.com – The fastest and most effective way to grow your email list for free using group giveaways. Click here to signup for free.

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

TBD

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

240: Year End Report – How My Online Store Performed In 2018

240: Year End Report - How My Online Store Performed In 2018

My wife just closed the books for 2018 and in this episode, I’m going to breakdown the highlights and lowlights of the year for BumblebeeLinens.com.

What You’ll Learn

  • How to overcome bumps in the road
  • Amazon versus your own online store
  • What’s worked well this year
  • The one marketing platform that has been a home run

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

GoBrandWin.com – The fastest and most effective way to grow your email list for free using group giveaways. Click here to signup for free.

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

239: Paul Jarvis On Business, Happiness And Running A Company Of One

239: Paul Jarvis On Business, Happiness And Running A Company Of One

Today I’m thrilled to have Paul Jarvis on the show. Paul is an author, designer, podcaster, course and software creator. His works have been talked about by Ashton Kutcher and Ariana Huffington. He’s worked with clients like Danielle Laporte, Microsoft, Marie Forleo and Mercedes.

Now Paul is obviously a total stud. But the reason this interview is special to me is because his latest book “Company of One” has had a profound effect on me.

I rarely gush about business books but because Company Of One spoke directly to me and my philosophies, I’m going to recommend it to everyone I meet from now on. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • What exactly is a company of one?
  • What you should think about if you are already running a successful company
  • Some successful examples of entrepreneurs following the “Company Of One” philosophy
  • How to strike a balance between business and life

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

GoBrandWin.com – The fastest and most effective way to grow your email list for free using group giveaways. Click here to signup for free.

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and dig deep into what strategies they used to grow their businesses. Now today I have my friend Paul Jarvis on the show. And Paul’s an author, designer podcaster, who has worked with famous clients like Danielle Laporte, Microsoft, Marie Forleo and Mercedes Benz. Now, Paul is a stud, but none of that stuff matters today because we’re going to talk about business, happiness, and satisfaction today. And just giving you guys a heads up, this interview really spoke to me unlike any other.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Privy who is a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. Right now I’m using Privy to display a cool Wheel of Fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prizes in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this and when I implemented this form email signups increased by 131%. And just recently, I added Facebook Messenger into the mix as well which you can read about on my blog.

Now you can also use Privy to reduce cart abandonment with cart saver pop ups and abandoned email sequences as well at one super low price that is much cheaper than using a full blown email marketing solution. So bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers and recover lost sales. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ For 15% off. Once again that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to give a shout out to Klaviyo who is also a sponsor of the show. Always blessed to have them as a sponsor because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my e-commerce store, and I depend on them for over 30% of my revenues. Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here is why it is so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought. So let’s say I want to send out an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special auto-responder sequence to my customers depending on what they bought, piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email sent. Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you could try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O. Once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: And then we’ll be silent for five seconds and then I’ll just give you a quick intro and then we’ll see where the interview goes.

Paul: Perfect.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Paul Jarvis on the show. Now Paul is someone who my buddy Sol Orwell introduced to me completely out of the blue. And to be quite honest, I was actually thinking about brushing off the intro at first, but since Sol is a good friend, I took the intro and I’m so glad that I did because I feel like I hit the jackpot. Now before I tell you exactly why, here is a brief bio for Paul. Paul is an author, designer, podcaster, a course, and software creator. His works have been talked about by Ashton Kutcher and Arianna Huffington. He’s worked with clients like Danielle Laporte, Microsoft, Marie Forleo and Mercedes.

Now Paul is obviously a stud in this regard. But I actually interview lots of studs on this podcast. But the reason this interview is special to me is because his latest book Company of One has had a profound effect on me. And in fact, I rarely gush about business books, but because Company of One spoke directly to me and my own philosophies, I’m actually going to recommend it to everyone I meet from now on. And with that, welcome the show Paul, how are you doing today?

Paul: Hey, I’m great. What a great intro, good match.

Steve: Well, the book which I just finished this morning, for the listeners by the way was excellent. If I had more time and I didn’t have two kids, I would have just read it straight through.

Paul: So you’re probably fresher with the content of the book than I am at this point because I finished writing it over a year. Publishing is such a long, long game, right? So I finished writing it so long ago that I’m going to have to reread it again soon just to brush up on it as well.

Steve: Well, I’ll make corrections over the course of the interview. Well, that’s funny; I would imagine you have to read it like 100 times, right, when you’re publishing a book or?

Paul: Oh, yeah, so that’s the thing I had to, obviously it takes a while to write. But I have to go over it quite a few times with the copy editor, the editor, and then the copy editor. And then when I record the audio version of the book I’m going to get very familiar with it again, but there is actually quite a gap because the book is finished and goes to print for limited run for advanced copies, like the one you got probably about eight months before it comes out. So there’s a gap where I don’t have to do any reading of the book again, and we’re kind of in that gap right now.

Steve: Well, it’s fresh in my mind. And Paul, just for the benefit of the listeners who don’t know who you are, looking over your history, you’ve done a lot of different things. So can you kind of give my audience an overview of your background and what kind of led you to this point in life?

Paul: Sure. So I guess the main things that I do are design and writing. So I started designing in the 90s, I’ve actually worked for myself, or almost went for — it’ll be 20 years in this coming February.

Steve: Wow.

Paul: It seems like a long time.

Steve: It does yeah.

Paul: So one I feel so old, but two, that’s like a really long time. So in the beginning, I was doing web design for clients, a lot of like fortune 100 companies. For a while, I was doing a lot of pro athletes’ websites like Shaquille O’Neal. He’s just random, doing a bunch of proactive websites for people in like the NFL, NBA, NHL, that sort of thing. And then I kind of moved from that because that wasn’t very interesting, and working with agents of athletes, oh no isn’t great. But I decided, hey, this internet thing is pretty cool. I’ve been doing websites for a while. There’s these people who are making money on the internet making businesses on their own. And so I kind of gravitated towards working with online entrepreneurs like Marie Forleo, Daniela Port, Chris Carr, those sorts of people, and they’re really smart.

And so I started designing websites for them. I was learning a lot about business. And then probably about six, five, six years ago, I decided to create my first products. And they were books. And from there, I’ve now sell a bunch of software products, a bunch of courses, a bunch of podcasts, I don’t actually do any client work anymore for design. All the product stuff has taken up all of my time. It does well for me financially, it gives me the space, and like today, I spent the entire day bike riding. I’m glad this call is at 5 pm tonight as it was a nice day outside. I was just biking with my wife in the woods for the entire day.

Steve: Nice.

Paul: Got fun. So yeah, I guess it’s kind of — I think that’s kind of where I’m at from start to finish.

Steve: Yeah. So Paul, before we move on, I kind of want to set the stage about the topic of today’s podcast by kind of telling a personal story before we talk about Company of One.

Paul: Great.

Steve: Now, you don’t know this about me. But for the past decade, I’ve been super focused on growing my two main businesses, which is Bumblebee Linens, and My Wife Quit Her Job like pedal the metal growth, right? And business has been good. And today I run two legit seven figure businesses. But here’s what hit me like a ton of bricks last year, growing these businesses further has not equivalently furthered my happiness and my wife and I don’t spend nearly as much money as we actually make. But even still, every year, we set a new arbitrary goal and then try to meet it and it’s getting really stressful. Every new product launch, every new sales channel that you want to add, it just adds to the stress.

And man over the holiday season since we run an e-commerce store, when the customers are coming in, it’s a mad rush to orders and it’s just not as fun anymore. And the money is good but it’s just not always a comfortable situation. But my wife and I made a pact last year to artificially limit our growth to a certain percentage. And we’ve actually been much happier since the pressure is gone and we’re just kind of enjoying just running the business more now. And here’s the thing though, I hang out with a lot of successful entrepreneurs. And I would say 90% of them are just so growth focused that I almost feel like an outlier now. And I felt that way actually, until I picked up your book this past week. So with that long winded tale Paul, what is Company of One?

Paul: Yeah, so many good things in there. I also don’t spend nearly as much as I make. And in the beginning in my 20s, I was like, I want to make a million dollars a year at whatever cost. And so I started to work on that. And after a couple, only like a few months, I was like, this is like, I’m making great money, but I’m also working like 16, 18 hour days, I have no weekends. It was just — I realized like why do I want this? And I couldn’t — like honestly, there wasn’t a good reason. So I was like, okay, how about I just work towards making enough money. So I put some money away, I can cover all of my costs. And that’s kind of — so Company of One is really just the idea that it’s okay if we question growth, because there’s no other, I don’t know of any other business books, or podcasts or blogs that say that growth isn’t always the best thing ever, right?

Steve: Yeah totally.

Paul: Everything is always like growth hacking and 10xing. And it’s like, but why? I feel like I’m the weird guy in the back of the room, putting up my hand like asking, but why, why, why? Why do we need this? And what I found through writing the book and interviewing dozens and dozens of people, poring through really, really boring research papers and business studies, is that the business doesn’t match up with logic always. Obviously, sometimes growth is bad. And I’m not even against growth in business. I’m just about questioning at first, does this make sense? Is this going to make my business better or worse? Is this going to make my happiness better or worse? Is this going to make my revenue better or worse, because sometimes more revenue doesn’t equal more profits, right?

Sometimes you end up spending more than you’re making, even when you’re making more. And there was a study done by I think it was a Copan Group and Inc Magazine, where they looked at like the Inc 5,000 list, the list that everybody’s like, oh, this is the best list ever. And the study found that, I think it was like five to seven years after, they looked at the 5,000 companies five to eight years later. And most of them had gone out of business for reasons not because of any other reason, other than the fact that they grew too fast, they took on too much investment that they couldn’t pay their investors back, they hired too many people, and they couldn’t keep that growth rate going. Because the problem with growth is that you always want more.

So if you’re making 5% more this month versus last month, you want to do 6% the next month or 7% and eventually gets to a place where it’s ridiculous. It just does not make sense. So that’s kind of where the book — the book, I think, is really an examination of what if we don’t look to growth for the answer? What if we look to better for the answer, because bigger isn’t always better, but better is always better, I think.

Steve: Can we kind of talk about your own personal views of happiness. You said a couple things there, like how do you know how much is enough? And then what is your own personal definition of happiness? Like, how do you look at your work?

Paul: So enough for me is covering my basis like for my family, for that kind of thing. It’s funny, there’s a study that a bunch of bloggers are talking about right now, that figured out the exact income where making more money doesn’t make you more happy. And I was like, that’s how much I pay myself a year. I was like, I’m right.

Steve: What is that amount by the way, do you know?

Paul: 75.

Steve: Oh 75, okay, yeah, right.

Paul: So I pay myself that and I my pay my wife as well. And so technically, our income is more than that. But individually, it’s exactly where we’re right on the money for that. And the study found that making, say you made 50,000, you’re happier if you make 75. But if you make 100, you’re no more happier and sometimes less happier than if you make 75 versus 100. And I’ve kind of the same like my business makes more than I need. I live a pretty minimal life. I still do a lot of fun things. But it’s like I don’t need that many things to be happy, especially the things that make me the happiest aren’t things that cost a lot of money like going for a bike ride today, it doesn’t really — like our bikes, mountain bikes are kind of expensive, but you buy those once and you maintain them and they’re good for quite a while.

So for me, figuring out what enough is is more important than figuring out how to grow bigger and bigger, like month over month, year over year and I can’t remember what the second part of the question was.

Steve: Yeah, I know. And just to like, for a long time I thought I was alone in this regard. Do you happen to know any popular entrepreneurs that are actually following this philosophy other than like you and me?

Paul: Yeah. So Sean D’Souza on Psychotactics.com, you actually mentioned that putting a limit on growth, he does this; he doesn’t want to make more than 5,000 dollars a year. So he limits that. So he has like a certain number of spots open up in his courses, or he takes on a certain number of clients. So he doesn’t make more than that, because he’s found if he makes more than that, he has to work more than that. And then he’s not as happy, he can’t, I think he helps tutor his two nieces, and that sort of thing. So like, he likes his life the way that it is. And if he makes more than that, it doesn’t make any sense. And that’s business revenue not per — I don’t know how much he pays himself, but for his business making 500k a year is enough. And that’s the limit that he sets on it.

There’s — oh man, in the book there’s tons of examples as well. [Inaudible 00:14:42] is an illustrator. And he would rather find good paying clients than all of the clients because he wants to sit — he lives in California, like you. And he wants to sit in his studio in his backpack yard and draw, and his two daughters come and they draw as well with their dad in the afternoons after school. And it sounds kind of like an idyllic life to me.

Steve: It does. I mean, but it’s so hard, though. And so the next topic I kind of want to ask you about is, let’s say you are kind of running a successful company, it’s growing, it’s doing great, how do you come to this conclusion whether growth is beneficial or not? What are some questions that you should ask yourself?

Paul: Yeah, I think I come at it very much from a nerdy perspective. My background is like web and software. So I always try to think of, for anything concerning growth, I try to think of what the maintenance costs are. And what I mean by that is — and this relates to everything, not just software. But I’ll start with software then relate it to everything. So for software, if you add a new feature, that could be great, it could be something that all your users are asking for. But it could mean that now you have to charge more, because it costs that much development time to build it. It could mean you need to hire more support staff, because this feature that everybody said they wanted is a feature that requires a lot more support, because some users may not get it.

So, I always try to think of the maintenance costs of that. And that’s actually why I sell the products that I sell, because they require — like writing a book has no tech support. So, I don’t have to do a whole lot other than the marketing and the promotion and I like that kind of stuff anyways, but the book can exist as a product that’s making me money every single month that I don’t have to do — like it’s not taking me eight hours a day to maintain, right?

Steve: Paul by the way, how do you make money? I actually don’t even know.

Paul: So number one is courses. I sell three courses right now. Number two is probably books like advances from publishers. Number three is probably software and then podcasting. Those are the main ones.

Steve: Okay. And then for your courses, is there some amount of support involved with those?

Paul: Yes and no. So the way that I look at courses, so I approach courses like satisfy everything relates to software for me. But I approach courses like software. So I’ll release a very small alpha version to just a few of like the people in my audience who would just buy everything from me. So I’ll give a few people access. And I want to see with their access, where they have questions, especially in on-boarding. So when somebody buys the course, what happens next and what questions do they have? And so whenever I’m building a course, I always try to look at how I can pre answer questions that people might have, but won’t have once I answer them.

So I’ll do things like introduction videos, and all the introduction video will be is talking about all the things that the alpha users, the beta users, or the first people in the first run of the course had questions about. So every time I get a support request or a question for a course I note it. And then when I start to see patterns in that, I’ll make a video or I’ll make a blog post, or I’ll record some audio for it. So I try to answer things in volume. Same with software, I make videos for all the software products that I have for support, because I want people to be able to get the answers they need without having to talk to me. And then if they do have to talk to me, I’m like, okay, good. This is a new question. I can note this in my spreadsheet. And if I start to notice a pattern, I can make a video or a blog post or something like that for it.

And then the only other thing for my courses is there’s a slack group for each of them. And that really, it’s like 10, 15 minutes a day. I like the P — I really liked my audience. So I like the people in my courses. And so I really like interacting with them. And so that really doesn’t take up a whole lot of time, like I’ll login about 10, 15 minutes every other day or so, maybe sometimes every day but it’s not a whole lot of work.

Steve: So what is your formula, then? Your own personal formula, I guess, since everyone’s going to be different for this threshold of support, and how to fix your happiness?

Paul: Yeah, so I always look at what I’ve currently got on the go, because I do have a lot on the go of like three courses, a bunch of podcasts, a bunch of software, books. And so I look at, well, how much time do I want to spend working in a day and it’s usually no more than six hours because I don’t feel I’m productive past that. But I also feel like there’s so many other things in my life that I like doing that I wouldn’t have time for those things if I had to work, like if I was in my 20s when I was working like 16 hours, just ridiculous hours. I didn’t have time to go to the gym, or go out or do yoga, or like make fancy meals. And so I look at what space do I have to add, and I look at is there anything not working that I can remove?

So I like to do this even with like household items. So if my wife or I want to buy something, we’re like, okay, we’re bringing something into the house, maybe there’s something that we can get rid of in the house so we don’t end up with a house full of stuff. So I kind of look at my business the same way where it’s like, okay, if I really want to make this piece of software, what’s it going to cost in terms of maintenance time? But is this even going to fit because I don’t think a lot of people think about that, like they have — a lot of entrepreneurs have lots of great ideas are always wanting to make new things or different things, but they don’t think about how much time it’s going to take to do those things. And everybody is like, oh, I can get stuff done really fast.

And everything takes longer than you think it does. And we’re all awful at multitasking. So I always try to figure out like, okay, what the balance is, because I think there is a balance. And it’s hard sometimes to find that balance.

Steve: So it sounds like you want to work six hours per day. And then you just kind of do some rough calculation to see if you can take on something and if you can’t, you’ll throw away something perhaps.

Paul: Yes.

Steve: Right okay.

Paul: And that’s why I’ve sunseted a bunch of software products, probably about four courses. And I’ve just taken them and some of them could have been making some money. I was selling WordPress themes for a while that were making decent money but they required so much support that I couldn’t do anything else. So I got rid of them because it wasn’t worth it to me. There’s other things that I can do that could make the same amount of money with less work and maintenance on my end.

Steve: Interesting. So that means you must be pretty good at time management because I always have problems too like whenever I start a project, I’m really poor at estimating how much time it’s going to take me.

Paul: Yeah, it’s tough. Especially I think the pedigree that I have of doing client work was really, really helpful because the reason that I got hired, like when I was hired by Microsoft or Mercedes Benz, they weren’t hiring an agency that I owned or worked at, they were just hiring Paul Jarvis to do just design work. And so, the way that I could get clients like that was to always be 100% accurate with my time management skills. So if I said, I need to get this thing done for you in two weeks, you would have it in two weeks, no questions asked. I would not ever miss a deadline. And that’s how I built such a name for myself in the client work design world that kind of carried over to products where I figured like, okay, in my mind, I’m the client, I can’t let my client down even though the client is me.

And so I’d be like, okay, I have to get this thing done in this amount of time. I know approximately how long things take. And typically I padded because life always gets in the way of productivity, or especially like whenever you’re in the flow, something will happen. So if I know writing a piece of software is going to take writing like a feature of software is going to take me eight hours, I don’t put an eight hour chunk in my calendar. I’m like, okay, it’s probably going to be about 16. So eight hours of actual work. And then another eight hours of interruptions or phone calls, or maybe the power goes out, or maybe my pet needs to go to the vet or something like that. So I always kind of double the actual time I think it’s going to take because it always works out for some reason that bring in is always the actual amount of time it takes.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Ahrefs for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I’m a huge fan of their tool and in my opinion Ahrefs is the best all in one SEO tool out there to rank in Google search. And recently, I completed a search engine site audit for Mywifequitherjob.com and Bumblebeelinens.com and Ahrefs was indispensable. For example, I used Ahrefs to do a deep dive into all my posts to find the highest volume, lowest competition keywords to target in search. And in fact, recently, I used Ahrefs to rank a blog post in Google from position 20 to position five for a big time keyword in the span of just one month by switching around my title and H1 tags.

I also use Ahrefs to spy my competitors’ sites to see what keywords they are ranking for, and then I write a more comprehensive post and eventually outrank them in search. Now those of you who know me know that I hate spending money on tools, but I actually pay for Ahrefs and that should say something in itself. Right now, I’m giving away nine three month Ahrefs memberships for free. To sign up, head on over to Mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway, once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway to win a three month Ahrefs membership. Now back to the show.

So Paul, like one of the tenets of your book that I could really relate to, was paying more attention to your existing customers, as opposed to putting all of your research on new customers. And just a quick aside here, like with my store, I found that B2B customers were converting a lot higher meaning like, once you got one of them, they ended up purchasing on a regular basis. Whereas I was spending all sorts of money on ads to get these new customers and oftentimes, these new customers were just like single purchases and done. And so, can you just talk about some examples, maybe whether with some of the people that you talked about in your book, or for yourself, where actually paying more attention to your existing customers actually paid off?

Paul: Yeah, so the first thing is that it it’s more expensive to acquire new customers than to work at building more business with existing customers. And there was a study done, it was like five to eight times more for acquisition versus retention, which is mind boggling. And that was for big business and I mean for a business like mine where it is like literally just me at my home office, it’s just like I really enjoy talking to the people in my audience. And I don’t think a lot of people realize that you can kind of build the audience that you want to have, you’re not stuck with the audience you get. You can actively work at building a cool, interesting audience.

Steve: Give me some examples of how you do that.

Paul: So trying to trying to write for writers specifically, so trying to write in a way that’s going to resonate with a certain type of person, as opposed to trying to write in a way that appeals to everybody. So like, I swear in my writing, and I know that put certain people off and I know that the people that it puts off are the type of people who get angry at the products that I sell anyways, so it’s I swear naturally, so there’s swearing in my writing sometimes, not all the time, not a potty mouth, but like just things like that, or telling stories about my pet rats as business parables.

And some people are like, that’s so weird. Or the welcome email to my newsletter, the Sunday dispatches talks about how I was so excited that — a spoiler alert if anybody signs up for it now. But it talks about how I’m so excited that you signed up for my list, I went out, and I got your name tattooed on my inner left arm. And every time I raise my arm, I’ll think about the day that you sign up for my list. Some people hate tattoos, which is fine, but like I’m tattooed from my neck to my toes. So this is kind of on brand for me. But it’s fine that I put off certain people because it draws the people that are actually going to buy from me or stay customers a lot better.

I show people who I actually am as often as possible, which is very, very scary to do. But it also helps because the person that I am in the three things that I do like the podcast, or the writing of the newsletters, that’s the person who’s in the paid products, like even in my software products, there’s some silly jokes in the micro copy or in the videos. So I think that it’s okay to do that to really hone in on the audience that you want. Because like I think the last time I checked, more than half the people who bought one thing from me have bought more than one thing from me.

So like, I really like to have lifetime customers who buy all of the things because I think that builds kind of a relationship. And like these people, I know these people by name, because they email me, I see them when I get a Stripe receipt, or a PayPal receipt, and I talk to them on Slack. So I get to know them. And the more I get to know my customers, the more I can figure out what they need, what they need help with, what they value, and then I can make better products that are focused for that type of person. And then for them, it’s just like I don’t even need to read the sales page. I’m just clicking buy. And that’s a good position to be in for both myself and for them, because they’re getting things basically custom tailored to them.

Steve: So how do you balance I guess this more personal behavior with the need to reach out to colder customers? Like, let’s say you’re giving advice to a business that’s deciding whether to scale or focus more on their existing customers, how do you strike that balance?

Paul: Yeah, I mean, I would probably look at the data to see how — so I talked to somebody in Company of One. And she was working at a magazine and magazines are very much subscription based, right. And they were trying to figure out how to get more subscribers because they needed to increase their revenue. And not a single person in the company was thinking about how we can reduce the churn from existing people canceling their monthly subscription. And it’s like you already have this pool of people, if you decrease your churn rate by a certain percentage, it’s the same as increasing your profit by a certain percentage.

But it’s easier because those people bought the magazine because they liked something about it. So maybe you talk to them and find out what they like, or what’s no longer resonating with them because they’ve already given you money, they’ve already shown that something about your business or your product is valuable enough for them to open up their wallets to you. It just seems easier to me in a lot of cases, not all the time. But in a lot of cases, to look at the existing customers, because they’re the ones who’ve already found — they’re the ones who are already paying attention. They’re the ones who are already coming to dinner at your business, basically.

Steve: I mean, in your book, you talk a lot about doing things that don’t quite scale for your existing customers. And can you just kind of provide some examples of how you’ve done that to kind of make your existing customers true fans of your product?

Paul: Yeah, so the best example of that is for a book I wrote probably about four years ago. I was trying to figure out what specifically to write about. So I sent an email to my mailing list, which was probably around, I don’t know, 10 to 15,000 people at the time. And I was like, hey, I want to get to know you. I want to get to know what you’re working on, what you’re struggling with. Let’s hop on a Skype call for 10 minutes. And I put a link to like my calendar or my booking thingy. And I think I got like 40 or 50 people book calls with me and I was like, okay, I should probably turn this off now. That’s a lot. But so I spent a couple of weeks talking to subscribers just about themselves, their business, that sort of thing.

And in the beginning, I was floundering with like, okay, what do I want to write about, what should the next book be about? And I was like, oh, maybe it should be this, maybe it should be that. And then after I’d spoken to dozens of people on my mailing list, I was like, it’s absolutely clear, based on the patterns in what people are talking about, I know exactly what my audience is struggling with now. And you can’t — it’s really hard to scale like actual conversations on the phone. But it’s really, really useful. I can give one more example too. It’s is not me but it’s my friends who started another company called Crew. They are a freelance matchmaker service.

So companies are like, I want to hire a designer developer, and they would go to Crew, and there’s already a vetted pool of designers and developers. They had a MailChimp mailing list in a spreadsheet to start, and they were like manually looking through it. And it wasn’t until they had a decent amount of revenue, that they actually built the software to run it. But they started out with a mailing list in a spreadsheet, and they grew it into — they sold for millions of dollars last year.

So things can start without — I think people are so obsessed with scale that you can go back to doing things that don’t scale. And it actually works fine. And a lot of times, you can do things that don’t scale until you can no longer do them. And then it might make sense to scale, or it might make sense to automate at that point. But in the beginning, I think getting to know your customers on a personal level is more important than having like a 36 email sequence if you’re just starting out, right. Maybe just get to know people and their businesses, then make this crazy automation sequence with segments and funnels and automation and all of that so yeah.

Steve: That’s actually a good segue. Like, let’s say, I’m working a full time job right now and I want to start something, how do you go about starting a company of one? Like, what’s some advice that you have, like, should I quit my job right away and go full bore? Like, what’s your advice there?

Paul: Yeah, I probably wouldn’t do that.

Steve: Neither would I actually.

Paul: Yeah, like, it’s funny, because a lot of people who aren’t entrepreneurs think that entrepreneurs are inherently risky. But then I look at my friends who are entrepreneurs, and I look at myself, and like, I’m so risk averse, it’s not even funny. So I’ve worked for myself since I was a teenager. So it’s really hard. But the way that I can relate to this is that I had a very successful client service business and I wanted to move into products. So products kind of became my side job. But I didn’t want to do products unless they were making as much or more money as the client services. So from day one, I kept the income stream separate. So I had my bucket of how much I was making doing client work, and my bucket of how much I was making doing products. And I started doing it on the evenings and weekends.

Like my first book, which is a vegan cookbook, which I never went any further into that niche or audience but it was a good first start. And I basically tried to start that, and this is really that Company of One model is I tried to start as quickly as I could for as little money as possible, and then doing it in gaps. So at that time, I was like, okay, I’m working at the time; this was after I was doing 16 hour days. So I was only doing like, eight hour days. And I was like, okay, I’m working eight hours, I’m sleeping eight hours. And that’s a non negotiable for me to sleep. So I think that’s important. People who hustle really hard really give up on sleep and I don’t think that’s a wise idea.

And then I was like, okay, so I can block my day in thirds, eight hours of sleep, eight hours of full time job work. And then I have eight hours of other. So obviously, I have some life commitments like things like eating, but I can take that time, maybe I can watch less TV. And for about 10 years, my wife and I didn’t even have a television or Netflix or cable, or anything like that. And we really just worked on those sorts of things. So I started my product business, very small. I traded so many things to get that book done. I spent I think zero dollars to publish that book other than…

Steve: Interesting, you didn’t have an editor or?

Paul: I did, but I traded her for web design work.

Steve: Oh, I see. I worked at a five star restaurant and my plates and bowls are ugly, they just look like normal plates and bowls. So I got all these because it was a cookbook. So it had to have nice food photography. I traded the photographer; she could eat all the food I made if she helped me do the photos. So I did everything for basically zero dollars because I wanted to see what can I do with — and the thing is, creativity thrives on constraints. And a lot of people like if I had all of the money and all the resources in the world, I don’t think I could have created as cool of a cookbook. I mean, it’s not even that great of a book. But if I had all the resources, I don’t know if I would have ended up with a better product.

I think the fact that it was so interesting and weird how I basically created a book and wrote a book that was professional quality for zero dollars actually made it a better book. So I think creativity can thrive on constraints. And I started like I made a decent amount of money with that book. And then I started spending money on my second book. So I actually paid my editor because she already had a website at that point. I couldn’t just trade her again. And then yeah, so I started to reinvest, so I’d only reinvest money in products from money that I already made from products. So in the beginning, I was working a couple hours on it a day, and then a bit more. And then I could scale back my client work, and then scale up my product work until eventually the client work scaled down to zero and the product work to 100.

Steve: You know, one of my favorite quotes in your book, and it wasn’t a quote that you necessarily wrote but it was part of a story was that overhead equals death. And I actually had this philosophy with my businesses that I want to keep it lean. So in case like, revenue goes to zero, I can spend like 50 bucks a month and still maintain it forever, or some really low amount of money and or even like I’m really — so I’m so anti SaaS that if I can write the code in like a week or so, I’ll sit down and write the code so that I don’t have to pay a monthly fee. So that’s as far as I go. I don’t know if that kind of correlates to your book, or the point that you’re trying to make. But that overhead equals death really resonated with me.

Paul: Yeah, that’s definitely one of my favorite stories in the book. And I’m kind of the same way, like I would rather figure out how to run my business on — because I think a lot of people don’t look at the lower number, like the expenses of a business, they only focus on the profit, and that the higher number, the above number in the business. And it’s like, if I can run my business for as little as possible, I don’t need more customers to make more money. I can have the same amount of money coming in, but I can end up with more of it if I just spend less. So I’m the same. I’m relentless with spending money. I’m like it’s funny, nowadays it’s trendy to be a minimalist, but before that, it was just cheap.

Steve: So for me, at least my thought process is like let’s say I wanted to take a month off, I don’t want like all this overhead keeping me up at night. Like, let’s say, I had a whole bunch of employees, I got to pay them no matter what. Or have to pay these SaaS apps, no matter what, whether I’m doing work or not. And so the less I guess monthly recurring expenses I have, the more peace of mind I can have at night when I sleep.

Paul: Exactly. Yeah, it’s exactly the same for me where I don’t want more responsibility than I need in my business. And that’s one of the main reasons why I don’t want to hire employees, because I would feel responsible for them. Like if they have kids in college, I would feel responsible for their salary. And I’m okay with responsibility; I’ve run a business that has endured for two decades. But I don’t want more than I have to have. Because then that feels stressful to me and that impedes on my happiness a little bit more than I want it to.

Steve: This is like a therapy session for me by the way Paul. So the last topic I did want to touch upon was, you talk a lot about relationship wealth and how that’s helped you over the years. Can you talk about what that is exactly?

Paul: Yeah, so social capital is almost like a bank account. If you think about it, kind of like that, where I think a good example is if you go to somebody’s website, and they’re like buy now, like you just clicked on it from Google and there’s just like, buy now, buy now, buy now. And it’s like I want to learn a bit first about this. Like, there’s no capital built, there’s no trust built. And I think that if we take a step back, and we look at, like all of my customers, I would rather have some kind of relationship with, like a long term relationship with where they’re supporting my business, I’m supporting them than just like quick sales, like high retention or high churn kind of thing, where like maybe I’m selling — and I’ve talked to some people who sell like way more courses than I do, but their refund rate is like 30%.

And for me, like, first that would crush my ego. My ego was far too fragile to refund a third of the people who buy anything from me. And I think I can probably count on both my hands how many refunds I’ve had to give in for things that I sell, because I don’t want that to happen because I really try to work hard with my existing audience and pay attention to them. But I think that’s yeah, it’s difficult for sure.

Steve: So, for some reason when I was reading the book, I took your relationship wealth to talk about like the colleagues that you’ve met who have actually helped you along with your business.

Paul: Yeah.

Steve: And you didn’t really go into specifics in the book, actually. But how did those relationships actually help you get to where you are now?

Paul: Yeah, so I’ve kind of been of the mindset that I really like interesting people. Interesting people are interesting; I think that makes perfect sense. And so I would always kind of approach relate like I look at the emails that show up in my — like today, for example, I probably got like five pitches from people I don’t know, deleted every single one of them, I do not care. But I look at the people who connect with me on Twitter, or that sort of thing where they’re just like interesting people doing interesting things, and I just want to talk to them. So the person that I teach one of my courses with, her name is Kaylee Moore, she contacted me about a year and a half ago. And she was a student of one of my courses, creative class at the time.

And she was like, hey, I would love to get together for a virtual coffee with you for 10 minutes to talk about what you’re working on, what I’m working on. I have nothing to sell you. I just think you’re interesting. And let’s have a talk. And I wasn’t sure. Her and I now work together. And she’s my partner in creative class because we got to know each other, we figured, oh, we can both kind of balance each other skill sets out. It makes sense to work together. But in the beginning, there was no — I think a lot of people look at relationships now, especially online relationships, where it’s like, what can I get out of this person? Other people can smell your intentions and can see your intentions even if you think you’re trying to hide them.

So a good example is even the person that connected you and I, Sol Orwell, I think that he is like a master connector. He is like really he knows everybody. But he doesn’t know people. I’ve talked to him on the phone a bunch of times and like, neither of us have a business that could benefit from each other’s businesses. He’s just doing really interesting things, knows interesting people, I probably the same. And so when — he’s on my mailing list as well. And he saw that my Company of One is coming out soon. And he was like, hey, let me know who I can connect you with to like be on their podcast or to interview you or that sort of thing. And I was like, that’s awesome. Like, I didn’t have to ask for that. My first email to Sol wasn’t, hey, I’ve seen that you’ve been on some great podcasts, can you introduce me? He would have deleted that email, right.

So I just look at, like, all of the things that have come in my life and to my business from personal relationships weren’t because I wanted something from the other person. It’s that I like the other person and they like me, because there’s a relationship there. So I think that that’s really important. And then I look at, like, the growth hacker emails I get, which are the exact opposite of that, like, I’m a big fan of your show, I think I’d be a great guest. And like, my show has never had a guest on it in the length of the show. Like, it’s pretty obvious that you’re not a big fan of the show. So it’s just like, just, I don’t know, just get to know people. And people can be really, really interesting. And you don’t have to get something from them. But maybe in the future, if you’ve given a value to them, or you’re just friends with them, then maybe something cool will happen. Maybe it won’t and either way that that’s fine.

Steve: I mean that’s totally been my experience as well. And in fact, my business partner now is someone I met at a conference just kind of randomly.

Paul: Nice.

Steve: And it’s been many years now and it’s been a great relationship.

Paul: Cool.

Steve: But hey, Paul, we’ve been chatting for quite a while. This is actually been quite a good therapy session for me, because for the longest time, I thought I was alone in that just constantly trying to grow, grow, grow, grow, has had really been adding to the stress. And all these goals, for me, at least have been kind of arbitrary, right? Like I want to grow X amount next year, and I don’t spend a lot of money. I don’t buy anything really. I go on a vacation every now and then. But that’s about it. So it just makes life a lot happier when you can just cut back and think about what really makes you happy.

Paul: Yeah, it’s true, like, good question. I find that questioning things in general, like business life, whatever, it’s just a good idea to think like how does this benefit me? Or how would this not benefit me? Instead of just like blindly following like things you read on the internet.

Steve: I mean, the ego is a problem though, right?

Paul: Hundred percent?

Steve: I mean, I belong to this entrepreneurship program as part of Stanford, and everyone in there is they’re running these funded companies. And a bunch of my friends there have had exits, like nine and 10 figure exits. And man, it is really like, I go in there, and I’m selling handkerchiefs or selling courses and it’s just kind of intimidating. I don’t know.

Paul: No, it’s true. And I mean, I was talking to Jason Fried the guy who runs Basecamp, I interviewed him in the book. And he’s like at dinner parties, like you saying that you work at a company that’s like a couple of employees versus saying, like, oh, I work at a company with like 10,000 employees, it doesn’t — but then like, who are you trying to impress? What does it matter? And I mean, even like looking at Basecamp is a ridiculous example, because their profit per employee is way higher than any fortune 100 company. They make so much money comparatively to the number of employees that they have that is actually better than a lot of these massive companies. But just like the dinner party conversation, like, oh what do you do? I work for myself. And people automatically think like, oh, you like you sit in your underwear on the couch?

Steve: Exactly yeah.

Paul: No, dude. Like, I make money but I also have a life that I really enjoy. And I don’t need to hire people to sound good at dinner parties because I wouldn’t want to go to dinner parties where that was the only metric.

Steve: So Paul, where can people find you online? When does your book come out? I think it’ll be out by the time this interview goes out actually, but where can people find it?

Paul: Yeah, so the book is called Company of One. It’s available at every major retailer from Amazon to Target. It’s in or will be in pretty much all bookstores. It comes out on January 15th, but it is available for pre order on October 15th. And then the way that it works is the more books I sell between October 15th and January 15th, the higher it ranks because all sales count on the first day. So if this sounds like a book you want to read, then maybe buy it in that time. If this is coming out after that, then just get it if you like it, but…

Steve: I highly recommend the book. When I was reading it, I was nodding the entire time because it really resonated with me just the whole focus on happiness. I started my businesses originally, so I could spend more time with the kids. And over the years, I had kind of lost track of that. And it was just last year when I was having a rough year that it just kind of all hit me like is all this growth making me happy or not? And then your book basically just reinforced all of that for me.

Paul: I’m glad to hear that. Thank you.

Steve: So Paul thanks a lot for coming on the show. I really appreciate your time.

Paul: Thanks Steve.

Steve: All right, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Now, I really loved Paul’s book and I highly recommend it to all business owners. And the link to the book Company of One will be in the show notes. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode239.

And once again I want to thank Klaviyo for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for e-commerce merchants and you can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post-purchase flow, a win-back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on autopilot. So, head on over to Mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s Mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode because Privy is the email capture provider that I use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. If you want to give it a try, it is free. So head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

Now, I talk about how I use all these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email, and I’ll send you the course right away, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

238: How To Become An Influencer In Your Niche With Selena Soo

238: How To Become A Leader In Your Space With Selena Soo


Today I’m thrilled to have Selena Soo on the show. Some of you have probably heard of her before because Selena is fairly well known in the online business and entrepreneurship space.

In any case, Selena is a publicity and marketing strategist who helps authors and coaches become well known leaders in their space.

She’s worked with a bunch of big names like Farnoosh Torabi, Kimra Luna and she’s helped countless others like Ramit Sethi and Pat Flynn.

In this interview, we’re going to learn exactly what it takes to become an industry leader.

What You’ll Learn

  • Selena’s background story
  • The best way to grow a business and get more exposure
  • How to build lasting business relationships
  • How to approach new people as an introvert
  • How to add value to a celebrity or a big name entrepreneur

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

GoBrandWin.com – The fastest and most effective way to grow your email list for free using group giveaways. Click here to signup for free.

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Intro: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into the strategies they used to grow their businesses. Now today I have my friend Selena Soo on the show, and you’ve probably heard of her already if you follow guys like Remit Sethi, Derek Halpern, Andrew Warner, or Pat Flynn. Now Selena is a publicity and marketing strategist, and today we’re going to be talking about what it takes to become a well known industry leader where customers come to you rather than the other way around.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Always excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store and I depend on them for over 35% of my revenues. Now Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here is why it is so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought. So let’s say I want to send out an email to everyone who’s purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special auto-responder sequence to my customers depending on what they bought, piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every email sent. Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you could try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O. Once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to give a shout out to Privy who is also a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. Now what does Privy do? Well, Privy is an email list growth platform and they manage all of my email capture forms. And I use Privy hand-in-hand with my email marketing provider. Right now I’m using Privy to display a cool wheel of fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prices in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this. And when I implemented this form email signups increased by 131%.

I’m also using their new cart saver pop up feature to recover abandoned carts as well. And bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers, which I then feed to my email provider to close the sale. So head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Selena Soo on the show. Now, some of you have probably heard of her before because Selena is fairly well known in the online business and entrepreneurship space. And we actually both have mutual friends in Remit Sethi, Derek Halpern, Jordan Harbinger, Andrew Warner, and Pat Flynn. Anyways, unlike most podcast guests, I’ve actually never met Selena before and our introduction was through someone who I do not know at all, a man by the name of Ahmet [ph], and apparently Selena and I were chatting before this recording and she doesn’t know him either. So it was really a kind of random introduction.

But she’s actually been someone on my list of people to reach out to and I’m actually very happy that Ahmet did me a favor. In case you do not know her, Selena is a publicity and marketing strategist who helps authors and coaches become well known leaders in their space. She’s worked with a bunch of big names like Farnoosh Torabi, Kimra Luna, and she’s helped countless others Remit and Pat. And in this interview, we’re going to learn exactly what it takes to become an industry leader. And with that, welcome the show Selena, how are you doing today?

Selena: I’m doing so well. Thank you for having me.

Steve: So Selena, given that we are total strangers, how would you describe what you do and what led you down this path?

Selena: Yeah, sure. So I would say my biggest passion is elevating experts and entrepreneurs who are doing amazing work and making sure that the whole world knows about them. And the way that I came to this is in my mid 20s, I had a quarter life crisis and I just felt terrible every single day and I wanted to stop feeling like shit, basically. And I was asking friends, like, what do I do? Where do I go? Do you know anyone who can help me? And I discovered this woman’s life coaching group. And it was really powerful.

And in that group, I got exposed to different thought leaders and authors, people like Marianne Williamson, Louise Hay, Deepak Chopra, and people who were showing you that you could really create your own life that you’re in control of your own thoughts. And that you can overcome all these things that you’re struggling with, whether it’s a career issue, a life purpose issue, or you are in a toxic relationship, or it’s a health issue. And I realized that for myself, and for so many others, we’re not just looking for more information, we’re really looking for inspiration. And I was so inspired by these role models, because these individuals are people that I looked up to, and that they really embodied this message of possibility.

You have mentioned, I think Remit Sethi at one point, and he is someone who was actually a huge role model and support for me in launching my own business. But as I just started discovering these people, and falling in love with their work, and their stories, and even seeing a piece of myself in them, and seeing hope, I was like, I want everyone to know about them because a lot of my peers had no idea who these people were. And I felt like this is the most important thing, personal development, loving your life, being able to pursue your dreams. And so, I really want to help get these people out into the mainstream, and so that more people would know about them.

Steve: Interesting. So was that how you ended up meeting like Remit and Derek for example? Were you promoting their stuff? Okay.

Selena: No, well, that’s an interesting story. So Remit was and still is my favorite blogger. And I would read everything that he wrote. I was such a nerd. Like, there was this one piece that he wrote, and I forwarded it to like 30 friends being like, oh my gosh, this is so amazing. You have to read it. And I think a bunch of people didn’t even respond, like so into his stuff. And one day, I was walking home from my summer internship, I was in graduate school, and I saw him on the street, and I was on the phone with my mom. And I was like, I got to go mom. And he was outside his apartment building. He was looking like, I don’t think he – maybe he had his glasses on, I think he had slippers on, he was letting his parents into a car.

And I just knew, in my mind, I was like, I don’t know if I ever see him again. So let me just approach him. And I approached him and I introduced myself. I was like, are, you are Remit Sethi? And he’s like, yes. And I was like; I’m a huge fan of your work. I read your book. And we started talking, and the thing that we have to remember, sometimes we’re like, how could I ever talk to someone who is such a big deal in online world? And the thing is, everyone’s favorite topic is themselves, it’s the easiest topic for them to talk about. So I had so much to say to him about his book, about his blog, and about the impact that it had in my life.

And so we started to get to know each other. He was like, are you on my list for local New York meetups. I’m like, actually I am. And as he started doing meetups, I would attend those meetups, and actually, that’s how I met Derek Halpern. I remember he saw me talking to Derek, and we were like, laughing and everything. And he was like, oh, so you guys know each other. I was like, no, I just met him like five minutes ago. But the thing is, with Derek, I was also a huge follower of his work, and I had so much to say to him. And so, that’s kind of how I started to develop those relationships.

And over time, there have been ways I’ve showed my support to Remit like, as an example, as we became friends and I was in business school, he sent me an email saying, hey, I’m redoing my website, if you have five minutes would love for you to like, or a couple of minutes, take a look at this new mock up for the homepage. And there were a few different versions. And I was in my ironically, entrepreneurship class, and I left the classroom and I went to the library, and I gathered just people and friends and I got, I organized like a mini focus group.

And I spent like five hours between asking people for their opinions, and listening and doing that market research, and then writing up all my ideas and I shot him an email later that evening. And he was expecting probably like five minutes, or no response, or I don’t know what, and I gave him five hours. And he was just really blown away by the depth of my insights, and how I really showed up for him and went above and beyond, and he shared it with his team. And that’s just like one example.

Steve: So hold on, let me just introduce, let me just interrupt you real quick because you said a lot of stuff there. And like, my first question was, first of all, when you’re approaching someone who’s famous or semi famous up, how did you become memorable in Remit’s eyes that one day when you approached him in the car, or was that just like a first introduction?

Selena: Yeah, I mean, so the way that I became memorable, the way I became an interesting person to him was being interested in him. So, I was a huge follower and fan of his work. And when someone’s full time profession is helping other people and they want to know that they’re making a difference, it’s very different to — so it’s like, even when they send out emails, it’s like they’re wondering, are people going to respond, are people resonating with this? So to meet people in real life who are like, oh my gosh, your work has changed my life, that’s what they live for. That’s why they do what they do.

And I think I also stood out because now Remit has a much bigger audience. I met him several years ago and his audience then was definitely majority like Matt [ph], and he jokes like a young geeky guy. And so I’m like just like women and like know all his stuff and I just had like this — it was just like I didn’t fit his profile, a little bit intrigued. And yeah, I think also my enthusiasm went a really long way.

Steve: Okay and it sounds like you helped him greatly which immediately got you on his radar so to speak when you did that whole entire case study on his website design.

Selena: Yeah, absolutely. But even before that, one thing that some of your listeners Steve may be thinking it’s like well, I don’t live in New York City, I’m not going to be like walking down Main Street and bumping into like my favorite influencer. And it’s not really like I want people to kind of see the bigger picture here. The thing is, in life we can’t wait for opportunities, we have to create our own opportunities. And for so many of us, oftentimes there are opportunities in front of us, maybe we’re going to a conference and our favorite author, speaker, influencer, course creator is there, but we’re too afraid to go out to them. Or maybe a friend of ours is connected to someone who has interviewed them on a podcast, or who is their star student or something. But we never have the courage to ask them, oh, do you have any ideas of how to get in front of this person?

So all of us, we all have opportunities. And I think that what made the difference here, like, the very first step is I seized the opportunity and I went for it. And so that’s really, that’s one of the first things I want to make sure everyone takes away from this.

Steve: So given that you do this for a living, let’s say I was a client of yours, what would you say is the most important way to grow a business and just get more exposure for your business? Like, what do you coach people to do?

Selena: Yeah, I mean, the first thing is always strategy. So I mean, I guess there’s two areas I’m really well known for. I mean, the overall area that I’m well known for is helping people get well known, right, getting visibility, becoming thought leaders and influencers. But when you break that down, there’s two main areas. So one is getting publicity, and the other is connecting with influencers. So I really believe that publicity is one of the absolute fastest ways to grow your business. You could have a lot of success and get hundreds, thousands of people on your webinar and you tell your parents like, oh, I had this really successful webinar, I had like 700 people live on it, and your parents are going to be like, what’s a webinar?

But if you’re like, oh, I got this feature article on Forbes or Business Insider has been talking about how I am the go to person on this topic, they’re going to be like, oh my god, they’re going to tell their relative, family, your high school friends are going to see on Facebook. Oh my god, you posted this, people kind of the Woodworks. So there is something unique about publicity.

Steve: It’s funny you say that, because with my mom for the longest time, she didn’t understand what I did. And then I told her some of the numbers. She’s like, why are people paying for that? And it was only after I got in Entrepreneur or Forbes, I can’t remember which one it was, she was like, oh, my God, what you’re doing is like real? Like, good lord mum.

Selena: Yes. I know. And it’s definitely not the actual most significant, the most significant thing is the results you get in your business and for your students and clients. But it’s something that is sort of universally understood. And so when you’re thinking about building your brand, and thinking about marketing, publicity really should be in the mix somewhere. And when I have people think about publicity, I have them think about their goals and their business model. So for example, for some people, a goal of theirs might be I want to publish a book and I want to have thousands and tens of thousands people buy the book. Others are like, I don’t need a ton of clients, but I’m looking to get like high ticket clients for like a $10,000 coaching program, whatever it is, and I just need like 10 people at a time, right.

So those are very different goals. And based on your different publicity goals, there’s going to be different types of publicity and media outlets that you should focus on. So one example I can just share quickly is like I mean, I’m a huge fan of podcasts. And I think it makes a lot of sense for people who are experts and especially people that have online courses or high end coaching because with a podcast interview someone feels like they really get to know you. They’re listening in to like that coffee table conversation, you can go really deep. And when you hear someone speak in 30 minutes to even an hour, you feel like you know them and you’re more comfortable taking the next step or as are some other forms of media like TV which is a massive credibility booster and can be really good for specific purposes.

If you’re looking to sell like a $10,000 program of some nature, the average person watching TV might not be the right person, but the person who’s invested an hour and follows as expert could be someone who is much, much more qualified, So all about the strategy with a publicity piece and then also I’ll just quickly touch on the second piece is the influencer piece. That is really key and it’s similar to publicity in the sense that a lot of us tend to hire based on recommendation, and so if we know a top influencer is endorsing someone, we’re like, oh yeah, I want to work with them. It’s kind of funny. So my personal trainer actually is the personal trainer of Remit Sethi, Derek Halpern, and for whatever reason I mean I don’t know, I guess it’s just how my brain works, I was looking for someone and they recommended him to me. And I’m like, oh well, he works all of them, I want to work with him too.

And in my own business people are like, oh wow, like she’s been endorsed and she’s helped like Danielle LaPorte and she’s helped Kimra Luna and Marie Forleo endorses her work, I trust her. So similar to publicity, that is kind of like one of those instant credibility markers and then but influencer relationships go a lot deeper than publicity. And I think that those two combined are really, really powerful ways to grow your business and really to grow your reputation.

Steve: So Selena, so from the perspective of my listeners, let’s say they have a specific skill, and they want to be able to make money with it. So let’s say, it’s some medium to high end coaching service that they want to start but they are a nobody right now. They don’t have any content, they don’t have anything, how would you advise that they get started?

Selena: Yeah, I mean, the most important thing when you are getting started, and even at the higher levels is mindset. Because the thing is, if you don’t believe in yourself, or you feel bad about selling or charging, or you’re not sure about your worth, then you’re going to self sabotage. Also, I’ve had situations where I’ve had it early on, I had a nightmare client. And there was something on my offering that was off and I just like I felt so bad about myself that even though people wanted to work with me, and they wanted to give me money so badly, I just kind of turned all away, I was like, I was too busy. So you’ve got to get yourself in a good mental space and a good mindset.

And I would — the way that I built my business, and what I recommend people considering is just start helping people, because as you start helping people, even if it’s pro bono, or it could be a small project where you say, hey, I would love to help you with this project for free for like a one month period, or for six sessions, or four sessions, or a three hour deep dive, whatever you want to do, say, if I do an exceptional job, I would be so grateful to get a testimonial from you, and if you have happen to think of anyone who could benefit from my services, let me know, or let them know.

So that’s, I mean, I didn’t do it so explicitly in that way. I was just because I was in school at the time, I didn’t really, I wasn’t focused on making side income, but I just started being helpful to people and I identified people, I’m like, oh, wow, I can connect you to this person. And let me introduce this reporter. Let me help you make this connection. Oh, like, you need feedback on this. Like, I would love to give you feedback. I just went above and beyond. And it really for me, it’s a lifestyle and that’s really what I encourage everyone to consider is when you show up every day as a giver and you create all this goodwill, people are going to want to give back to you and it really builds your reputation. So for me, right away when I started my business, Marie Forleo, Danielle LaPorte, all these people, they wanted to give me testimonials.

Steve: So was that a gradual thing? Like, when you met them, did you do a lot of pro bono work for them?

Selena: Yeah, so I can explain how it worked because it’s evolved over time. So initially, like for example, with Danielle LaPorte, I just kind of like helped her for free. I knew her several years before I even started my business and I had offered to connect her to people at different media publications. I’m just a helpful person. And over time, like more recently, I was like in charge of like influencer marketing for her White Hot Truth book campaign. And so it’s something started off as pro bono and then there was payment later. There have been other times where people have wanted to pay me whereas I like let me just help you for free.

So, every situation kind of varies, but I will say that I put like a lot of just like, I just help people. Like with Remit, I’ve never asked him for payment. And personally, I don’t really want payment from him, I just want to help him but he also helps me so much. I mean, I’ve taken his courses but beyond that, now, he’s somewhat have an inner real bind, I can just text him and be like, hey, can we talk, and like I’ll do that maybe like once a year. I’m not going to take advantage, and he’s there for me. So, yes, I absolutely did a lot of pro bono work in the beginning. And then there were also people that I charged, but my number one goal wasn’t like, how can I make the most money out of these people? I was thinking really it is — and this is still my philosophy, when it comes to people you really admire, it is an honor to be a part of their world, to want to give back to them. That is a gift in of itself.

So that was — and I think that is a reason why a lot of these influencers really opened up to me, because a lot of times, you can feel when someone’s got an agenda. And you’re a bad person for having agenda. I mean, I’m very quickly can connect the dots between people, ideas, and opportunities. And I know if I add a ton of value, they might help me. Ultimately they might not, but it’s not a big deal. So it’s fine to see the connections that could be made. But I think that when there is this feeling of desperation and expectation, then people feel very scared to let you in. But I think I’ve always had this kind of very giving attitude and I’m laid back about like, I don’t really need anything from it, but I’m also like a go getter like their biggest advocate and supporter and people feel that. And then they appreciate me and then many of them end up wanting to support me.

So going back to like your listeners, what I would recommend they do is to create an influencer list. And so this is like the first step. I mean, the first step with everything, we got to figure out the strategy. So my definition of an influencer is someone who can help you reach your goals faster. So identify what are your top goals, and let’s get more specific than just grow your business. Is it to get — land five high end clients this month, or generate X amount of revenue? And when you think about your influencers, these are people who have already achieved your goal, or maybe they’re a couple of steps ahead of us, so they kind of know the path ahead, and they’re very familiar with the current situation around it. Or maybe they are people who connect you to other people who can help you reach your goal faster.

So make that list, and you can definitely have like some aspirational people on that list. But I also would encourage you to think about who’s kind of in your own backyard? Who do you already know, that you’re not tapping into because all of us have people in our world who care about us and believe in us already. And oftentimes, we’re not asking them for help, or asking them if they might be willing to make an introduction or brainstorm ideas with us. And so, you want to identify your list of influencers and connect with them and think about how can you be an incredibly useful, helpful, valuable person in their life?

And simultaneously think about maybe how can I just help people, perhaps do a pro bono project here and there and start building up that goodwill and getting those results so that when I have calls later with people who are prospects of my business, who would be paying clients, I can say, yeah, I worked with someone for a month, and these are the results we got in a one month period. I’ve done this with three other people, and I’m so confident I can do this for you too.

Steve: So it sounds like you worked your way up, right. So you had this list of influencers and you were doing this pro bono work to build up your portfolio, and then perhaps at some point, you’ll approach this influencer with a strong foundation of work.

Selena: Yeah, well…

Steve: I’m just trying to understand how you operate yeah.

Selena: No, I love it because I want to make sure it’s really clear to people. So with the influencers, I would say, these are the people that you can offer the pro bono work to, but not like indefinitely, it could be a project or a series of things you do for them. And after time, some of them will be like, can I just hire you, I would love for you to lead up this in my company, or take on this bigger project. Or they might be like, you know what, you’re so awesome. I should put you in front of my students, you should be a guest in my group program, or, hey, let me connect you to a colleague who could really use your services. With these influencers, the most important thing is building a relationship; it’s not the short term revenue you can make from them. If you can really help them and they want you in an ongoing way, they will pay you, they will be, you know what I mean?

Steve: Yeah.

Selena: Or you just say like, hey, I’ve loved helping you and I would love to continue to help you, but I want to explore the possibility of us working together in a deeper way, could we explore what that could look like? And compensation or whatever, that’s not my main goal. My main goal is to support you but I want to figure out a way that can be a win-win, where I’m being compensated, we have a long term relationship where I can create these results in your business.

Steve: So Selena, I’ve been offered pro bono work many times in the past, and I’ve always just turned it down because in my mind, at least, I’m like, okay, great. I have to think about what I want this person to do. It just might be another complication in my life. And I don’t know what the skill set is. So how do you overcome that?

Selena: Oh, I mean, I’m so glad you brought that up because I mean, I’ve gotten the same invitations too. I mean, the problem is, like, if you have to think about what you have to give them and you don’t know, and like can I trust this person? I mean, it’s not going to work out. So, like, with me when I reached out to people, I mean, a lot of times also, as I start to develop a network of friends and influencers, they’re introducing me to other people. So like Remit Sethi and Danielle LaPorte pretty much simultaneously introduced me to Marie Forleo. So there’s definitely like a high level of trust there. But when you email someone, introduce me with like can I help you, and then there’s like no link to your website, or LinkedIn or anything or with your skills.

So you need to sell the person on why they should accept an opportunity to work with you because free work is not really free, they still have to coordinate with you, maybe put team members in touch with you. I mean, if you do a bad job, there’s consequences. So it’s not actually free. So, you want to connect with people in a way where you’re highlighting your expertise, and you already have ideas to bring to the table. I mean, for me, with the publicity work I do and the influencer work, a lot of it is, it is very clear, it’s like, hey, I would like to introduce you to this person. I feel like it would be interesting for you to connect, because of XYZ reason. I’ve known so and so for the past couple of years, I think that it would be a really cool connection, would you be interested, right? So it’s like very straightforward. And I’ve also got a website and things like that.

Steve: So let me ask you this, would you recommend you have all those things in place before you approach an influencer for pro bono work?

Selena: I would — I don’t think you need a website per se. But I would say you need to have something about you online. Because if they Google you, and there’s nothing, it’s like, is this a real person? Are they legit? So what I would recommend at minimum is maybe like say LinkedIn. And then in the summary section, you kind of share what you do, your expertise, and include a link to it in your email. So as they’re looking for more information, they can see, oh, okay, this person is a professional, this is their experience or expertise, this is the work they’ve done before, oh, we’ve got mutual contacts, okay, this is like a real person, this is not fake, it feels like there’s more trust there.

Steve: So it sounds like — and I might be paraphrasing here, the foundation for your methodology is to just build relationships and kind of gradually work your way up to larger and larger influencers to kind of promote your business in the grand scheme of things. It’s all about relationships, right.

Selena: Yeah. Oh, 100%. It’s all about building deep and meaningful relationships. And the other thing I want to clarify is, I’m not saying just spend all day doing pro bono work because it’s very hard to build a business if you’re not making money. I actually believe in being really thoughtful and selective about who you invest in because for me, when I’m looking to build a really meaningful relationship, especially in the beginning, and I had a lot more time in the beginning, because you’re starting off any clients, so I had more time, but you need to go above and beyond, because that’s the only way that someone’s going to notice you. But you can only go above and beyond for so many people, right?

So that means you should be really thoughtful and selective and not from like, I mean, I guess you should be aware of, okay, how could this potentially be beneficial to me in the future, but really thinking about who, where, I mean, I like to think of it as where they’re the most synergies where I could invest a lot and create amazing results and value and there could possibly be [inaudible 00:27:54] or also like, if the kind of person like, I don’t believe in developing relationships with people just because they’re “famous or influential” if they’re not a good person, you don’t like them, got a bad reputation, what I mean? Like that personal connection is really important too.

So, be thoughtful, and choose about who you’re going to develop relationships with, and go deep, but then don’t just all put on one person, because then it’s like you get this intimacy of desperation where it’s like, oh, everything is banking on this one person potentially being helpful to you in the future. I would say, be developing like three to four meaningful relationships at a time, while also doing other things to grow your business. It should not be your only strategy. But especially early on, this is something that you do want to think about.

And when I think about even now, now that I have a thriving multi seven figure business, I mean, I’m still helping people all the time for free. But I don’t even think about it, because that’s what we do for friends and people that we care about, like, oh, hey, can I make this introduction for you. Oh, tell me about your business, oh, like would you be interested in a couple of ideas? Or can I give you access to this resource I have. So it really is kind of a way of living and it is an art and figuring out what’s the right balance, but I think there is a lot of room for us to always be givers, while also simultaneously being focused on our own business goals.

Steve: So let me ask you this. So let’s say you did not meet Remit by chance that day, what would have been your strategy to just kind of gain mindshare in his eyes? And how do you approach people? I think I read on your blog that you’re an introvert. How do you overcome that as well?

Selena: Yeah, I mean, that’s a big thing. And a lot of people in my community, they’re drawn to me because they have that introverted side. I mean, I think everyone on some level can feel shy or it’s like a spectrum introversion, extroversion. I think for me, and for everyone I know, it’s really about not putting the focus on you. It’s more about putting the focus on the person you’re looking to connect with. I’d approach for me as an example and thought like, oh my God, what is he going to think of me? Oh, how do I look like, what am I going to say? And like, I hope I don’t mess up. And that is the dialogue in my head and I’m like hi, then I would probably mess it up. But I was more like kind of in the moment, like, oh, there he is. And it was all about like him; the focus was on him, not on me.

And I think it’s one of those things when you let your kind of like your passion speak louder than your fears. And for me, I just had this real passion to connect with him, to express gratitude and also be a helpful person, so that always kind of leaves leads. But I mean, I’ll be honest, there have been times and there are still times when I’m in front of some big influencers, and I get nervous, and maybe I feel like I kind of messed it up, or I don’t know, like if I came off in the right way. But the thing is, like, out of, a couple of time, but then there are like dozens and hundreds of connections, where at this point it’s just like, it’s been a great connection.

And I remember actually, I was at an event, actually Remit’s event, and someone came up and spoke to me, and we had a nice conversation. And later I saw her again, we were paired up for an activity, interestingly enough, and she was like, oh, my gosh, I’ve been feeling bad the whole day because you said that you shouldn’t XYZ, I don’t remember what I said. It’s like I did that and I just feel like I left a lot of really bad impression. And I was like, oh, I didn’t even remember that. I didn’t even think of that. I just thought you were awesome. So a lot of times, we’re so in our head, and we make up these stories about why we’re not worthy, or oh my God, we put this pressure on ourselves. And that is really a way that we kind of screw things up. I don’t know if I answered your original question, because I kind of got into this other place. But what was the original question? I can back up the bow.

Steve: No, no, no, let’s actually kind of go with what you just were saying. And in fact, I want to take the opposite approach, what are some ways not to approach influencers or people that you want to get to know? What are some common mistakes because you were just talking about that a little bit at the end?

Selena: Yeah, that’s a really good question. So, I would say there’s kind of two typical mistakes when you’re approaching people. So one is like, and I get it like being so scared and shell shocked that you’re just kind of standing there and saying nothing. Maybe there’s a group of people, and you’re just standing there, and, or you see someone and you’re like, oh my God, I’m too scared, and you just run the other direction. So there’s that, there’s like the total avoidance, and then there’s like the — I don’t want to say over enthusiasm, because I think enthusiasm is important. But it’s like saying too much.

So, for example, and Steve, I mean, I’m guessing that you can relate to this, when you become a well known person, an expert, you’ll get emails from your audience, which is like one of the most exciting things. But sometimes, I’ve been in situations where you get emails, and they’re like 13 paragraph emails. And it’s really like a one way monologue, and there’s like several different questions. And it’s just like, it’s really a lot.

Steve: I feel bad replying to those too actually because I don’t have time to write a novel back.

Selena: Right. So then you feel guilty, right, because you’re like, oh, I respond with a sentence, and they’re going to think I’m rude. And actually, that happened before I responded briefly and someone got really upset at me. And I wrote back to her, and just kind of explained why I wasn’t able to respond at length like she had. But people don’t realize that you’re actually making someone feel bad by sending them a novel. But really the psychology of what’s happening is we feel like we’ve got that one shot to make a big impression and we want to prove ourselves. And so we over share, we tell them everything, when really when you think about a friendship because that’s what you’re going for ultimately, or like a meaningful relationship, when you talk to a friend, there’s back and forth kind of someone says something, the next person says the other thing. And it’s not like you have to put everything out there, like this is your only chance.

And I remember being once I was at an event with Lewis Howes, and there was someone who approached him. And it was like this five minute long monologue where she was talking about herself. And I’ve done this before too actually with a magazine editor. I remember, I got like, I won this charity auction, I got an hour with her and I spoke mostly about myself. And yeah, I mean, I think we do that because we are nervous. But it prevents us from building that back and forth really meaningful connection. So I would just say, that is one of the mistakes. I mean, instead of just like one way talking, think about what are some questions that I can ask the person. And there’s a lot that you could share about yourself, and maybe what are like two or three points, I just want to make sure to get across, and then really let the conversation be more organic.

Steve: I can tell you my MO, and you can tell me if I do the right thing or not. But what I usually do is when I talk to someone who’s like a big name celebrity in some certain aspect; I don’t talk about that at all. I don’t talk about anything that they’re good at. Instead, I try to talk about other things that are very common, family, kids, and whatnot, and I try to find something where I’m an expert and they’re not that they might be interested in, and then I just steer the conversation that way. And I never end up talking about what they’re good at.

Selena: Oh, that’s interesting. I mean, that’s a really good one. I mean, I think that yeah, that is really beneficial because with different people that I’ve met, including my students and clients to other people, when they’ve got a skill that I can benefit from, I’m very interested and oftentimes, I’ll just like, I’ll hire them and be like, hey, can you help me with whatever it is, with decluttering, with getting better sleep and all of that. So yeah, I think that is an important part of building the relationship not, I mean, yes, I think it can be valuable to show appreciation for someone’s work. But then I think it’s also very valuable to also show what you’re an expert and what you bring to the table, because that person wants to be like, oh tell me more about what you do. That’s awesome.

Steve: And I try not to fan boy too much because I think if you fan boy too much, it instantly puts you on a rung below whoever that is that that you’re targeting.

Selena: Yeah.

Steve: I don’t know if these are like, I’m obviously not an expert at this. I’m just telling you what I think sometimes and how I operate. And I’m just curious like whether that gels with what you teach?

Selena: Well, we should talk about that because that’s so interesting. I’m loving your perspective. So one of my favorite sayings that I heard that I share with a lot of people is the moment you put someone on a pedestal is the moment they start looking down on you. And what I mean by that is, when you put someone on the pedestal to think, oh my god, they’re so amazing, they’re so successful, they’re like the best person in the world. And like, where am I? I’m at the bottom; I’ve got nothing to offer them. Who am I to think I could talk to them, I’m going to be wasting their time, why would they want to talk to me when there are other people.

And you create that dynamic where they’re everything, and you’re essentially in your mind nothing, then the relationship is going to be screwed up. You approach them that way, they just, they feel it, and it affects what comes out of your mouth, and your energy, and how you follow up and all of that. As human beings, we’re all equal. And I mean, it is important to recognize, okay, like maybe they’re a busy person, maybe they have more time constraints or whatever, and they’ve got this expertise, I appreciate. But it’s not about thinking that you’re nothing, and they’re everything. I think that the fastest way to level the playing field is to show the value that you have to offer. And the way that you show it is by sharing your expertise and finding a way to potentially give back to them. So, I think we’re talking about a similar thing here.

Steve: I think it all comes back to the original thing that you were talking about earlier in the interview, which is mindset, right? You have to go in with confidence. Even if you all aren’t as skillful as the person you’re talking to, you have to at least project confidence. And then that way that person wants to talk to you.

Selena: Right. And then the other thing is it doesn’t have to be confidence about something directly related to what you are known for, as a business owner, entrepreneur in your job. It could be like for example, there was someone I met recently, and she has seven kids, and she’s a successful entrepreneur, and she’s really good at managing her time. And I’m not looking to have kids myself; I’m like, oh my God. Like, sometimes it’s enough to just take care of myself and my cat. Like, I don’t know how you manage to run a successful business with seven kids. I want to hear your time management secrets, how do you delegate? How do you outsource?

Or just people’s personal character even, or how they handle stressful and difficult situations. There’s so many ways that we can create those meaningful connections. And there’s different ways that people can learn from each other beyond the number one main thing that you’re known for, as a business owner, or a professional.

Steve: Absolutely. So it let’s — so we got five minutes left, let’s try to kind of sum everything up, right. So original question I posed to you was, let’s say, I have some sort of skill and I want to develop some sort of high end clientele, maybe, perhaps. And so the first thing that you suggested was to perhaps just get some sort of body of work right, that you can show off, it sounds like.

Selena: Right, yeah.

Steve: And then after that, make a list of influencers that you might want to meet, perhaps that you can help out pro bono whatnot, and then develop relationships that way, and then perhaps grow your business by referrals. Is that kind of…

Selena: Yeah, exactly. That is the fastest way, it’s developing that body of work, and publicity can be part of that body of work. When people are goggling you, they’re like, oh, he did this interview, or he wrote this article, not just on their blog, but on other well known websites, that’s your body of work. And combined with building meaningful relationships, and getting people results and having case studies, and tangible things that you can help people create in their lives, and then they refer people to you, and you’ve built your reputation. Yes, I think that is a really smart, and one of the fastest ways to build your business early on, for sure.

Steve: How do you get press mentions? What’s your strategy there?

Selena: Yeah, so there’s a couple of different steps. But one is getting really clear on what you want to be an expert in. It should ideally be connected to your goals and your business model. And then it’s about coming up with a really good story idea. So oftentimes, that people are like, oh, I want someone to just write about me, and my business. But it’s not about you, it’s about the readers. So what valuable advice do you have? How can you really serve the audience? So, some things that you can think about are where do people get stuck in your work? Or what’s the number one question people ask you, or what’s the fastest way that you can help people achieve XYZ goal?

I have like dozens and dozens of prompts and ideas of how people identify their story ideas, but basically, what people are most definitely wanting to know from you is usually something that is the basis of a good story idea. And then there’s also just kind of people like things that are interesting, or sensational, or surprising. They love rags to riches stories, they love hearing about big results, and things like that. So, getting clear on your story ideas, and then sending an email pitch.

Steve: How do you know who to pitch?

Selena: How do you who to pitch? It depends. So like, let’s say, if it’s a podcast, usually, it’s the podcast host that you would pitch and sometimes they will have forms on their website, like a contact form, and they’re like, please follow this form specifically. Other times, there will be an email, you should jump through hoops. Sometimes there won’t be an email, but you’re on the podcaster’s email list, and you have a sense of the email format or at least you have a hello or info at email, or maybe you know someone who has been on that podcast, or someone who is connected to that person. So there’s a lot of different ways you can go about to get the information and then definitely depending on the media outlet. Like for TV you may want to call at the TV station, and then get the information for who would cover like type of story. But the thing is, it’s all accessible. It just involves a little bit of outreach.

Steve: What’s your view on hiring PR agencies?

Selena: Yeah, I think it’s not the best idea if you are early stage business owner, because it can be very expensive. And I think that even if you hire an agency, you need to understand how it works before you just hand over $5,000 a month, or $10,000 a month, or whatever it is. And the thing is, nobody is going to care more than you. And you’re going to have the best ideas; you know your story the best. So if you have a little bit of education, so that you can understand like what is it that is going to get you into the media and how you’re going to leverage to the media, that’s important. Because the other thing is a lot of PR agents, they’re not thinking about the business, they’re just like, oh, let me get you a mention.

But you could get a random mention on a blog, or even do a podcast and nothing could happen to your business, if you don’t know how to set it up right, if you don’t know how to leverage it, if you don’t know how to create the relationships, there’s all the other things you need to be thinking about. I mean, I actually have publicity programs on this. And if someone is interested, feel free to reach out to me. But the thing is, I also take the perspective of a business owner, because I’m a business owner myself, and like all of us, I don’t have a lot of time. And if I’m going to invest my time into something, I need to see the return, it needs to be strategic, it has to directly grow my business. So there’s this whole other piece to it. And if you just outsource it without being educated yourself and having a strategy, there’s a very high chance you are going to be wasting your money.

Steve: Let me ask you a different question here just to kind of close things up. Let’s say I run an ecommerce store and I don’t want to be the face of the business, does that strategy greatly detract from your methods?

Selena: Well, you don’t need to be the face of the business but someone’s going to have to do the interviews, right. And there’s going to need to be certain calls to action, whether it’s on podcast, or even certain messaging that you want to get across. I mean, I think that hiring a PR person can be a really good idea. I mean, I’m in the industry and I’ve had clients before, but I think that the best PR relationships are collaborative relationships where you’re not just outsourcing and delegating and have no involvement and you’re just crossing your fingers, but that you are also kind of leading the way and overseeing and making sure you’re getting the results you want. So I think it is still important to have some base level knowledge about your PR strategy versus just trusting someone else.

Steve: Okay, so it sounds like you recommend having at least one person who’s willing to be more public I guess?

Selena: Yeah, there should be someone absolutely, mm-hmm.

Steve: Okay, hey well Selena we’ve been chatting for 40 minutes believe it or not and thanks a lot for your time. Where can people find you and the various courses that you offer?

Selena: Yeah, so they can go to my website, they can go to SelenaSoo.com. I do have a page about the programs I have. I have a lot of launch based programs. I do have some evergreen things that are coming out. So I mean, you can also feel free to email me. You can email Hello@SelenaSoo.com and my team will pass that along to me. I’m happy to point you in the right direction. And I mean, I love helping people and making sure they’re getting the support they need. So feel free to reach out to me. And then also on my website, I have a video if you’d like to check that out. That goes deeper into how I build relationships, some of the top influencers and some of my best tips to building connections that go beyond what we discussed in this podcast.

Steve: Absolutely. Well, just kind of as an aside, my businesses did not really take off until I started attending conferences and meeting other people. And that holds true for both my blog as well as my ecommerce store. So, we talked a lot about relationships in today’s podcast, and it’s really hard to apply a $1 value to it, but I just know that things did not start happening until I started building these relationships.

Selena: Oh, absolutely. Yeah.

Steve: So, Selena thanks a lot for coming on the show. Really appreciate it.

Selena: Yeah, thanks for your time.

Steve: Well, that’s a wrap and I hope you enjoyed my conversation with Selena Soo. Now as I look back on the success of my own businesses, a huge part of it had to do with networking and establishing myself as an authority. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode238.

And once again, I want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop-ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. If you want to give it a try, it is free. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post-purchase flow, a win-back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on autopilot. So, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

Now I talk about how I use all these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own e-commerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.Mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

237: Dennis Yu On How To Build A Personal Brand With Facebook Ads

235: How To Build A Personal Brand With Facebook Ads For Just 5 Bucks A Day With Dennis Yu

Today I’m lucky to have Dennis Yu on the show. Dennis is someone who I met at Social Media Marketing World at the speakers mixer and it’s funny. I knew that I recognized the guy right away because he’s been plastered all over my Facebook feed for years.

Anyway Dennis is the CTO of BlitzMetrics, a digital marketing company which partners with schools to train young adults, teaching them how to manage social campaigns for large enterprise clients. He’s been featured all over the place like The Wall Street Journal, The New York Times and he’s an all around Facebook ads geek. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • Why Dennis started Blitzmetrics
  • How to create a strong personal brand
  • How to select a targeted audience
  • How choose the best creative for your ads
  • The key to a successful campaign

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

GoBrandWin.com – The fastest and most effective way to grow your email list for free using group giveaways. Click here to signup for free.

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and dig deep into what strategies they use to grow their businesses. And today, I have a special guest with me on the show Dennis Yu. And Dennis is the CTO of BlitzMetrics and a total Facebook ads geek. And in today’s episode, we’re going to discuss how to use Facebook ads to develop a personal brand.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Privy who is a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. And right now I’m using privy to display a cool Wheel of Fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prizes in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this and when I implemented this form email signups increased by 131%.

But you can also use Privy to reduce cart abandonment with cart saver pop ups and an abandoned email sequence at one super low price that is much cheaper than using a full blown email marketing solution. So bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers and recover lost sales in my online store. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ For 15% off. Once again that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is also a sponsor of the show. Always blessed to have Klaviyo as a sponsor because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my e-commerce store, and I depend on them for over 30% of my revenues. Now Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here is why it is so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought. So let’s say I want to send out an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special auto-responder sequence to my customers depending on what they bought, piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email sent. Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you could try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O. Once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m lucky to have Dennis Yu on the show. Now Dennis is someone who I met at Social Media Marketing World at the speaker’s mixer. And it’s funny; I knew that I had recognized the guy right away because he’s been plastered all over my Facebook feed for years. And so, we started chatting about his Facebook strategies which are fascinated by the way.

And I found out that Dennis is the CTO of BlitzMetrics, a digital marketing company which partners with schools to train young adults teaching them how to manage social campaigns for large enterprise clients. And he’s been featured all over the place like the Wall Street Journal, The New York Times, and he’s an all around Facebook ads geek. And with that, welcome to show Dennis. How are you doing today man?

Dennis: Hey, good Steve. Always good to hang out, I don’t know if like me being plastered on your feed is a good or a bad thing.

Steve: No, it’s good thing. I recognized you right away. I’ve seen you literally every day.

Dennis: Oh, oh stalking you, retargeting you.

Steve: I mean the strategy works. And that’s something we’re going to be talking about today. But before we begin, I wanted to get a quick background story about you just in case someone my listeners don’t know who you are. Tell us how you got started with Facebook ads and how did that lead to BlitzMetrics.

Dennis: Yeah and I started working at American Airlines, had built their website 20 something years ago, almost 20 years ago, I started analytics at Yahoo. And ever since then, it’s been all about data, and using data and relationships to try to drive ROI. It’s great for agents like us, right. You’re good at math. I got a perfect SAT except for two questions on robotic perfect math. And so how do you use things that you’re good at in terms of analytics to then be able to drive things at scale? And like at could Yahoo, I learned how do you drive sales for something like Yahoo Personals or Yahoo shopping, Yahoo Mail, and you’re driving relationships at scale.

But I learned from analytics, which almost nobody gets the viewpoint from being inside a search engine. I learned from being inside a search engine that it wasn’t the masses of 170 million users that were coming in every day, hey, this is before Google became big, right. Imagine back in the day, Yahoo doesn’t exist any longer. And I learned that it was about finding and developing these micro relationships. So someone who was using Yahoo mail, and they played fantasy sports, we also knew something about their favorite sports teams and who their friends were and how they can invite friends in to chat because maybe they’re using chat to talk about fantasy sports, while they’re coordinating on scores from Yahoo Sports and Yahoo News.

And the idea that you could build a giant company off of micro bits of relationships and data is something I think almost no one would understand unless they’ve been inside a search engine. Now you’ve got all this talk about influencer marketing, and personal branding and social media expert, consulting, author, speaker, coach, public figure, I’m famous, look at me, Ted Talk, all that kind of stuff. And it’s come full circle where you need to have the data, the building blocks of these relationships. And I’ve always come out at the last 20 years from a data standpoint of quantifying relationships.

Steve: And the way you do that these days is how?

Dennis: Everything that you do creates a deposit or a withdrawal in every relationship, whether it’s a client or not. It’s for example, prior to this call, we were meeting with some of our friends in [inaudible 00:06:07] and they publish textbooks, and we’ve got a digital marketing analytics textbook that’s coming out. And two weeks prior, well, these folks are up in Idaho Falls way up in the mountain on the border in the mountains in the border of Montana, and just having a good time. And a year ago, we were hanging out at Social Media Marketing World.

And three or four years ago, we were teaching well, they reached out to me saying, hey, I hear you’re really good at Facebook ads; can you do an expert session? And I said, sure, happy to right. And since then, tens of thousands of students and university professors have seen it. But what you see is a small relationship that started years ago, grows just like relationships that you have, people that you know. Think about like who your best friends are, or maybe your wife, she quit her job, right? It’s something you had to develop an initial seed, and that seed grows, and it grows through remarketing, it grows through frequent lightweight touches.

When we did analysis on Yahoo Personals, which was a dating site that we started from nothing, we found that when people would date, and they became eventually close, and maybe they got married, the nature of their interactions when they were already going steady, they’re already married, already been together a long time versus people who are like newlyweds or they were just going on a first date, or whatever, you know what, the distinguishing factor was that people in solid relationships had frequent lightweight touches. And you examine their text messages, you examine their mail, you examine, we had all this data in Yahoo, and it would just be simple things like yes, or no, or ha-ha, or just little touches.

And it’s funny, because when you build up many, many lightweight touches, that puts deposits in those relationship bank accounts. And you think about the social graph on how you’re constantly making these deposits, your personal brand is the sum of all of these positive and negative deposits that eventually you may ask for a favor, you may ask for money, and that’s a withdrawal. And if you don’t have a positive balance there, you will bounce a check when you try to make a withdrawal.

Steve: Which happens all the time to both of us, I’m sure right, people asking us for help out of the middle of nowhere, right?

Dennis: Yeah, it’s like he already has his jab, jab, jab, hook thing because you make deposits before you withdraw anything.

Steve: And I had to wait two years for this interview constantly hounding you.

Dennis: That’s called interest. Now, I owe you, right?

Steve: So one of the conversations that we did have, you probably don’t remember this; it was all along the lines of personal branding. And every day I get hundreds of emails from people who are kind of stuck in dead end jobs, or people who can’t find a career. And my advice to them is always to just start something on the side, or build your own portfolio of content. And if you don’t know what you’re doing, then just build an audience, establish your own brand. And that’s what I was hoping to pick your brain about today. And I know you do a lot of this stuff at BlitzMetrics. But let’s say one of the listeners out there, they’re starting with nothing like, what’s the first step that you would give them or have them do to just kind of start establishing their brand?

Dennis: All of what you’re doing Steve, interview other people, who have some kind of expertise, whether it’s perceived or actual, and get them on video and make a one minute video. Like if we’re hanging out at Social Media Marketing World and there’s 6,000 people there, certainly at the lunch tables or in a session or when you catch a speaker, not right before they’re about to go on stage or something like that. But you can find these people and you can ask them a question or two, not five questions, just like one question for a one minute video. And you collect a series of these.

And you don’t have to know anything; you don’t have to have a brand. You don’t have to be good on camera, because you’re just pulling out your iPhone and getting their feedback. That’s what I did for the first 20 years of my life. And then the next 20 years of my life was about paying that forward from the mentors and other people that have taught me. A lot of people want to jump straight to the main stage without having any experience and without having the knowledge and it shows through, they think they’re fooling everybody. I made a post on Facebook about that yesterday and it got to like 400 likes, because it’s about people who are fraudulently promoting their lifestyle.

They don’t have the lifestyle, they owe people money, they don’t own those vehicles that they’re posing in front of. They are constantly burning relationships, because they think it’s all about maintaining that look. And in social media people are they spend so much effort. So many of these people, these author, speaker, coach, influencer, whatever you want to call these people are so busy trying to maintain this Hollywood facade that they have not invested in their knowledge. And I always believe I’m old fashioned. I believe, invest in your knowledge is the best way to learn firsthand, right? Just start a podcast and interview other people. Of course, do your homework beforehand so you don’t come off as being silly, right?

Steve: Let’s say I want to become known as an authority in a certain area. And I know you do this a lot with your Facebook ads, because even before we even met, I saw you talking about various topics in social media. And I think you were talking about a bunch of different topics. Every time I went on my Facebook, I saw you on the feed talking about something else. And even though we hadn’t met and I knew nothing about your company at the time, I watched some of those videos. And over time I started seeing you as an authority in that area. And so, if someone wants to do that, like I’m kind of curious what your strategy over time is for doing that.

Dennis: That’s easy, so if you want to be an authority in X, whatever that is, let’s say, it’s helping out dentists or help helping attorneys generate leads. My buddy Ben Doll is actually an expert here, he’s sitting right next to me. Well, if I know nothing about that, I’m not a lawyer, I have no experience; I would do a Google search for internet marketing lawyers or something like that. See who shows up in terms of the people, follow them on Twitter, connect with them on LinkedIn, maybe if I’ve built sort of a relationship or something that I can say, and…

Steve: Can you give me some examples, like assuming you’re doing this cold, right?

Dennis: Yeah, it’s really easy. You have to creep on people in a non creepy way. So if you follow these people, if you retweet their stuff, that’s not seen as being intrusive, that’s just being part of the community. And when you comment on their blog posts, when you comment on their Facebook Company, and you write them a review, when you do things that are positive, and you say thank you. And in those reviews, and in those blog posts that you write, you are demonstrating that you have taken the time to review their stuff, not just like, oh, that was a really great article, all that was awesome, great job on being featured on Entrepreneur. That’s not building engagement. That’s not demonstrating that you have earned the right to talk to these people.

It’s very easy to build authority in any area that you want if you do this. I know because 99% of the people that approached me are automatic DQ because they come straight for the ask. They say, can you get me a blue checkmark? Can you introduce me to Mark Zuckerberg? Can you get me tickets to the Golden State Warriors? We’ve never met. I don’t even know who you are. And that’s the — can you imagine like Stephen, I just walked up to you and I didn’t know who you were and I said, hey Steve, can I have the keys to your car, and we don’t even know each other right?

Steve: I would say Dennis you could have whatever you want.

Dennis: If I had a gun at your head maybe. All of us I think we understand this kind of etiquette. Yet 99% of people fail because they think the internet is such a big place that you can get away with murder or there’s just enough people. Going back to Yahoo Personals, there were people that would behave, they’d set up their dating profile, and they just figured there’s enough people that if I make a profile and if I reach out to enough women, enough of those women are going to you no respond to my message. And of those, I’ll be able to go on a date. And of those I’ll be able to — and if you just send out enough messages, if I blast my resume out there enough times, then eventually I’ll just get a job right, if I just blast enough.

And that is what spammers do. That’s what people who put their stuff on Twitter and just like mass blast and follow and the Instagram follow trends which are getting killed, like don’t do that. I believe in following a few people. It’s a warren Buffett methodology, right? Warren Buffett, you know what is stop picking strategy is?

Steve: No, what is it?

Dennis: Like invest in 1,000 random stops like a mutual fund. It’s put all your eggs in one basket and watch that basket, research a few stocks really well, and put your money there. I have a finance degree. I can say stuff like that.

Steve: Actually, one of my buddies, you might know him Billy Murphy. He put all of his money in Apple like many years ago.

Dennis: Yeah, he’s doing well.

Steve: And he’s doing well, though, yeah, exactly. But okay. So you find someone that you want to follow, and then you kind of subtly in the background, you tweet them, you might leave a comment, a thoughtful comment on their blog. But if someone’s really busy, they might not necessarily notice that right. I mean, is this a very long term strategy?

Dennis: No, they’ll notice. I mean, do you consider long term three months?

Steve: No, not at all, three months is short.

Dennis: Look, even people like me, I’m not trying to say I’m famous or anything like that, I’m not whatever, Paris Hilton or one of these people, but I certainly get a lot of people coming after me. And I notice when people leave thoughtful comments. I notice when they leave a review, I notice if they tag me multiple times. And of course, I’ll try to block them or whatever because a lot of spammy people will like tag 80 people in a post. But if people say something that’s interesting, that really stands out. And it’s to your advantage to do that, because you know that 99% of people don’t do that. So you will easily stand out.

I know a lot of these other people — I know, I have friends that are billionaires. I have a lot of internet billionaires who it’s not hard because I know all the people from the beginning. And we all joke about these people that come up to us. We’ll be having dinner, like one time I was having lunch with Robert Scoble. And we had this, and I think I brought Logan with me. And as a three, and we were good for the first half hour at dinner, and then all of a sudden, some people noticed us. And then because we’re hiding in the back, and these other people, and then all of a sudden, all these people came up and they tried to pitch us and they want to take pictures oh my, oh no.

Steve: While you guys were eating?

Dennis: While we were having lunch.

Steve: Oh yeah that’s terrible.

Dennis: So eventually, [inaudible 00:17:01] Robert, let’s leave, let’s go somewhere else because we were chatting about some stuff, right? We were working on some stuff together; we had a book coming out, right? You can’t be interrupted right now; we don’t want to be impolite. So just don’t be one of those people, right? That’s the main thing, ask any celebrity and their main thing is just don’t be one of those people. And it’s so easy to approach. You would think like celebrities, or famous business people or whatever, oh they think that they’re so important and their time is so squeezed. And it is, but they’re actually really helpful. And I’ve met so many successful people, not just billionaires, but people who have just below that level, and they’re all really nice to me.

Steve: So, so far, we’ve talked about establishing contact with influencers and that sort of thing. How does that tie into making yourself as an authority? So once you have contact with this person, and you’ve established some sort of mutual trust, what is the next step?

Dennis: Then you interview them in a one minute video, get on Skype for five minutes. Or maybe you ask them one question. You say, hey, I’ve got an article I’m writing and it’s coming out next Friday on the 10 things that are happening with Bitcoin. No, don’t do that. That’s a big, but some kind of topic that’s an area that you would like to be well known in eventually, but you don’t have any authority. Can you just give me one tip, and so you assemble a listical, because maybe you reach out to 10 people, and they each give you one tip, and lo and behold, you have an article, a listical right? It’s the easiest way to do it.

You see a lot of people that will say, what 150 experts have to say about how to get a mortgage, or whatever the topic is, like, insert your topic, what’s your topic? Who are those people? Don’t just mass blast each of them saying, hey, can you give me this one thing, but take the time to research who they are, take the time to see what they really care about. And ask a question that demonstrates that you have done some homework, and they will reply most of the time.

Steve: It’s funny; I’m just looking at my own correspondence here. I would say 99.9% of people do not do that. It’s really easy to spot a mass email.

Dennis: Yeah, and then what’s worse, or actually about the same is then they hire these VAs, or they use these bots, the PR agencies are the worst. I even got three of them today that were saying, yeah, I can help you drive leads on LinkedIn and do your lead gen automatically and all this and that. And I replied back saying no, thank you. You’re a robot; I would not want to be known as spamming people like that. In fact, if I had competitors, I would pay for them to use your service to put them out of business.

Steve: Okay. So we have this video or this listical, what’s the next step?

Dennis: You’re going to put it on Facebook; and you’re going to set for $1 a day.

Steve: So, what would be the caption, or what would the ad look like and who are we targeting here?

Dennis: We’re going to target the people in the audience that care about that particular topic, to people that go to that conference, the people that read the book, the people that follow that particular person. So let’s say that I’m in sales and I do real estate, and I am able to pull off a five minute interview with Grant Cardone, I’m not saying it has to be A list people, I’m going to target Grant Cardone. So I’ve got an interview with Robert Scoble, I’ve got lots of interviews with Robert Scoble, guess what I’m going to target, Robert Scoble.

I’ve got pictures and videos of me with the Golden State Warriors at their headquarters with their marketing people talking about how to do digital marketing, and how to succeed on Facebook. Who am I going to target? The people that work with the Golden State Warriors and the people that work at ESPN and the people that work in the NBA, and the people that are going to care about that kind of content. I want the highest relevancy possible. Think about who would care about that piece of content.

Steve: And then I’m targeting those people. What is the goal of the ad?

Dennis: I just want to drive engagement. I want to drive an initial touch. I’m not trying to sell anything. I’m not trying to make a withdrawal. I want to demonstrate that as a journalist, as a fact gathering objective helper, I am collecting useful information and distributing it to other people without an initial ulterior motive. And when people see that you are trustworthy, they know you by who you hang out with. So, if they see that my co founder Logan Young is hanging out with Mark Zuckerberg, and they see that he is being interviewed on CNN about oh, Senator, we run ads, and being interviewed before Congress and all that.

If they see him there, he’s not selling any of our packages. He’s not selling consulting. He’s not saying anything about how good he is or how much he knows, or the fact that our company we’ve spent a billion dollars on Facebook ads. Not once does he or I or Ben, or any of our people, none of us ever need to say that because Steve, who would you trust more, Logan, who let’s say you know nothing about Logan. But you see him hanging out with Mark Zuckerberg versus somebody who says, hey, Steve, I’m really good at Facebook ads, you should hire me, me, me, me, me. Like, who would you think would be better at Facebook ads?

Steve: Yeah. So you’re gaining authority by association in the very beginning.

Dennis: And that’s called perceived authority. And perceived authority has to always precede actual authority. Actual authority is that you have the credit, you actually know how to do it, you have the proof, you have the checklist. The actual authority is where, let’s say, Steve, we implement this for you. And you saw you saw our personal brand manager, which is a media kit, let’s say they implement that for you and it drives good things for you, and it works for you and it builds your personal brand. That would be actual authority, because you’ve seen it, the proof is in the pudding.

But if you haven’t seen it, but you think based on who we are hanging out with, you think based on what we’re saying, you think based on people that we’re interviewing and the fact that we’re speaking at Social Media Marketing World, then you think that we might be good, and that’s perceived authority. Here’s a secret for anybody that wants to sell things, you must develop perceived authority before actual authority.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Ahrefs for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I’m a huge fan of their tool and in my opinion Ahrefs is the best all in one SEO tool out there to rank in Google search. And recently, I completed a search engine site audit for mywifequitherjob.com and Bumblebeelinens.com and Ahrefs was indispensable. For example, I used Ahrefs to do a deep dive into all my posts to find the highest volume, lowest competition keywords to target in search. And in fact, recently, I used Ahrefs to rank a blog post in Google from position 20 to position five for a big time keyword in the span of just one month by switching around my title and H1 tags.

I also use Ahrefs to spy my competitors’ sites to see what keywords they are ranking for, and then I read a more comprehensive post and eventually outrank them in search. Now those of you who know me know that I hate spending money on tools, but I actually pay for Ahrefs and that should say something in itself. Right now, I’m giving away nine three month Ahrefs memberships for free. To sign up, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway, once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway to win a three month a trust membership. Now back to the show.

And this perceived authority according to you can be obtained with this video that we’re just bidding $1 per day on Facebook campaign, right?

Dennis: Yeah.

Dennis: So can you walk me through this campaign, $1 in my experience doesn’t go that far. And so can you tell me how you can figure out whether the ad is working, or the engagement is good? What are some of the metrics that you use?

Dennis: So there’s something we call the standards of excellence, which is another way of it’s like the check engine light in your car when something’s wrong, right? And if your relevance score is low, that’s a sign that something is wrong but it doesn’t tell you exactly what’s wrong, right? It could be the engine is broken or whatever, when you’re in the car, that the thing goes on, right. And the way to troubleshoot further besides relevance score, which you can look at, at the ad level, very easy to look at, you should be getting at least an eight by the way. If you’re not getting an eight, something is wrong. You’re shooting an interesting video and you’re not getting eight, if you’re not selling anything, you should always get an eight plus.

But if it’s a video, I want to see what my average watch time is; the average watch time is six seconds on Facebook. I want to see 15 plus. If I can get 15 seconds plus on a one minute video, means I’ve captured their attention. If people are bailing out after three seconds, which is where Facebook I think currently counts a video view, that’s a sign that people are just scrolling past my junk. And maybe it’s because I don’t have captions or I’m not interesting, or I’m sitting in front of — I’m sitting in a conference room with a blank wall in the back and a fake potted plant, not interesting, right. Or I have my logo coming across the top with my name; no one cares about that, right. You’re going to lose people.

So the first thing is that watch time, which is governed by how many people I’m losing right away. Then I want to look at what my cost per view is, and not just my cost per three second view, which ideally should be two cents or less. But I want to look at my cost per 10 second view, and you can actually bid to a 10 second view. I mean, you don’t have to; you could just boost post all day long. But if I can get a 10 second view for under five cents, I’m doing pretty well. So think about that. If I spend $1, and I’m getting a 10 second view for five cents, a nickel, then I’m getting 20 people to watch for at least 10 seconds. 20 people that I know are going to be interested. Is that worth it? I think so, 20 of the right people.

Let’s say I spend 10 bucks. Now I got 200 people staying for at least 10 seconds to listen to what I have to say or listen to some other top or demonstrate that I have some kind of authority. Even if I say nothing in that video but I’m interviewing someone else who is authoritative, that Association spills over on to me, it’s called implied authority, right?

Steve: And that becomes very powerful, especially with a targeted audience of people that you want to eventually sell to.

Dennis: Yeah, I’ll just give you an example. So three years ago, Logan Young was delivering pizza for Pizza Hut at $9 an hour. Then he started following our systems on personal branding. There’s no magic, we publish it. It’s not some secret, right. And he became good at optimizing Facebook ads. Imagine that, like a cook that could follow a recipe for chocolate cake. He became good. Not that it was hard, because we follow the recipe. Betty Crocker is not a witch; you just follow the things on the side of the box. And so we were charging $250 an hour which is not bad from $9 now, right to do an ad now, right? That’s pretty good.

Then Mark Zuckerberg approached him at a conference and wanted to take a picture and his price is now $1,000 an hour. And so he used to make $250 an hour which is good right, now it’s $1,000 an hour and the clients are better, we’re getting more business from people buying that power hour because he does have the skill. He has the actual authority meaning that after they pay the $1,000, they’re not going to get disappointed because he knows what he’s doing. And I also like to look over stuff too just to make sure it’s good. I mean, I never really need to, but I just like to look over other stuff before it goes out because it has my stamp on it too.

But he has the perceived authority because he’s hanging out with Zuckerberg, so he can charge four times as much. And he’s always had the actual authority. Do you think Steve that the day before he hung out with Zuckerberg versus the day after somehow his ability to do Facebook ads was like four times better just by like, hanging out Mark Zuckerberg for a few minutes, all of a sudden, his knowledge was just like four times better?

Steve: The answer is no. But how did he meet Zuckerberg in the first place?

Dennis: Ah, you see. Now that is many lightweight touches over time because we have been to so many meetings at Facebook. We have been involved in their betas. We know a lot of their people. We even helped build the initial Power Editor, which is their copy of Google’s AdWords editor. And there was one conference that Logan was at, and he was wearing a Facebook shirt. He was the only one at the conference wearing a Facebook shirt. Why? Because the only place to get a Facebook shirt is at Facebook headquarters. You can’t order it online; you can’t even get it at the local offices. And Mark Zuckerberg said, where did you get that Facebook shirt? Are you an employee? And he wasn’t even in the main sessions. He was just like, walking around. He’s on his laptop or whatever, right? And they struck up a conversation and they talked about all kinds of stuff. And then Zach said, can we take a picture together?

Steve: Nice.

Dennis: And that’s where you see the picture that’s on his public figure page, which we then boost out and we use that picture all over. We use clips from him on CNN from being quoted in the Washington Post, he’s been all over the place, Social Media Marketing World, Traffic and Conversion Summit, keynotes in all these different countries, right. And that just builds tons and tons of perceived authority. But I don’t think it has anything directly to do with whether he’s any good at Facebook ads. He is, but you wouldn’t, you’d have to believe that he is first and then he has to prove it to you.

Steve: So we’re running this engagement ad, we’re doing $1 day and presumably if the engagement is good, we’ll up the spend on that, right.

Dennis: Yeah, so do you just let that run? When do you start transitioning over to reaching out and maybe going for some sort of sale? Like, what are the steps leading up to that?

Dennis: Okay, most people are not going to like what I have to say, they’re going to disagree with what I’m about to tell you. I don’t believe in reaching out to sell. I believe in inbound marketing all the way through, they have to come out and want it. So just 10 minutes ago, or whatever, 20 minutes ago, somebody signed up for our Blitz nation pro subscription, which is an annual subscription for 1,500 dollars of private membership. I’ve never met this person before. And he said, I’ve been following your stuff for years on digital marketing, and these other places where you’ve been sharing with the community.

And every one of those touches, we’ve been building that relationship until at which point he said, I am now at the point where I want to scale my business. I want to grow my agency and take better care of my clients. I am ready for this. I was not ready three years ago or four years ago. Is there any way I could have tracked that? Is there any way inside my Google Analytics or Facebook analytics or Infusionsoft I could have tracked that? I would have never known. And that’s really where it comes from. You have to have some amount of blind trust that if you plant this seed, that months and years down the road, it’s going to pay off. Personal branding is not put a $1 in the machine, and you get something out 10 seconds later. It’s not a vending machine, it’s a gardening thing. You plant the seeds, and however long it takes for the crops to grow, that’s how long it takes.

Steve: Right. It’ll be hard to calculate the ROI of these engagement ads, right?

Dennis: It’s really hard. I wish I could tell you, I’m an analytics person. I’m telling you it’s not fully possible. But there are some — it’s not completely blind. What you can do is see, of the people that are engaging with you are, who are they? And when you comment with them, and have a conversation with them, when they say something or ask a question and you respond by answering their question in a helpful way, instead of like trying to sell them something, they’re going to realize that and then you’re going to see their name. We see their names, usually a couple of weeks later, and they’ll buy one of our courses like $97, right? Because people aren’t just going to spend $97, well, some people will. But most people, they need to see some of the content, they need to kind of talk to you, like chat with you, right? I’m happy to chat with people if they reach out and then they buy. And that’s just how people are used to buying.

Steve: Let me ask you this. So you don’t turn those engagement ads into any sort of other ad that tries to get a lead?

Dennis: Oh, we do. We remarket those audiences.

Steve: Okay, all right.

Dennis: We’re not calling them up. It’s not like they fill out a form and then we keep calling them. It’s just like if you sign up for Salesforce, a rep will call you within like 10 seconds. Like, that’s why you never — you get your badge scanned at a conference. Never let them scan your badge because you know they’re going to keep calling you and calling you. So we do remarketing. So if people have watched multiple of our videos, then we could say, people who have watched video one for more than 10 seconds in the last 30 days, then show them video two. And video to or landing page two, or whatever the next piece of content is, could be promoting, hey, we have we 10 ways on how to do whatever.

It’s a lead magnet, and we just need your email address and we’ll send this to you. It’s free still. But you have to give me your email address so I can send the thing to you. And then when they go through our email sequence, we’ll give them a bunch of tips, we’ll give them videos, we’ll give them so much stuff. They’ll think like, wow, this is amazing. And they’ll say, hey, for $7, we have this thing on how do you hire a virtual assistant from the Philippines, that one is $7 to you? Well, heck, yeah, I got all this stuff for free. I put in my email and I continue to get all this amazing stuff for free. For $7, yeah for sure. I mean, if it’s anything like the stuff I’ve been getting for $7, Holy Molly, right.

And then from there we say, hey, would you like to learn how to use our dollar a day strategy? It’s $189. And they’re like, oh man, I’ve gotten so much value out of the $7, I think I’ll — yeah, I mean 189, my goodness, it comes with a little bit of support. It actually has tons of video lessons, it has like, it’s robust. It’s a full course, there’s a certificate, I can earn, there’s quizzes and exercises like, yeah, I think I would do that, right. Versus just starting cold saying, hey, buy my course for $189, or buy a power hour from Logan for $1,000 to optimize your ads. So what we do with — you guys understand like lead magnets are things you get for free with an email address, and the trip wire is something really cheap just to collect the dollar or two, right?

Steve: Mm-hmm yeah.

Dennis: Our best selling consulting are people who are spending say 10 grand a month with us is most of them come through by buying a course for like $99, $97 where they buy something small. The majority of people that have bought something big had bought something small first.

Steve: Do you have a gradual progression? I think you mentioned something like seven bucks first, and then 200 followed by 1,000.

Dennis: So that’s called the ascension model or some people call it an ascension path. And there’s many different price levels that you can have. You’ll see people argue in the forums on, oh, how much should your trip wire be? And a lot of people like to put trip wires at $7. And I don’t want to go into all the different arguments on how much a tripwire should be. Here’s the answer. It depends on a particular audience. So if you’re selling high end B2B software, then $1,000 could be a trip wire, right. On a million dollar package, $1,000 is the trip wire. But if you’re selling something to consumers, like learn how to play the guitar for the first time, to play an A chord and an E chord, your trip wire might be $1 or two and your course might be $17, right? So it’s all relative to the expectation of the buyer.

Steve: Okay. And then I’m just curious about your opinion on grabbing a Messenger subscriber versus an email subscriber in this day and age.

Dennis: You do both. Messenger will give you subscribers at maybe a third of the cost, but then again, I know there you can well argue with me, monkey, we’ve gone round and round. The day after he sold his company for $150 million, he spent the whole day with Logan and me, he canceled his whole schedule just to spend it with us two making videos about what to do about Facebook chat bots and the common misconceptions. But I still believe in email, right now, an email address is worth more than someone who is a subscriber in your list because you have their information. And there’s limitations on how many messages you can send and what’s promotional versus not.

However, you can have your cake and eat it too because if you set up a chat blast, or if you set up a [comment guard] [ph] where you are collecting their information with a chat bot and say, hey, comment yes, and I’ll give you the seven ways to do whatever, right. That’s a lead magnet. People comment yes, and then you give them that thing. But you say, oh, just in case we get disconnected, can I have your email address, which is a ridiculous thing to say. But that’s what happens when you’re on the phone, though. So people are like, sure here’s my phone number or here’s — and so people — I don’t remember what the opt-in rate is on that, but it’s something stupidly high like 80, 90%, right?

Steve: Really, okay, I’m not doing that right now. Okay, I’ll try that.

Dennis: And we’ll set up your mobile monkey if you want, we’re good at it. We have the inside scoop, the building features for us is really cool. So if you set up your Messenger bot, you can have your cake and eat it too, because along the way, you’re going to collect their email address. And then you have the opportunity to ask one or multiple questions and then send them down a path. So the Messenger model actually breaks the typical funnel. So when you have a sequence funnel that goes from awareness to consideration to conversion, it typically occurs over multiple weeks or months, or it goes through an email nurture sequence, it’s multiple emails. You can actually shortcut that and have it all occur in a single conversation because Messenger allows you to do that if you build out your sequences the right way.

Steve: When you mention replacing an email sequence with chat, are you talking about the interaction, or are you talking about auto responders within a chat bot?

Dennis: I’m talking about the interaction. I don’t think about chat boxes auto responders; although that’s the way most people build chatbots. They think of it as like crappy SMS, or they think of it is like, oh, I’m just going to take what I would say in an email and I’m just not jam it through a chat bot. You can’t do that because chat is so lightweight. You can’t send whole emails through chat. I mean, chat is like a few — you send a chat that’s more than a response, that’s more than a couple of sentences long and it takes up the whole window, and you can’t do that, right. So it has to be really lightweight, it has to be conversational. It has to be yes, no, A, B or C, it has to be really simplified.

Steve: I just wanted to take a moment to tell you about my brand new service that will help you grow your email list for free through group giveaways. Now, this service is called Gobrandwin.com, and we’ve had amazing results so far. In one of our last giveaways, we gathered almost 12,000 emails and grew the email lists of participating ecommerce stores by over 56% overnight. Now, does getting more customers and more emails for free sound interesting to you? Here is how it works.

If you own your own e-commerce brand, and you have a following, you contribute a gift card from your store valued at $200 or more. We will then assemble gift cards from other participating brands with a similar customer demographic and turn it into one massive sweepstakes giveaway. Now, everyone is going to send this giveaway email to their entire customer base, and drive them to a special landing page on Gobrandwin.com. We will acquire email addresses. Now consumers enter their emails, we send them special offers from your store and select a grand prize winner.

And after the sweepstakes is over, you will receive the full list of entrants and instantly grow your email list. And because my co founder and I have a pretty big network, we will also send the giveaway entry form to related influencers within the same niche and instantly augment any sweepstakes that we run. So bottom line the concept is very simple, we all help each other promote each other’s businesses, get free promotion from bloggers, and share the customer base. Now, if you’re interested in growing your email list, then head on over to Gobrandwin.com. That’s G-O-B-R-A-N-D-W-I-N.com, that’s Gobrandwin.com, and it is 100% free. Now back to the show.

Let’s take a moment since we’re getting up to 40 minutes here. Let’s take a moment to kind of just summarize everything that you’ve said so far because it’s been a lot. If you’re starting out with nothing, and you want to become an authority in your niche, you first start out by trying to get the attention of an influencer in the space that you want to pursue, right?

Dennis: Yep.

Steve: Through thoughtful communication, tweets, comments, whatever. And then try to get them into a conversation on Skype and create a small video.

Dennis: Or meet them in person at a conference.

Steve: Or meet them in person at a conference, that’s even better, right?

Dennis: Like friction, it could be friends that you know because everyone knows somebody. And if you just run into them, pull out your phone and be ready for that one minute video. Be ready for the topic. If you’ve mapped out your six topics that you care about, which we call your topic wheel, then you’re Johnny on the spot and ready to go. The worst thing is you’re about to meet someone well known or you didn’t know they’re going to be there and you don’t have anything to say, you’ve wasted that opportunity. You need to have those topics you care about mapped out in advance; it’s too late to try to make it up on the spot. It’s not going to come out the way you want.

Steve: Do you need permission before you show a video of an influencer in an ad?

Dennis: Well, I’d like to interview you for a one minute video. And they say yes, that’s called lightweight consent. It’s verbal consent, and it’s legal.

Steve: Okay. And then you put out an engagement ad, and you’re looking for metrics such as 20 cents for a 10 second view.

Dennis: Five cents for a 10 second view so you can get…

Steve: Oh, five cents, okay.

Dennis: Well, or even for dollar because we’re talking about a $1 day and you’re going to put that video or put that post or put that picture of you and that person on your public figure page, not your profile, but on a business page that has your name as the name of the page just like mine, right? If you go to fb.com/getfound, you you’ll see that that’s my public figure page, fb.com/DennisYu is my profile, the one that has a blue checkmark.

Steve: What is the difference between having a public figure page versus just your personal page?

Dennis: There’s only one page. You have a profile. As a user, you log into Facebook, and you have friends. And that’s called the profile. You don’t have analytics. You can’t boost posts. You can’t do things that happen on a business page. A page is a business page. There’s many categories of business pages. There’s restaurants, and brands and nonprofits and celebrities. And there’s one called a pop up with figure, one type of business page called public figure, which looks like you, it has your name, it has your picture, it looks just like a profile. But instead of friends, it has fans and you have the ability to run ads and do analytics and all the kinds of things that you can do on a page, right?

Steve: And what is the distinction between boosting a post versus using ad manager and running an ad manually?

Dennis: Well, ads manager allows you to choose from a broad range of objectives, like you want to drive for conversions, you want leads, you want to get video views, you want check ins you want offers. There’s all kinds of things that you can do with ads manager, if you want to sit down and actually build complex ad campaigns. However, most of us, including me, will just post stuff on our public figure page. And then we’ll just hit the boost button, right? The boost button is right there in the timeline. And then you hit boost. When you hit boost, the default, this is objective, is engagement. I mean, you can sometimes choose messages or if you want to drive video views, but I’d like to keep it on engagement.

And then you just choose who your audience is and choose the budget. And that’s the easiest way to get started. You don’t have to go to ads manager, you can boost right from your page’s manager on your phone right from your Facebook app, right? You open up Facebook and see what’s going on. In your pages there, you can boost from right there. You don’t have to go on to your desktop. And there’s no more Power Editor anymore, but you don’t have to do anything fancy.

Steve: And that is equivalent to doing the exact same thing in the ads manager.

Dennis: Yeah, it’s the same thing as driving engagement.

Steve: Right, okay. And then once we have some engagement, we want to retarget those folks into some sort of lead magnet followed by some sort of trip wire followed by a gradual ascension into larger offers.

Dennis: Yeah, so Steve, and everyone else who’s listening, if you made it this far, you’re going to have multiple posts that you’re boosting, you’re going to put a $1 day against each of them for seven days. So each post you are spending $7 and you may have to put out 15, 20, 100 of them. And you’ll find that 5% to 10% of them will become winners. And then these winners, you’re going to put for a $1 a day for 365 days, or $2 a day for 365 days when it’s generating high engagement. And you can tell, once you’ve got 10 or 15 of these posts out, you can tell which ones are doing well, and which ones suck. And usually the ones that you think are awesome are the ones that are going to suck. And the ones you think are they are whatever, those are the ones that actually do really well.

But let the numbers tell, don’t just put post out there, and just keep posting and posting and not extending the boosts. What you want to find is eventually you have these winners. We have some posts that are three years old that are still boosted and they’re fantastic. It’s the greatest hits model. And when you have a library of these greatest hits you’re going to – you know if you are Guns N Roses you’re going to play Paradise City over and over, people want to hear and we actually saw Guns and Roses in concert a few months ago because MGM Resorts International is a client of ours so we get to go to concerts and stay in hotels for free and all that. But yeah, think your greatest hits.

Steve: So Dennis, where can people find you if they want more information?

Dennis: The best way to find me to learn about Facebook stuff is to look me up on LinkedIn because I’m at the 5,000 friend limit. So don’t friend request me unless you actually know me, because I have so many of them, I’m not going to know, just connect with me on LinkedIn. The LinkedIn limit is I think like 28,000 and I’m only halfway there, I’m at 15,000 so there’s plenty of room.

Steve: And watch out, if you ever end up landing on one of Dennis’s sights, you will see his posts in your Facebook feed forever.

Dennis: Hey, if you buy our stuff, then you’ll be in some of our negative targeting so you won’t see it, so get on our feed and buy one of our courses, buy like the standards of excellence for $25, and then you won’t have to see a lot of these things.

Steve: And I want to give Stelzner a plug here too since this is how we met. If you want to meet Denis in person, head on over to Social Media Marketing World. I found you walking around the halls randomly too at times.

Dennis: Awesome

Steve: All right, hey Dennis thanks a lot for coming on the show, really appreciate your time.

Dennis: Awesome Steve, thank you.

Steve: All right.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Dennis is just one of those guys who is great at everything related to marketing and it’s all derived from experience. And his strategies are so intuitive that you end up hating yourself wondering why you haven’t been following Dennis a long time ago. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode235.

And once again I want to thank Klaviyo for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for e-commerce merchants and you can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post-purchase flow, a win-back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on autopilot. So, head on over to Mywifequitherjob.com/ K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s Mywifequitherjob.com/ K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. If you want to give it a try, it is free. So head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

Now, I talk about how I use all these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email, and I’ll send you the course right away, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

236: The Fastest Way To Make 5K/Month From Scratch With Greg Mercer, Mike Jackness And Scott Voelker

The Fastest Way To Make 5K/Month From Scratch With Greg Mercer, Mike Jackness And Scott Voelker

Today I’ve got my buddies Greg Mercer, Scott Voelker and Mike Jackness back on the show. If you listened to last week’s episode, we were all together in San Diego to film the 5 Minute Pitch and while we were together, we recorded a couple of podcasts.

Anyway, today we’re going to collectively answer a question that I get asked all the time. If we were to start all over again, what would be our fastest way to make $5000/month. You’ll be surprised at some of the answers. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to make $5K/month with only $5k in starting capital
  • How I personally would make $5K with no money at all
  • How to build an audience
  • Is ecommerce the best way to go?

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

GoBrandWin.com – The fastest and most effective way to grow your email list for free using group giveaways. Click here to signup for free.

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and dig deep into what strategies they use to grow their businesses. And today, I’ve got my buddies, Greg Mercer, Scott Voelker, and Mike Jackness back on the show. And if you listened to last week’s episode, we were all together in San Diego to film the 5 Minute Pitch. And while we were together, we recorded a couple of podcasts. Anyway, today, what we’re going to do is we’re going to collectively answer a question that I get asked all the time. If we were to start all over again, what would be our fastest way to make $5,000 per month, and you’ll be surprised at some of the answer. So stay tuned.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Privy who is a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. And right now I’m using Privy to display a cool Wheel of Fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prizes in my store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this and when I implemented this form email signups increased by 131%.

You can also use Privy to reduce cart abandonment with cart saver pop ups and abandoned email sequences as well at one super low price that is much cheaper than using a full blown email marketing solution. So bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers and recover lost sales. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ For 15% off. Once again that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is also a sponsor of the show. Always blessed to have Klaviyo as a sponsor because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my e-commerce store, and I depend on them for over 30% of my revenues. And right now over the holiday season, it’s close to 35%. Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here is why it is so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought. So let’s say I want to send out an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special auto-responder sequence to my customers depending on what they bought, piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email sent. Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you could try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O. Once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Scott: All right guys, I’m out here on a back patio looking at the ocean once again, with my good friends. I figured you know what, we’re in town. We got to actually get together and record an episode, another episode. All right, here’s what I want to do. I’m going to ask a question and this is going to be a speed round. I want to know what you would do right now with all of the information that you know, everything that you’ve gained, but you only have $5,000 to start your new business. What would you do with that money? What kind of actions would you take? And how soon do you think you could get to $5,000 in profit per month?

Mike: Okay, this is interesting. I didn’t know what the question was going to be until you asked it. So I’m stalling for time for just one second. But I know the answer. I know the answer. Number one, the things I’ve had the most success with in my life is the things I’m really passionate about. If I start doing something just for the business aspect of it, of just to make money or make a business that’s going to — just for the money, it doesn’t ever work as well. I’ve had success with it but it doesn’t work as well from my happiness quotient. And ultimately, it doesn’t work as well, from a long term profitability, and other parts of it.

So the things I will get into will be things that mimic my life to what I would be doing anyway, things that I already have an immense personal passion in. So for me, it’s traveling, I like playing tennis, scuba diving, whatever it might be, everyone’s thing is a little bit different. I’m not saying backpacking is the only thing I really enjoy doing. But I would be doing something for sure that’s involved directly with that. And the reason I know this now is because again, I’ve been doing entrepreneurship for a very long time. So I think back to when I was doing online poker, I was super passionate about poker. And it never felt like a day of work versus what I do now, even though I still enjoy what I do, it feels a little bit more like work.

And if you can do things that you’re passionate about, the ultimate expertise, the subject matter expert, is you. So I would go start a blog and start building an audience. That would be my first step, because traffic and an audience and trust is always going to make you money. And now that I’ve done affiliate marketing, SEO, content marketing, YouTube, ecommerce, all these different things run very well to making money via that audience, and that traffic. And I would really laser focus in on doing that, and stick with it for a long enough period of time, until you start seeing that success because most people give up too soon.

Scott: I’ve got a question. I’m going to come in here. Okay, that’s a great strategy. And I love that strategy. But what is your first monetization from that? And how soon would you expect to see something? If you didn’t, where would you be disappointed?

Mike: So that’s a great question. And I have, I think, a good answer for this; because this has taken some time to like, really fully understand. I think the first monetization spot should be affiliate marketing. Use something that’s already out there to establish a baseline of need, or success or purchases, whatever you want to use as a counter. They’ve already got the thing out there; it doesn’t have to be the perfect fit. But whether it’s someone else’s product, physical product, course product, service, whatever, you put an affiliate link on a page, and you see people going towards those things.

You look at your entire site, and all those different pieces of data, and then the thing that’s been the most successful with someone else’s product is right for you to develop and make your own thing there. Again, whether it’s a course or a physical product, or whatever it might be, you know that you already have a built in chance of success that’s way, way over 50%, whatever it is, is probably closer to 100%. It can never be 100%, but you use those data points before you start leaping into the unknown.

Greg: My answer is going to be a little bit different than Mike’s as to be expected. After watching all of the 5 Minute Pitch contestants, I’m pretty high right now on trying to invent something. So if I were to start all over, I had $5,000 to spend, which is it’s a good amount of starting capital. With some smarts and 5,000 bucks, I would try to invent a physical product or make significant improvements to a physical product in an area that I would consider myself like a little bit of an expert in. And I am definitely a tinkerer and a creator by nature, and that’s why this intrigues me right now.

But let’s use an example. For example, I enjoy playing beach volleyball. And one of the things that we often deal with is the net gets saggy and I work around those people who have created like these ratchet straps, or they just use ratchet strap. So you’d use like in the bed of your truck, or whatever, to just like tighten down the net. And really like those ratchet straps can be built into a volleyball net. That’s something that think could be created. It could be patented. With $5,000, you could definitely get started on that. And I think that’s what I’d probably do.

Mike: Let me ask you a question real quick, right? If you were to take my strategy and mirror it with your strategy where you build an audience first and have people that are following you because of volleyball that’s already there, it’s a built in audience and then you launch that invention, that’s like just fuel on that fire.

Greg: Absolutely fuel in the fire. If you have a large audience, it’s pretty easy to launch anything whether that be an info product or a physical product or a software product. I don’t know what other kinds of products. But creating an audience is pretty dang hard and it’s a long play. I would say – one of Scott’s questions was how soon do you think you would be able to receive or have $5,000 in profit. And I think by building a physical product and starting to sell it right away; I would see $5,000 in profit before I’d be able to build up a large enough audience that I could sell them something to receive that amount of money.

Steve: I disagree. So I don’t even need five grand. In fact, I had a student in my class who read one of my posts on how I made a lot of money doing a webinar. So what he did is he just ran some Facebook ads. I think he only had like 80 people and he did a webinar and he ended up making like $4,200, just like that selling, I think the content was actually the webinar or more of the webinar or more detail after that.

Greg: This is what you do, though, if you had to start all over, you’d run Facebook ads to a landing page to capture emails to run a webinar.

Steve: So I’m going to just take it. If I didn’t have any money at all, here’s what I would do.

Greg: You have $5,000 Steve.

Steve: I don’t need the 5,000. Some people out there that are listening don’t even have 5,000. Is that right Scott?

Scott: That is true.

Steve: Yeah, right. All right, so here’s what I’d do. I have a friend that did this. He just went on a popular forum. And he’d start posting these really long posts that people would read. And then all of a sudden, when people read those posts, they would comment on them, ask him questions. And all of a sudden, he became an authority within that forum. And then all of a sudden, people started asking him for advice. And he created a class and all of a sudden, people from that forum started signing up for his class, he didn’t even have his own audience or his own website.

Mike: I love all the different strategies and ideas here. And I think that they’re all coming from a little bit different point of view. For me, the reason the strategy that I mentioned is what I mentioned is because at this point in my life, I’m thinking about a very long term defensible business. And I’m not concerned with the amount of time necessarily that it takes to get there. And there’s obviously a much different point of view, where like, if you said, Mike, you have $5,000, and you have no home and you have no other belongings, I’m just giving you 5K, and you got to like, go out and be scrappy, and survive, that’s going to be a much different set of criteria.

But if I’m where I’m at now, and I’m just starting over trying to build a business for a long term defensibility and success, I would go with that strategy. If you’re looking to make money as quickly as possible; I love what you just said Steve. It’s like a really great strategy.

Greg: You guys might be getting off the question now though. Scott, can you remind us what the question was?

Scott: Yeah, you have $5,000, Steve doesn’t need it. So he’s going to give it to you. So you have $5,000, and you want to start a business that can make $5,000 in profit the quickest. That’s what I’m looking at. So let me give you my answer. And I believe that kind of a hybrid of what you’re talking about, Mike, I’ve done this. That’s why I say I’ve learned it, it works, I can speed up the process now. Again, this won’t work for you if you don’t want to be an audience or if you don’t want to gain an audience and if you don’t want to be the front of the camera. Some people don’t want to be, they just want to build a business on the back end, and then that’s it. Maybe you want to be an inventor like Greg said, and you just want to be that person and just come out with a really killer product that just blows up because everybody wants it, because it’s just awesome.

Me personally, it is building an audience. But the way that I would do that is I would put something out there, and in this case, I would probably do something just to get the attention in the market like I teach right now. And I would do either a giveaway in that market, I would do something to give people or get people to raise their hand so then I can deliver my content. And when I deliver my content, it’s going to be stuff around that market. So again, if it’s in the bass fishing, I’m going to basically create around that market, because that’s what I’m doing every weekend. I’m going fishing with — I’m not, but I’m saying if I did. I’m going fishing every weekend with my son. So I’m going to record that stuff, I’m going to report on that stuff, the lures that I’m making, all that stuff.

And in the meanwhile, while I’m doing that, I’m also going to be doing the affiliate marketing thing like Steve said, like you said. I’m going to be using the affiliate stuff, because it’s the easiest way to basically make a sale without having to have a product, right? With Greg’s strategy, I like that strategy, it’s going to be a little bit of a longer strategy to do to do that whole process unless we’re just going to modify a little bit. If we’re just going to modify a little bit, that’s fine, inventing, a little bit longer of a strategy. But I agree, if you can do that, have your own product, and then you’re going to also do the actual, how you’re going to get the attention in the market for that thing, I think that becomes the challenge unless you have an audience.

Here is what I’ve learned, okay, been at this for over 15 years, whether it’s for my photography business, when my wife and I built a brick and mortar business, we built a little email list of people that came to our studio, didn’t even know what we were doing using like Outlook and we would just blind copy, that was our email blast. And we would sell out our entire fourth quarter photography sessions. We had no spots available, we would book solid because we built an audience.

We built an audience locally of people that trusted us, they wanted us, they didn’t want anyone else, then I took it to the online space. I did the digital photography stuff there, built an audience, trust, sold stuff very easily. Build an audience, know, like, and trust, you can sell anything you want as long as the audience wants it, but you all know that. That’s the easiest way for me because that’s what I know and that’s what’s worked for me. It doesn’t mean it’s going to work for everyone. Greg is a little bit different.

Mike: So I mean, the one thing I want to say just about Greg strategy, you kind of mentioned it Scott, it kind of picked my thought process here. I don’t know that everyone can be an inventor, and I’m going to throw myself under the bus here. I’m just not creative enough when it comes to that type of thing. I don’t feel like I can be the inventor type. I can sit there and dream about this for a year, and probably not come up with an invention.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Ahrefs for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I’m a huge fan of their tool and in my opinion Ahrefs is the best all in one SEO tool out there to rank in Google search. And recently, I completed a search engine site audit for mywifequitherjob.com and Bumblebeelinens.com and Ahrefs was indispensable. For example, I used Ahrefs to do a deep dive into all my posts to find the highest volume, lowest competition keywords to target in search. And in fact, recently, I used Ahrefs to rank a blog post in Google from position 20 to position five for a big time keyword in the span of just one month by switching around my title and H1 tags.

I also use Ahrefs to spy my competitors’ sites to see what keywords they are ranking for, and then I write a more comprehensive post and eventually outrank them in search. Now those of you who know me know that I hate spending money on tools, but I actually pay for Ahrefs and that should say something in itself. Right now, I’m giving away nine three month Ahrefs memberships for free. To sign up, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway, once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway to win a three month Ahrefs membership. Now back to the show.

Scott: Totally. But back to the question was what would each of us do. So that’s what I do. That’s what I’m pretty excited about right now. I love having an audience and having someone I can promote products to. But it’s not easy to build up an audience even if you’re trying to go like Steve said, and create long forum posts every day and work on that all day. That takes like sitting in front of the computer and writing all day. Let’s not discount the fact that it is hard work and is difficult to build up a large audience, which is part of it. But the cool thing about this and what I’m just reminded of when I was listening to everyone’s, there’s lots of different ways to skin the cat here, a lot of different ways because…

Steve: I just want to reference your story Greg. When you first started out with Jungle Scout, you didn’t have an audience at all, right. Instead, what he did is he befriended the three of us and he leveraged our audiences to promote his tool.

Scott: Well, you know though, but he did, he more or less created a product that people wanted. Once people started using it, they started to share it. So there wasn’t really much of a need for building the audience. The audience was actually being built by the want of the tool that was doing the job. So in a sense, Greg is an inventor, right? He’s a creator, he’s an inventor. You are as well, I mean, you’ve done some of your own as far as building, you love building things, you don’t like spending money on tools. I’m surprised you didn’t build your own Jungle Scout extension and just having it running in the background. But we’ve been reminded of that time and time again, although you did pick up the check the other day, which is pretty impressive. Yeah, yes, he did.

Steve: All right, first of all, guys, I’m cheap with myself not with you guys although if Greg didn’t give me Jungle Scout for free, I might have developed it.

Scott: Yeah, I mean, I agree with Greg, though. I mean, there’s so many different ways you can do it. That’s why people are like, I tried this one thing, and it just doesn’t work for me. Well, you might not have given it enough time; you might not have found your thing. I think you need to play. I think you need to experiment. I think you need to play in the sandbox and see what works for you, and understand that as you’re doing this, you’re learning, you’re growing, you’re constantly seeing what resonates with you. Not everyone wants to spend the time to build an audience or even build traffic to a blog. I think the other strategy here is take 12 to 18 months, do some good keyword research, build a blog with content that people are searching for and get traffic and then just put ads on it. Like, that’s a strategy, right? You don’t even have to be the front of it to do that.

Mike: I think the one strategy that probably doesn’t work is the get rich quick. You got to put the work in. I mean, Steve probably mentioned the most get rich quick thing, not that I mean, with just you basically make a webinar and launch some Facebook ads to it. But if you want a business that’s got longevity and going to be around for a substantial amount of time, there are no shortcuts. You got to put the hard work in, you got to deliver a product, a service, content, whatever it is, an invention that is better than what else is out there already and that people want.

Scott: Well, talking to Steve’s point though, like okay, the way he described it, he made it sound like, oh, just did this, and he did that. The guy is knowledgeable on the topic. So if you’re going into a place, you’re being knowledgeable, you’re being helpful, and then you brought people over because, like let’s think about this. If I’m sitting there playing tennis, and someone comes up to me and goes hey, you want our free 25 minute lesson? I’m like, yeah. And then they show me the lesson. And I feel like oh, my gosh, like this guy is awesome, he is teaching me a whole bunch things. I’m going to be like; can you give me more lessons?

That’s kind of what Steve is saying. Like, he just added value. The people were like, hey yo, can you give me more. He’s like, yeah, I’ll teach you free, goes over to a webinar. If it’s done right, it makes sense, right? But webinars have gotten so much bad rap, because there is a lot of scammy spammy crap out there on the internet.

Steve: It’s not really get rich quick, either. It takes you time to develop the skills to one, find something that you can teach. And then the presentation and communication skills takes a lot of time. So it’s definitely not get rich quick. I know for myself, I always — I don’t take on any project unless I’m willing to do it for three to five years minimum. And so that way, I don’t accidentally give up early. I’m just going to do this thing.

Scott: And that’s kind of what you did with your blog for My Wife Quit Her Job, right? That’s great advice man, seriously.

Scott: Yeah, absolutely. I didn’t see money until the three year mark. And my mom was just telling me, dude, you got the Stanford [inaudible 00:20:07] — why the hell are you writing for a blog and making no money? And you’re thinking about quitting your engineering job? So I used to get this all the time. She’s like; I’m not going to read your blog.

Mike: Yeah, well, and I’m going to say this real quick. I mean, like, I think all of us have experienced this exact thing, right? I mean, like, all of us, 2, 3, 4 years or whatever, of writing content and doing thing, I mean, Greg had some instant success with some of the Jungle Scout stuff. So like, on the more content side, I mean multiple years, right for TAS?

Scott: Oh, yeah. Well, I was going to bring up that point like TAS when I started that thing; I had started two other podcasts that didn’t go anywhere. One was in fitness, and one was in just basically marketing in general. It wasn’t niched down. But then I’d seen an opportunity that I could help people in a specific spot and there wasn’t anyone else doing it. I didn’t make $1 up until 56 episodes. 56, you know what episode that was, the one with Greg. That was when I first announced his extension. And that was my first dollar. I don’t know if you knew that. Did that that you know that? That you were my first dollar? Yeah, you were my first dollar.

My first dollar I ever made from TAS was from promoting and mentioning Greg and Greg was on episode 56. That was the start of it for me. And then it kind of grew from there. But it took 56 episodes. I didn’t press it. I didn’t push it. I just continued to show up. I knew that I was helping. And I knew that I was helping because I was getting the reward of people telling me that it was helpful. So I knew I was onto something, right. I didn’t know how I was going to monetize. Zero idea. You didn’t have an idea when you started your blog?

Steve: No, I didn’t get any rewards either, though.

Scott: Yeah, you see now, you had crickets, right?

Steve: Yeah, I had crickets for sure. Oh, it took me to make like $1.

Scott: Yeah, how long did you take to make $1 on that blog?

Steve: Probably a year and a half. That was through AdSense.

Scott: Yeah. AdSense, which is a lot of money you make from AdSense.

Steve: I waited a long time for that first check. This is just an aside. But if you want to see Scott, the old fitness product, just go to images.google.com and type in Scott Voelker and you’ll see some interesting pictures.

Scott: Oh, going there. I’m going to have to edit that one out.

Mike: Not to toot my own horn here. But this is exactly what I was saying, write content, build an audience, eventually the money will come. There’s three really good examples here with My Wife Quit Her Job, The Amazing Seller, EcomCrew.

Scott: Well, Jungle Scout has built a pretty damn good audience as well.

Mike: That was after I think. I don’t want to speak for Greg.

Scott: I remember Greg, actually, you talking to me, asking me about like, if I had someone that I was looking at that would help create content. And at the time I was like, no, I’m kind of just doing it myself; I want to look for someone. And then you just went gangbusters.

Mike: So Greg, how long did it take you to build an audience as far as the content part goes?

Greg: Yeah, I guess the plan, I didn’t start with like, the plan of, oh, I’m going to build an audience. That was never kind of the goal. The goal was we create this offer product that help people and then we realized they also had a whole bunch of questions. So we were just like, posting content to help answer their questions. It was never really like with the goal of like, I don’t think I ever sat down at like a strategy meeting with myself and thinking and said, hey, like, I’m going to create an audience. It’s like, no; we’re just going to create a whole bunch of really helpful stuff that people enjoy. And then later we put an email opt in there and before you know you start to kind of create an audience around it.

Scott: It’s a good point. All right, so anything else you want to add? I know I wanted to make this a lightning round. We are ready for dinner I think here soon. I think this is good stuff though. Like this here, this random like roundtable stuff for people to hear. After the stuff that we’ve been through, we’ve all got different ideas, different perspectives, so I want people to understand that it doesn’t have to be our idea. It just has to be going out there, doing something, what do I always say, take action and do something, and see what happens.

Mike: Yeah, I think that this is gold like what we just kind of this round table, this is four entrepreneurs that have been through a lot in their lives and their career. This is the type of stuff that people pay like 10K to go to a mastermind to hear this kind of stuff. Hit repeat on this and listen to this a couple of times.

Scott: Yeah, absolutely. All right guys, we’re good.

Mike: We’re good. Let’s go eat some food.

Scott: All right.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. As you can probably tell, the four of us are drastically different which is what’s going to make our new show the 5 Minute Pitch so interesting to watch because we all have our own unique perspectives. If you want to get updates about the show, head on over to 5MinutePitch.com. And we’re actually taking applications for the next season already, so go sign up now. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode236.

And once again I want to thank Klaviyo for sponsoring this episode. Klaviyo is my email marketing platform of choice for e-commerce merchants and you can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post-purchase flow, a win-back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on autopilot. So, head on over to Mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again that’s Mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode as well. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. If you want to give it a try, it is free. So head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

Now, I talk about how I use all these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own ecommerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email, and I’ll send you the course right away, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

235: How To Succeed In Ecommerce Today With Greg Mercer, Mike Jackness And Scott Voelker

234:  What It Takes To Succeed In Ecommerce Today With Greg Mercer, Mike Jackness And Scott Voelker

I just got back from San Diego, California where I spent 3 straight, grueling days filming The 5 Minute Pitch, our new Shark Tank like show, with Mike Jackness, Greg Mercer, Scott Voelker and a variety of awesome guest judges to be announced later.

Anyway, the four of us recorded this podcast on the very last day of filming to reflect upon the 32 companies that just pitched to us. And we discuss what it takes to succeed in ecommerce today. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • What is takes to succeed in ecommerce today
  • Should you double down on what’s working or diversify?
  • Can you get by selling commodity products?
  • The most important factor for success

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

Ahrefs.com – The best all in one SEO tool out there that I personally use to improve my search rankings for my blog and my online store. Click here to win a FREE 3 month membership.
ahrefs

GoBrandWin.com – The fastest and most effective way to grow your email list for free using group giveaways. Click here to signup for free.

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Episode5MPPt1Final2

Intro: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into the strategies they use to grow their businesses. So I just got back from San Diego, California, where I spent three straight grueling days filming the 5 Minute Pitch, our new Shark Tank like show with Mike Jackness, Greg Mercer, Scott Voelker and a variety of awesome guest judges to be announced later.

And over the course of these three days, we filmed over 24 hours of footage. And the first night we were actually in front of the camera from 8:30am to 11pm. Now life as a poor man’s Z list movie star is very difficult, and the four of us recorded this podcast on the very last day of filming, to kind of reflect upon the 32 contestants that just pitched to us. And we basically discuss what it takes to succeed in ecommerce today.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Super excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are my email marketing platform that I use for my ecommerce store and I depend on them for over 30% of my revenues. Klaviyo is the only email platform out there that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here is why it is so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought. So let’s say I want to send out an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special auto-responder sequence to my customers depending on what they purchased, piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email sent. Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you could try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O. Once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to give a shout out to Privy who is also a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. Now, there are a bunch of companies out there that will manage your email capture forms, but I like Privy because they specialize in ecommerce. Right now I’m using Privy to display a cool wheel of fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prices in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this. And when I implemented this form email signups increased by 131%.

I’m also using their new cart saver pop up feature to recover abandoned carts as well. Bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers, which I then feed to my email provider to close the sale. So head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Scott: All right. Here we go fellows, sitting now here in San Diego out on a patio, might be a little helicopter noise but we’ll get through it. Get that mic a little closer to you, Mike.

Mike: Okay, here we go.

Scott: Mike, get it closer to your face. So we have Mr. Steve Chou, Chou. It’s sexy Chou but someone [overlapping 00:03:09] this is inside joke. We have Mr. Mercer here. Mr. Greg Mercer. We have Mr. Steve Jackness. I mean, Mike Jackness…

Mike: That’s another inside joke.

Scott: In the house and of course, myself.

Mike: We all did it though. That was what’s funny.

Scott: It is, it is. Well, we had each other on each other’s podcasts. And we talked about this 5 Minute Pitch thing.

Mike: Now it’s a wrap.

Scott: It’s a wrap. We’re sitting here having a couple of cocktails and getting ready for dinner actually, we’re actually waiting for dinner; we’re going to go get dinner. But we wrapped up, and we had three days together and…

Mike: It was a lot of fun.

Scott: A lot of fun. But man, I’ll tell you what, it was a lot of words, a lot of work.

Mike: But they always say when you’re having fun, you’re not working.

Scott: That is true. That is true. What I want to do here though, is while it’s fresh in all of our heads; we got to spend some time with some really awesome bootstrapped businesses. A lot of them are bootstrapped. Some of them were pre revenue; some of them were already making some really great money. What I want to do is kind of talk about like this space, it’s changed since three years ago, probably a year and a half ago. What do we like about what we’ve seen? What do we feel like is the essentials to being successful with a bootstrapped business? Like can it still be done?

Mike: 100% can still be done. We just saw twenty something of the 32 companies that are crushing it. So that obviously can still be done. A lot of them are still young. The thing I think that’s really key to your question is, I think the most important thing now is uniqueness and defensibility. It cannot be in any way shape, or form a “me too” product. You have to have something with some intellectual property, something that’s defensible, because you’re really creator, or it’s really hard to knock off. I think those are probably the keys in my mind.

Scott: I agree with that. And it was fun seeing all these different businesses, right? A lot of different types of businesses, we saw software businesses, we saw marketplaces, people who invented their own products with patents, and similar we liked some me to businesses, right. I would say that Amazon is still a great place to get started. I think we saw that with a lot of our contestants when they were trying to get started. They were trying to make those first few dollars, Amazon’s by I think everyone would agree that it’s a great, easy place to get started, then you can pivot into something else. What are your thoughts Steve?

Steve: I was surprised at how swayed I was at someone’s personality. Like, I went into some of these pitches thinking well, without giving away the product, it was a commodity product, really saturated, and I was ready to write it off right away. But this guy’s personality and the fact that he just put so much passion into his presentation really swayed me. And so it just reminded me of the importance of really putting yourself out there as like a personal brand in front of your products, which will make everything a lot more successful.

Scott: That was definitely a common theme, wasn’t it? All of the ones that were doing well are around the tips to companies that maybe weren’t doing as well or need to improve was, it helps to have a face to a brand is someone that can get out there and that can be relatable, and someone who you want to purchase from.

Steve: It even overcame the numbers in a lot of cases, right? Sometimes the numbers didn’t really add up but the guy’s personality just put it through or gals.

Scott: Yeah, we had an equal number of guys and gals. We did which was really exciting. And there were some very successful women actually. And there’s one and I’m not going to give it away. If you guys want to follow along, you better go over to 5MinutePitch.com and sign up over there. You can’t obviously enter the contest anymore. But you can sign up to get notifications when we air new episodes, it’s going to be a full season, it’s going to be amazing. It’s going to be exciting. And you’re going to learn a lot through this process too, because as you hear us kind of give advice or even just feedback, you can kind of learn. There’s one business in particular came in with an idea.

Now, he didn’t make it through, almost made it through, he made it through the first round. But he didn’t move on because we almost gave him the advice to pivot and switch gears a little bit, which he took. And he did do that. But I think it’s also being someone that doesn’t marry to an idea. Or if you’re that early, can you rebrand or can you switch and pivot and I think you can. But I really just think that if you have not even just the face, but if you have the presence in the market, if you have a me to product, I still think you can sell that product, if you are the one that people are going to want to buy from.

Mike: Yeah, I mean, at the end of the day, almost everything in some way shape or form is a “me too” product because like everything, almost everything has been invented. There’s still things that get invented but there’s very few people that really do that. It was definitely pervasive with the personalities. There was some awesome stories, there was one guy that was talking, again, I don’t want to give things away. But the story…

Scott: Go to 5 Minute Pitch to check out.

Mike: Go to 5 MinutePitch.com, sign up today to be notified. But this guy was talking about how he like went down to the pool [ph] and like put the inventory in the back of a U-Haul truck that he rented. And like you got to be willing to hustle and go all in, in your business. And it definitely that was a theme throughout the entire thing.

Greg: Another common thread that I really picked up on is people who create a brand or market their product that is very much like a powerful or even sometimes like one sided tight brands. I don’t know great words to describe this. But let me give an example. If you were selling soap, for example…

Steve: I was going to use the same example, go on.

Greg: And if you said that this soap is only for tough men or girly hands can’t take this soap or being very binary and like almost creating enemies in your branding but at the same time creating a like lawyer passionate following. So they feel like they fit inside of the area that you’re marketing to, I really like companies like that, especially in saturated or just very competitive niches.

Steve: One thing that really hit me, and I got affected a lot by the personality of the person presenting. One guy, he had a spotty internet connection and it was a wireless connection. So he actually went out in the middle, bought 150 feet of Cat 5 cable, wired his house for internet so that he can participate in the 5 Minute Pitch. And as soon as I heard that story, I was like, man, I love this guy. I know he’s going to succeed.

Scott: Yeah, again, we heard a lot of stories of people that could have just given up. There’s one in particular, made it on a very, very popular TV shopping show, I won’t mention the name, we won’t give it away, and had huge success, then had a huge like obstacle. And you could have given up on that, hasn’t given up and is going to be a pretty cool little story to follow here when they’re being sent through or not sent through, they are being censored, we’ll just say that right there.

Mike: There were several companies though that you could say that about. There was someone that got into a bad cash flow situation, there was someone that – I think it was actually same person who had cancer, which is an obstacle to overcome, there was just the people running out of inventory, and like the guy I was just talking about the guy going down to the pool and doing this. Entrepreneurs, like the successful entrepreneurs are going to face adverse, I felt I faced so much diversity that I could tell you.

We don’t have time to get into all that. There’s been some really crazy stories, but you have to be willing to deal with that. And my friend Grant, who I used to do the podcast with, would say that the reason I’m successful is because I learned how to fail forward. So when you fail, you take that as a way to go forward and learn from that and become a better entrepreneur. And I saw that theme here throughout almost all of the pitches, which was really neat.

Scott: Yeah, let me ask you guys this question. And maybe we can just hand the mic around here. Like, what do you think that something that stood out from just about everybody, what was one thing that stood out to you of why they’ve even gotten to where they are, and why they’re not even afraid to even share what they’re doing publicly, because they are going to be sharing it here on the show, right? So they feel so confident in what they’re doing, they’re willing to go out there and say, you know what, I’m going to do this, and I don’t care who knows.

Steve: I think it’s because a lot of the people who are successful were actually using the products that they were developing. They were experts in their field and they found deficiencies in the tools they were using, and decided to create a better product. And the fact that they’re actually using it, they have domain knowledge over the product they’re trying to sell.

Greg: Everyone that made it through the first round, I think it’s easy to say that they were all just like pure hustlers. They just made things happen or made it work. They hit all kinds of obstacles; they had to step outside their comfort zone. But it’s like everyone shared that same trait, that they were just like hustlers. And it didn’t matter what their background was, or their education, or if they hadn’t experienced it, or whatever else. They were just driven to make it happen.

Mike: I can speak to this for personal experience. And we have a podcast. I talk about pretty much everything we do completely openly. And the reason I can do that confidently is because I feel like what we do as a business adds tremendous value to the product and the community, and the people we serve. And if you’re just creating a me too product and trying to “hustle” like in the more bad sense of the word where you’re just trying to buy and resell something, and just make money in a short term experience, of course, you’re going to be more guarded on what you’re talking about. But we’re creating a brand and products that our fans and customers love.

And I think that’s why the people that came on the 5 Minute Pitch here, they all exude that, right? They all had a lot of passion; add a lot of value, either by creating something really original or even taking products that weren’t necessarily original and adding a lot to those products.

Scott: I got something for you though here, because this kind of — and I want your opinion, your opinion and I’m pointing Mike, Steve, because I agree with you, but I disagree with you. Here’s what I’m saying. Okay, for myself, right now, I started a brand with a partner 18 months ago. I feel like I wouldn’t have had as much of a head start if I would have let everyone know. And I think Greg can probably speak to this, if he wants to be honest. If you’re going to build a true brand, unless you just want to show the process. If I’m just going to show you the process, I don’t care if the brand gets hacked.

It’s kind of like the niche site duel that Pat Flynn did with Spencer or Spencer did with someone else. They’ve all told me it’s been hacked, backlinks and negative backlinks, they try to bring you down; someone else tries to rip it off. If you get a head start, I agree with you. But if you were going to do that right this second today and do that from day one, I think you’d be at a disadvantage. Now these people have all started. So that’s why they’re not worried about that. But if they started from scratch, it’s going to be harder. Would you agree or disagree that it would be harder to start with publicly going out there and sharing everything you’re doing even though you have the chops. Like with ColorIt, you kind of started before you started sharing everything, correct?

Mike: We actually pretty much shared it from day one.

Scott: Did you?

Mike: I threw caution to the wind with this. I’m going to — this is not advisable. First of all, I agree with you, but let’s start there. I agree that probably it puts us at a disadvantage with sooner talking about all the things that we’re doing. It gives you an opportunity to have more people copy though. Well, that’s a great idea. Like, I’m sure as soon as the first people talking about garlic presses, soon they’re all being copied. So I get that, I really do. But I’m also at a point where we’re financially independent and secure and I’m more confident in myself. And I don’t care about that as much.

And one other thing is I don’t ever profess to sell 100% of everything in that particular niche anyway. I’m not going to sell all the colored pencils in the world or all the gel pens, and we’re cutting out our own lane. And if I let someone else catch me, I always feel like that’s my fault for not working harder or doing a better job. So I’m a little bit weird when it comes to this. But I have to agree with you. I think you’re dead on it. It puts us on a spot that we don’t need to necessarily put ourselves into.

Scott: Right. And I’m looking at Steve; he created his brand before he really…

Steve: So I got my opinion on that. And when I started My Wife Quit Her Job, my wife was actually really scared that people were going to knock off Bumblebee Linen.

Scott: Oh, yeah.

Steve: Fundamentally, there’s nothing really — there’s no IP involved in that.

Scott: But you guys are doing personalization.

Steve: We do personalization but this is even before personalization. I started the blog before that, it was just me too products. And it’s still to a certain extent is me too products even though we have our own designs now. But I was confident in just my ability just to market and I just wasn’t worried. We actually had a whole bunch of knockoffs believe or not. We had like hummingbird linens and I think — I’m not even joking and Queen Bee linens.

Scott: Queen Bee.

Steve: And people clearly that were reading the blog and that sort of thing and they even used our photos to put up a mock shop. I don’t know if they were actually selling anything there. But over the years, those guys just slowly trailed off.

Greg: I think actually hearing you three guys, what comes to mind is an idea is worthless without execution. And it doesn’t matter if they also have the idea to start Bumblebee Linens or also had the idea to sell colored pencils are coloring books, that there’s a lot of execution involved, right. These are at the end of the day still businesses and businesses are a lot of work. You have to get up every day, you have to sometimes grind and do the stuff that’s not sexy that we often don’t maybe talk about or write about. And these are just like monotonous tasks that you kind of have to do every day to grow your business.

Mike: They hear about it on a 30 minute podcast, it sounds so sexy. And then they realize like when they go try to do this for a year, how much execution it does take. And it’s a lot more work than probably they realize.

Scott: Yeah, I’m going to speak to like I said, because I get that question every now and then. Like, why are you publicly doing it? For me personally, when I went in with this partner, it’s almost now I’m trying to protect the partner because they are depending on this business, more so than I would be. So because of that and also we have an exit strategy. We didn’t want to hurt that. But I agree with you. And I’ve often thought about doing that almost like Greg’s doing like a public case study. I even thought about doing that with niche sites to be honest with you. I thought about doing a public niche site to show people how to build content, how to build an email list, how to set it up properly, how it’s going to take time, it’s going to take 12 to 18 months before you see any traffic at all. I mean, Mike, you can speak to that. I know you can as well Steve.

Steve: You see this in blogging all the time, people will just outright copy your content or just slightly reward it. But those blogs are never successful. It’s all about the brand and the person behind it, the voice.

Scott: Yeah. And I kind of want to go on that a little bit. Like how important do you think it is right now for someone and like Greg said, I agree. And I advise people start on Amazon. But that’s not where you end, that’s where you start and so the launch pad. I look at that as a launch pad, it can be a significant channel. You can make a lot of money. We have one person that we’re sending through that is making 95% of money on there, over 500 skews like 35k net a month, like a beautiful brand. Most of it is on Amazon.

But they have a pretty good product that they don’t have to worry about someone just going and ripping them off. They still could though, they still could. But how important is that, Mike that you have something that you could either blog about, or you could create content around and bring people in versus it just being the product?

Mike: Can I answer the question about Amazon just real quick.

Scott: Yeah, yeah.

Mike: Because I’m really passionate about this. I started actually off Amazon. So I’m one of the crazy ones that started doing it all off Amazon and all of us have courses and podcasts and teach this stuff. I think you’re absolutely out of your mind if you don’t get started on Amazon.

Scott: Absolutely.

Mike: If you’re getting starting in ecommerce, learning how to pick, pack, and ship and deal with logistics and labeling and customer service, and all this different traffic and everything else is a massive undertaking. You have so much other stuff you can focus on, like getting the product right and photography and building a good listing and at some point, there’ll be this crossroads where you’re going to want to grow your off Amazon channel, because you don’t want all of your eggs in one basket. But you have to have a business that’s large enough to want to diversify first. I think you have to be well in the seven figures before you hit that crossroads.

So for me, I completely agree with you, like you would want to get started Amazon, let them take care of all those headaches. You don’t even realize what those headaches are, and you can learn about those later. Worry about taking baby steps in the beginning.

Scott: What’s your thought, Steve?

Steve: I think you got to be a little bit careful. I know for the students in my class, they start on Amazon, they have some success, but then they just kind of lose track of their brand. And it’s like a drug really, it’s like a drug. So you get used to it. And that’s where the money is coming in. And you may as well just put all your fuel to the fire there. So I encourage them to once they have some traction to work on their site in the side. Just kind of build it up. Don’t divert all of your resources. Definitely, like press the Amazon channel until you’re kind of saturated or done the best that you can. But you got to think about building that brand. And that can really only be done outside.

Mike: Running a website requires you to learn how to like take payments, to launch listings on your own site, to deal with sales tax collection, to do email marketing, Facebook ads. I mean, the list goes on and on. And you can eliminate all those things if you start with the Amazon thing. And I completely agree with Steve as I was saying, this Crossroads at some point you cross over to that makes sense for your business. But if you’re getting started as a solopreneur, it’s going to be an overwhelming amount of stuff if you try to start selling off Amazon as your first point of contact.

Scott: Let me ask you guys a question that is a question I struggle with every single week. How do you decide or know when to double down more on what’s working versus diversifying, you’re trying to do more things?

Greg: All right, but wait a minute, though. Let’s ask the question. Are we talking about just business in general, are we talking about — are you alluding to if Amazon is working why don’t you just double down on Amazon versus doubling down on maybe just building your business?

Scott: I’d like to hear just like your general thinking around it. And I think that can pertain to different areas. Amazon is a good example right? The Amazon stuff comes very easily to me, it’s very easy for me to double down on it and launch more products. And if I look back at like my history as an entrepreneur, I think actually most of the mistakes I’ve made are trying to diversify more or trying to do more things or start a new project or a new whatever else instead of really doubling down on like what I’m great at. I don’t have an answer here; this is why I’m asking you smart fellows. It’s something I struggle with every week.

Steve: It really comes to a gut feel for me, and I’m just kind of a paranoid person in general. So I’m like Jackness.

Scott: You are more projected, Jack is more paranoid.

Steve: Right why do you say?

Scott: I’m going to let you keep going here. But I just want to let people go to 5MinutePitch.com because you’re going to want to sign up for this because there’s a lot of smack talk going on here.

Steve: And what’s nice is we all got different personalities.

Scott: Yeah, so continue.

Steve: And they all conflict.

Scott: Mr. Chou.

Steve: Oh, we’re talking about what, risk tolerance

Scott: Yes.

Steve: So for me, I treat everything like a drug. If I get too addicted – and my income goals aren’t as lofty as Mr. Mercer’s for example, who wants to start like a nine figure company. I just, I’m satisfied with like a seven, probably just a seven figure business. So as soon as it gets to a certain point, I want to protect that income. So that’s why it’s important for me to diversify.

Scott: Yeah, I’m very similar to you. I think you and I are both very similar. I know what Greg is saying like, if something is really working, like just double down and put more gas on it. I get that but I also look at for me, like safety net. I’m building an asset that I know is stronger than just doubling down because if I double down and I’m collecting that money, what am I doing with that money? Am I just putting it into a bank account, am I taking that money and reinvesting it? And then if I am reinvesting it, is it still dependent on the thing that I’m doubling down on?

So those are the things that I think about. Lately, I’ve been talking about basically diversifying because I want to take advantage of the opportunity but I do not want to bank on that. And if it goes away, then I’m going to feel really, really like scared in a sense, right? It’s like, oh my gosh, I bet on this one horse, I should have been probably betting on more than just the one horse.

Mike: I have a lot to say about this subject. Yeah. Scott wants to tell me to stop talking so much. That was another thing that was up.

Scott: It was, you got really chatty.

Mike: I did.

Scott: At the later parts of the day. And maybe alcohol, I don’t know.

Mike: We’ve been out here drinking a beer.

Scott: You had about a third of a beer or three quarters of a beer. So maybe you’re going to chat a little bit more, we’ll see.

Mike: Well, I’m philosophical these days. I’m philosopher Jackness now. But so the current question that Greg asked was when do you double down? And Steve was just saying I’m paranoid. And these two things actually kind of go hand in hand in some ways because when you’ve been an entrepreneur for any length of time through multiple economic cycles and just business cycles and whatever else it might be, you’re going to experience a bunch of different things. And I’ve been through a lot as I’ve been on my own doing — I quit my job in 2004. I was an entrepreneur my whole life, but I have been doing this since 2004. And I think that there’s a lot of sound philosophy behind doubling down on something that’s working, just keep on doing what’s working until one day you get your toast, or your hand on the door or whatever…

Greg: Amazon shuts you account down.

Mike: Amazon shuts your account down, that hasn’t happened but like I mean that type of a thing.

Greg: A listing gets suspended.

Mike: We have.

Greg: How does that feel?

Mike: It’s not interesting, it does not feel good, thank you.

Scott: Hold on a minute. Let me just pour a little salt on that one. How does that feel my friend?

Mike: It does not feel good. Okay. So when that type of thing happens, you get rattled, you get paranoid. And when you’re younger, just like anything else, when you’re young, you feel indestructible, and you don’t think this will happen. But when you’ve had multiple things like that happen, you start to get more paranoid, more guarded. I don’t know what the right answer is here is the bottom line. At the end of the day, I think all of us struggle with this. Like, I definitely struggle with this, like almost on a daily basis.

And there isn’t necessarily a right answer. I can say — there’s a couple of sayings like, if you chase two rabbits both will get away. And I have a propensity of trying to do too many things. And if you are doing too many things, you’re not necessarily doing one thing at the highest level or selling. But at some point, what I would say here, just to wrap it up without talking too much more…

Scott: It’s getting chattery.

Mike: It’s getting chatty. I don’t think you should diversify until you have a business you need to, until you are past your risk profile. When your risk profile gets to a point where, like if you think every day like if my business got shut down, Greg is about to say something and make fun of it. I want to just stop talking. I already know I’m going to be made fun of, all right go make fun and go ahead.

Greg: I mentioned I’m not going to make fun of you Jackness. My advice or what I just want to say here is, I think for 99.9% of the people listening this podcast right now, actually, the answer is to double down on what’s working, whatever is making them money and to do a better job at it. Again, like I get the whole paranoia and that these different things happen and whatever else, but there’s also a certain level of just devoting your brain power and your time and mental energy to other projects that probably statistically speaking are not going to be successful as whatever you’re good at and can actually make money with. So yeah, that would be my advice for everyone listening.

Steve: Funny Greg, do you actually follow your own advice, because wasn’t there a period where you were on this acquisition spree and you had all this stuff going on?

Greg: Yeah and that’s what — I started this whole thing off with saying like if I look back in my entrepreneurial career that I would say like those are actually the biggest mistakes that I’ve made that are like trying to like do more or go to do like other things instead of like really just like double, tripling down on my core strengths and what actually works really well for me.

Steve: That’s assuming that money is your goal or success in that certain avenue. I like to diversify sometimes to just build a different skill set altogether.

Scott: Yeah well, and I want to again with Greg, are we talking about let’s use an example, Amazon is working really good. I’ve got someone right now in my inner circle okay, and his whole goal before he became part of our inner circle was just continue to launch products, stay ahead by launching more products. Then all of a sudden competition is going to come in, you’re going to lose those products, you’re just going to keep staying ahead that way. And to me, you’re always going to be behind because that inventory that you can no longer sell is going to then hurt you because you can’t get rid of it because you know that that’s coming, they’re coming for you.

But if you were to diversify or at least — and again doubling down could mean doubling down on your brand. It could be like building out your external channel, it could be building out your content, building out traffic to your own site. Like our website right now for the new brand started from zero. We have over 70,000 uniques every single month and that’s growing. We’re putting AdThrive on there now, we’re going to have stuff that’s not even linked to an Amazon product, not even our own physical product, maybe $5,000 a month comes in recurring revenue now. So is that worth doubling down on?

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Ahrefs for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I’m a huge fan of their tool and in my opinion Ahrefs is the best all in one SEO tool out there to rank in Google search. And recently, I completed a search engine site audit for mywifequitherjob.com and Bumblebeelinens.com and Ahrefs was indispensable. For example, I used Ahrefs to do a deep dive into all my posts to find the highest volume, lowest competition keywords to target in search. And in fact, recently, I used Ahrefs to rank a blog post in Google from position 20 to position five for a big time keyword in the span of just one month by switching around my title and H1 tags.

I also use Ahrefs to spy my competitors’ sites to see what keywords they are ranking for, and then I write a more comprehensive post and eventually outrank them in search. Now those of you who know me know that I hate spending money on tools, but I actually pay for Ahrefs and that should say something in itself. Right now, I’m giving away nine three month Ahrefs’s memberships for free. To sign up, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway, once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/giveaway to win a three month a trust membership. Now back to the show.

Greg: There’s no right or wrong answer with these and that’s what makes it so hard. And that’s why I want to get the…

Scott: I love it.

Greg: Absolutely. And that’s why I want to get you guys is like thinking behind it or maybe just how you think about these different obstacles. Because I think this is actually fundamentally one of the most challenging questions or one of the most challenging things that entrepreneurs run into. And we saw all throughout the 5 Minute Pitch. We saw different people, for some people, I was like, don’t launch that second product. Like you haven’t even given the first product what it deserves yet. You need to still give that some more love and get it some more customers and whatever else. And then there were other people that I was like, man, that’s going really well, whatever else, it makes sense now, kind of try to do this other thing. And it’s a very, very challenging question. I’d like to start with that, I struggle with it every single week.

Mike: I think that a lot of entrepreneurs struggle from shiny object syndrome. And if there’s one thing that’s probably got me in trouble over all these years is that. So I’ve been like laser focused on ecommerce over the last like seven almost seven years, six years. And it’s really helped. I mean, like, just sticking with. Now, obviously, like, we’ve got multiple brands, we got a lot going on within ecommerce but at least I’m staying focused within ecommerce. And I have not allowed myself to get sucked into other things even though there’s been a lot of really interesting and cool opportunities; I’ve been trying to stay within one field at least. And even then, I’m not saying I’ve done everything right. But shiny object syndrome is definitely always…

Greg: I was just thinking though, I know about a podcast, a course…

Mike: It’s all ecommerce. I’m going to defend it; I’m not saying it’s going to be…

Steve: It’s like saying I’m doing all this stuff, but it’s still business. It’s just business, right.

Mike: I mean, it’s fine. I get it. I like the criticism, we can talk about more about this offline because…

Scott: Off line, let’s talk about it now.

Mike: We can talk about now, let’s talk about it now. You guys can grill me now if you want. But there’s a lot to be said. I mean I get more fulfillment from doing the podcast. The podcast has led to this. Like if it wasn’t for that…

Scott: I have a question for you because I get this question. So if that’s the case, and you enjoy like building businesses, why don’t you just build like more businesses? Why do the podcast? Why do ecommerce? Like courses and training? I get that a lot. Like, why don’t you just go build 10 businesses?

Mike: That’s not easy, building a business is not easy.

Scott: It’s not, and my answer always and I want your take on this and all of you really is like, and it sounds kind of cheesy, and all that. But when you can have an impact on someone else’s business that actually allows them to have, that’s pretty awesome. And I’ve got a guy in the inner circle as well, that he employs very similar to one of our contestants, employs stay at home moms. So the bigger we grow his business, the more stay at home moms he employs. Why wouldn’t I be proud of that? Like, why wouldn’t that feel good. But that can play into your mind too, because you get the haters and all that stuff. But what’s your thoughts on that? Why are you doing that? You want to just make money, don’t you, Mike?

Mike: Well, the problem is that I do, everybody wants money, but I can tell you that it’s become less and less of a factor because and this can go off on a huge tangent, but there’s like the money to happiness quotient, and you get diminishing returns very quickly. Like, the more you make, you just want more stuff. And eventually, things don’t make you happy. And I’ve been through…

Scott: I agree with that.

Mike: Yeah. So I can tell you the things that give me immense satisfaction are actually ripping at Steve Chou. That is my favorite thing to do. It really is, like of all the things and that’s the only reason I keep doing ecommerce is I can rip on Steve Chou.

Scott: Steve Chou.

Mike: Yeah, but you were just talking about this. First of all, how do I go sign up for the inner circle?

Scott: What’s that?

Mike: How do you sign up for the inner circle?

Scott: Oh, that’s great. I’m glad that you’re plugging in, thank you. It’s TASinnercircle.com, its application only. You have to be at a certain level.

Mike: To get to inner circle.

Scott: Yes, it’s a great group.

Mike: So, the thing that’s really actually bought a lot of satisfaction to me, and I’m sure all of us have experienced as we all have similar stuff going on, the comments that we get when you’ve changed someone’s life, we’ve let them quit their job. We’ve allowed them to get their business out of a hole, helped them when they’re struggling just like be someone that cry on their shoulder, that stuff brings me way more satisfaction than seeing one of my products sell better. And that’s really the honest truth. I know it sounds like BS, because like, that’s the stuff you’re supposed to say on a commercial. But I’m a weird, twisted person.

Greg: What do you got to stay there Mr. Chou?

Steve: I want to say that it was kind of rewarding, right. We were on the 5 Minute Pitch, and all of us — some of the contestants referenced all of us in changing their lives. And that was very rewarding. And when you get to Scott Voelker’s age, your priorities start to change.

Scott: I’m the oldest one in this group too.

Steve: Yes.

Scott: That’s pretty sad.

Steve: We call grandpa Volker.

Scott: Actually it’s going to be papa. I’ve already agreed on the name. I am, I got a daughter who’s 23, she’s probably ready, yeah.

Steve: When you get to Scott says he starts getting a little preachy.

Scott: It’s true, it’s true.

Steve: For me it’s all about the happiness quotient. So I’m taking on projects now that just make me happy like 5 Minute Pitch, podcast, the blog, focusing on…

Scott: There’s really no money being made here for us.

Steve: Oh yeah.

Scott: In 5 Minute Pitch.

Steve: We’re in debt actually in this project.

Scott: As of right now, actually if you want to be a sponsor of the 5 Minute Pitch, reach out to Steve Chou at My Wife Quit Her Job. Is that how they would get ahold of you?

Steve: There’s two…

Scott: Yeah but you’re going to take care of the sponsors. Yeah, just email support@theamazingseller.com if you’re interested in being a sponsor. We have not locked all of the sponsors in, but we do have some interest, so go ahead.

Mike: I was just saying that you know life’s taking a turn for the worst when you’re paying to be happy, like to hang out and have this happy to stay there. Steve was just talking of that’s pretty much what’s happened with the 5 Minute Pitch. We’re all like…

Scott: That’s pretty awesome.

Mike: Just write us checks so we can like hang out together be happy for three days.

Scott: This is good for our lives. I’m not going to lie, this has been pretty awesome, some really great guest judges I’m not going to give them away so you guys can go over and watch the 5 Minute Pitch when it airs. It’s really great judges, great conversations, great connections, and great people that we’re actually helping. And I think that even though they’re not going to win maybe most of them because we got like one winner, they’re all getting value, and the people watching this you’re going to get value.

Mike: I mean I love doing this stuff. I can’t wait to — we know who the finalists are as we record this but I’m going to get any of that away, but we got some finalists that are going to be coming to the…

Scott: How about the twist?

Mike: No, no.

Scott: No, no just tell them that there was a twist.

Mike: There’s a twist at the end, but I can’t tell you what the twist is. But the finalists are coming to Sellers Summit in Miami. If you want to be a part of that, is it sellerssummit.com Steve?

Steve: Sellerssummit.com.

Mike: Sellerssummit.com. Come get your ticket. There’s not many tickets left. So you guys have got to go do that soon because it’s a very small, tight knit conference. It’s one of my favorite ones that go to every year mostly because Steve allows me to speak and it gives me opportunity to feel good about myself for about three minutes until he tells me I did a horrible talk. But besides that, it’s a great conference. The thing I really love about it is it’s a smaller conference compared to some of these massive conferences out there. You get an opportunity to talk to other likeminded entrepreneurs, get away from the office for a few days, and really commiserate in some ways with other entrepreneurs, but also learn a lot and just get away from the office and think about something different for a few minutes.

Steve: What I like about my event is that I got the stage and I can make fun of anyone I want. And I got the mic and no one can…

Scott: I’m actually afraid this year. I am.

Steve: Oh, we got funny photos.

Scott: That’s right.

Steve: That I have to work with.

Scott: Yes, yes.

Steve: I need to tap into Liz’s archive there.

Scott: No, it’s a great event. I will be there again; thanks to Steve, he invited me back. It’s my fourth time being back. Yeah, this is this is pretty crazy. So I’m excited to be back. I know a lot of people, there’s a lot of people that are repeats that come back as well. So, it’s always a pretty nice group.

Mike: It seems, I mean, from an outside perspective, it seems like half the audience. I don’t know what the real stats are.

Steve: Yeah, actually, we sold over 50% of the tickets within a week of the ending of the last one.

Scott: And why don’t we talk about this real quick, you make a lot of money on the event, don’t you?

Steve: No. Man, for the amount of work involved.

Scott: And I’m starting to learn this right now.

Steve: Yes, that’s right with Brand Accelerator.

Scott: Brand Accelerator live. It’s…

Steve: You don’t realize what it takes.

Scott: It’s a lot of work. And I actually I questioned myself and you kind of warned me before I did it. I just wanted to do it because I wanted to bring the community together. And I wanted to have my own thing, and I’ve got something I’m going to reveal there that I’m working on, a little secret project. But yeah, man, it’s you don’t make any money really. You got to put a lot of money down first also. You’re taking a big risk, and it’s really to help the people. I mean, you could do so much more doing a workshop or a webinar or something like that, right. But it’s really about the people, the community, you, and Toni. We got to give Toni some credit here.

Steve: We do. We should give her a shout out. Well, yeah Toni, you are awesome. She’s the secret behind the success. She is, she really is.

Scott: But yeah, it’s really not a money play. It’s really bringing community. And you have a great community now that comes there, like every year.

Steve: And our events are going to be similar. We purpose to kind of keep it kind of small, so everyone can hang out and meet each other, develop their own masterminds, keep in touch.

Scott: And there’s been a lot of that, right. I’ve heard a lot of people say, I’ve met so and so at the event, we’ve kept in touch, we have our own little weekly mastermind or monthly mastermind. So because it’s lonely, man.

Greg: That’s why we got to put on 5 Minute Pitch just so we can hang out.

Scott: I know, I know. This has been a great three days. Actually, it’s tiring, though. I said this, my hips are sore just from crossing my legs in different ways.

Mike: And you’re looking different [inaudible 00:40:53].

Scott: But all right, let’s wrap this up. I think we have dinner plans that should be arriving here soon. Anything else you wanted to add about any takeaways. Like, give me one takeaway right now that’s just kind of like in your head from the 5 Minute Pitch.

Mike: I mean, this is going to sound so stupid. But I’m going to say I love my life. Seriously, man, like, it’s been great hanging out with you guys and the guest judges. I love doing this stuff. Like, it just — this is such a — it’s been so awesome. I really like – Thanksgiving is coming up as we’re recording this. And I’ve been thinking a lot about this type of stuff. I’m just thankful that I’ve been able to live such a cool life, I’ve been able to travel, do cool things, meet cool people, be an entrepreneur, and not have to live on someone else’s terms. This is the type of thing where you’re really realizing that’s really cool for me.

Scott: How about you Greg?

Greg: My biggest takeaway from this is, it was an excellent reminder that I just love working with entrepreneurs. It’s just like such a passionate group of individuals. I love hearing all their different stories. It’s really easy just to get stuck behind their computer week in and week out, and not really have those connections with other people. And hearing all these different individual pitch, all their very different businesses, all the different ways to create businesses and how they have really changed their lives, just like had a huge impact on their whole lives was pretty magical, special.

Steve: I agree with Mike. It’s funny, all my friends back home, they’re all — a lot of them are Asians and we’re all engineers, lawyers, and doctors. I just don’t get a whole lot of entrepreneurship love. So, I just realized that I just love hanging out with entrepreneurs. And the more I can do to build the community or have events like 5 Minute Pitch or Brand Accelerator, I’m there, man.

Scott: Yeah, I agree. I mean, I don’t know. Like, it’s funny, I want you guys just take on this one too, this is another one. I didn’t think about this one. Like, you get to a certain level though, right? And you think, oh once I get there, it’s kind of like, you’re done, or you made it. And then you get there and you’re like, oh, wait a minute, this is cool but what’s next, right? Like what’s going to energize you. But from here, I think what I really learned from the people that we were able to hang out with is just like Greg said, they’re hustlers. They want, a lot of them want the lifestyle, they want a lifestyle business. But they want to also create something that they can be proud of, and that they’re passionate about. And a lot of passion ran through this group, a lot of passion.

Steve: You got to have a higher purpose too. I know for me, we did it so we could stay at home and spend more time with the kids. But if you’re just doing it for the money, you’ll probably eventually feel a little bit empty and you’ll be looking for something else.

Scott: Yeah, and I mean, money is good, right? Money allows us to do really cool things, and travel and whatever, or just spend more time with your family or your friends or do this stuff. I basically flew here, five hour flight to get here to hang out with you guys and then also hang out with some cool entrepreneurs for three days, and run through this process. And that’s what I’m really finding is just like, I’m really being able to meet cool people like you guys, hanging out with you guys, building our relationship deeper and expanding our minds. And I mean, who knows where that’s going to go? But just these people that were able to help. This is really so just satisfying.

Mike: Yeah.

Scott: So, all right, let’s wrap this up. All right, let’s wrap it up. I know we kind of rambled a little bit there at the end. But that’s just because…

Mike: Is anybody still listening to this thing?

Scott: I don’t know, I think they are. All right, 5 Minute Pitch. I’m going to give you guys one more pitch on that. All right, head over to 5MinutePitch.com. Register over there, or sign up, you’ll get notifications. You can also probably go on Facebook and find it around there too. I know, Steve, you posted some stuff over there and I’m posting some stuff. But yeah, just follow along. It’s great to follow along, get some information from just listening to these people’s stories, how they got the ideas, how they kind of got to where they are, where they’re going, the advice that we’ve given them, some feedback, all that stuff. You’ll definitely learn through that process. So yeah, let’s, let’s wrap it up. Mike, what do you want to say man? You’re good; you want to wrap it up, you want to give some words of wisdom?

Mike: Words of wisdom. I think you got to be ready to come on Five Minute pitch Season Two. I’m announcing it right here. Are we going to do this or?

Scott: Yeah, I think so. I mean, we got to figure out everything else. But yeah, I think so. We’re going to say 95% yes.

Mike: Something like that.

Scott: All right.

Mike: All right. Serious words of wisdom.

Steve: Yeah, give me that.

Mike: You don’t have to plan everything in advance and like worry about everything in advance. I mean, I think that the 5 Minute Pitch is a perfect example of this. We had a general guideline of what we wanted to do here but we knew that we could create a good final product. And it’s interesting if you knew what was kind of happening behind the scenes, it was a little bit of a poop show in some [inaudible 00:45:59] cards. But I think that the final product is going to come out good because they were really good contestants, we’re all pretty confident that we can produce good content.

And I think it’s important because like if we had sat around and tried to plan every little detail, we never would have got this off the ground. We were just like, let’s do it. And we did it. And we figured it out. I think that we haven’t seen the finished product. We’re still figuring some of this stuff out but we got to this point. And I think when we see the final product; we’re going to all be really proud of it.

Steve: Mike. First of all, I think we’re giving ourselves a little bit too much credit here. This would not have happened whatsoever without Liz. She is the brains behind the project. If it was just us, I don’t even know if we would have made it out to California to be honest with you guys.

Scott: We wouldn’t be sitting here.

Steve: We wouldn’t be sitting here.

Scott: For sure.

Steve: Exactly. We were like, hey, did you guys book the contestants? No, man, I thought you were supposed to do that.

Scott: If you’re thinking about coming to the 5 Minute Pitch, because you do have a business, you’re an entrepreneur, but you’re scared, I’ll just let you that every single person that made it into the final around thought they absolutely had no idea and that they would have been the worst person pitching on it or whatever else. It just goes to show that I think everyone doesn’t realize how good they actually are, how good of a business they actually have. So if you’re on the fence or just thinking about a consider, I would recommend for you to apply.

Greg: Yeah, so head over to 5 Minute Pitch.com. And you can go ahead and register there, and then get more information about if you want to apply for maybe season two.

Mike: Is that it, Mike drop, Mike drop. All right, Mike, Mike, drop, drop.

I don’t know about you. But I am super excited for the 5 Minute Pitch which is going to air sometime in January of 2019. If you want to get updates about the show, head on over to 5MinutePitch.com. And we’re actually taking applications for next season already. So sign up now. For more information about this podcast episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode235.

And once again, I want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop-ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. If you want to give it a try, it is free. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post-purchase flow, a win-back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on autopilot. So, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

Now I talk about how I use all these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own e-commerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.Mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

234: Max And Neo – How To Grow A 7 Figure Pet Supply Store By Giving Back With Kenric Hwang

234: How To Grow A 7 Figure Pet Supply Store By Giving Back With Kenric Hwang

Today I’m really excited to have Kenric Hwang on the show. Kenric is someone who I’ve known for a very long time we both got started in ecommerce at around the same time.

Many years ago, he started a successful outdoor products company, sold it and then started another company called Max & Neo which sells dog collars and accessories online.

Now Max & Neo is no ordinary dog collar company and Kenric has managed to get tons of attention on social media and the press because of one key value proposition. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • Why Kenric sold his outdoor products company and why he’s more passionate about Max & Neo
  • How Kenric has grown Max and Neo to 7 figures in such a short period of time
  • Kenric secret to press coverage and social media virality
  • How Kenric sells commodity products so effectively
  • Why Kenric is anti-dropshipping

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Klaviyo.com – Klaviyo is the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store. Created specifically for ecommerce, it is the best email marketing provider that I’ve used to date. Click here and try Klaviyo for FREE.
Klaviyo

Privy.com – Privy is my tool of choice when it comes to gathering email subscribers for my ecommerce store. They offer easy to use email capture, exit intent, and website targeting tools that turn more visitors into email subscribers and buyers. With both free and paid versions, Privy fits into any budget. Click here and get 15% OFF towards your account.
Privy

GoBrandWin.com – The fastest and most effective way to grow your email list for free using group giveaways. Click here to signup for free.

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Intro: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not in business. Today, I’ve got an old friend on the show, Kenric Hwang and Kenric is someone I met randomly many years ago via the Fast Lane forums. And we’ve hung up on many occasions over the years at various events. But Kenric runs Max and Neo, which is an ecommerce store selling pet supplies, and he’s managed to totally blow up his sales because of a single strategy. And in fact, I wouldn’t even call it a strategy but you’ll have to listen to find out.

But before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to Klaviyo who is a sponsor of the show. Super excited to talk about Klaviyo because they are the email marketing platform that I personally use for my ecommerce store and I depend on them for over 30% of my revenues. Now Klaviyo is the only email platform that is specifically built for ecommerce stores, and here is why it is so powerful.

Klaviyo can track every single customer who has shopped in your store and exactly what they bought. So let’s say I want to send out an email to everyone who purchased a red handkerchief in the last week, easy. Let’s say I want to set up a special auto-responder sequence to my customers depending on what they bought, piece of cake, and there is full revenue tracking on every single email sent. Now Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I’ve ever used and you could try them for free at mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O. Once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

I also want to give a shout out to Privy who is also a sponsor of the show. Privy is the tool that I use to build my email list for both my blog and my online store. Now what does Privy do? Privy is an email list growth platform and they manage all of my email capture forms. And I use Privy hand-in-hand with my email marketing provider. Now, there are a bunch of companies out there that will manage your email capture forms but I like Privy because they specialize in ecommerce. Right now I’m using Privy to display a cool wheel of fortune pop up. Basically a user gives their email for a chance to win valuable prices in our store. And customers love the gamification aspect of this. And when I implemented this form email signups increased by 131%.

I’m also using their new cart saver pop up feature to recover abandoned carts as well. So bottom line, Privy allows me to turn visitors into email subscribers, which I then feed to my email provider to close the sale. So head on over to Privy.com/Steve and try it for free. And if you decide you need some of the more advanced features, use coupon code MWQHJ for 15% off. Once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m really excited to have Kenric Hwang on the show. Now, Kenric is actually someone who I’ve known for a very long time. I believe we were first introduced through Billy Murphy and we actually met for the first time at Ecommerce Fuel Live a long time ago. And since then, we’ve hung out a number of times at various entrepreneurship retreats. And Kenric actually got started in ecommerce a year or so before I did, and he was actually known on the Fast Lane forums in case any of you follow MJ DeMarco.

Anyway, Kenric started a successful outdoor products company and sold it and since then he decided to start another company called Max and Neo, which sells dog collars and accessories online. Now, Max and Neo is no ordinary dog collar company. And Kenric has managed to get tons of attention on social media and the press because of one of his main value propositions. And I’ll leave that a mystery until the interview starts. And with that, welcome to the show Kenric, glad to have you back.

Kenric: Hey Steve, I’m glad to be here and finally be on your podcast.

Steve: Yeah, man. It’s been a while. I had to wait until you got back from Africa.

Kenric: Yeah, I was just on an African Safari and it was really, really exciting and interesting. But back in the States right now.

Steve: So Kenric, you got a pretty interesting history and background. Please give the audience a brief overview of how you got into ecommerce in the first place.

Kenric: Okay, well, like you mentioned, I started ecommerce I think a year or two before you. I remember it was 2007 when I started my first company. And back then the landscape of ecommerce was very different and I wanted a way to make money and to live wherever I wanted to. So, I basically did some research and ended up finding out that drop shipping was the way to go. So when I started my first ecommerce site in 2007, it was a 100% drop ship store.

Steve: Oh okay.

Kenric: Yeah. And that did really well. And I found the limitations of drop shipping a couple of years in.

Steve: What were the limitations just for clarification?

Kenric: Well, the biggest limitation was I was limited to what products I could carry because I could only carry products that people were willing to drop ship. That was one. But the biggest one was what happened my second Christmas was that my best seller — so I worked very hard to SEO my website up to the front page of Google, I was ranked top three for my products. And what happened was my main product was selling very well. And when I went to order it from the drop shipper on December 5, it was I think December 5th, I sent the order to the drop shipper and they were sold out of that product for the rest of the Christmas season.

And so yeah, so that really sucked because here I had a top ranking website and I had a hot seller and I had no product to sell. And that’s when I realized I wasn’t in control of the stuff that I was selling. So I could do all this work and have no product to sell because everybody else with the drop shipping company, we were all using one drop shipper. And that drop shipper was just distributing my products out to every other ecommerce store. So basically, everybody in the country ran out of stock of this product on that same day, or I should say everybody else who drop shipped this product ran out of stock on that day.

Steve: I see.

Kenric: So, a fundamental change for me was the next year I said, there’s no way I’m going to run out of stock. So I have to carry my own stock. And what I did is I went to the drop shipper and I said hey, how many of blah, blah, blah do you guys have in stock and they said 500. And I said, I’ll take all 500 of them. And so I bought all their stock out. So guess what happened that year? I was the only store that had it in stock. Yeah. Everybody else who drop shipped went out of stock like on December, on Black Friday because that’s when I bought all the stock. And then I was able to sell all 500 units throughout the course of the holiday season.

Steve: Is this the outdoor products company or no?

Kenric: Yes.

Steve: Oh, it is. Okay, because I vaguely remember you manufacturing your own products for that.

Kenric: Well, that was a precursor to that because from carrying my own stock that one Christmas, I went to importing my own designs and things the year after because I learned how important it was to be in control of my inventory. So, I went from a 100% drop shipping company to basically carrying 95% of the products that I sell.

Steve: Can you comment on how the margins grew when you did that? Like what were your margins drop shipping versus when you actually owned the label and the brand for the product?

Kenric: Yeah, they grew just immensely because when I was — so if I look at one product that had a $100 price point, I was paying $79 for it drop ship plus shipping. So I would get about $79, I mean I would be charged $79 plus about 10 bucks for drop shipping. That same product when I ordered it from China, I was able to land it for $37.

Steve: Wow okay.

Kenric: Yeah so it was just huge and once I did that once, I was like why am I drop shipping all the rest of these products because my store already had traffic; it was ranked very high in Google. So it would have traffic and I would know what products sold very well. So as soon as I would identify like, hey, this product is selling very well and all I’m doing is sending these orders to the drop shipper, I would look at how to import that product, not the exact same product but my version of that product from China.

Steve: Would you say that drop shipping today is a good option to figure out what sells, or would you just bypass drop shipping all together?

Kenric: I haven’t done drop shipping in a long time. So I don’t really know. I just know that you are not in control of a lot of things when you drop ship. Actually, one other reason that I didn’t like it was every year, the drop shipper would say, our costs have increased, and they’d raise that price. So for example, that $79 product when I started the first year it was $69. The second year it was 79, then it was like 85 the third year, and there’s nothing you can do about it right? What are you going to tell the drop shipper? He’s like, we need to raise this price to $90, all you can do is raise the price on your ecommerce store.

Steve: Right.

Kenric: And I think right now, it’s very — in my opinion, it’s very hard to rank these types of stores where you get any type of traffic without running a lot of ads to get to the point where you know what’s like a good product, and what’s a bad product.

Steve: I would agree with that. Yeah, the SEO game has changed dramatically in the last 10 years or 11 years.

Kenric: Yeah, yeah, definitely. Yeah. 2007 it was pretty easy.

Steve: So what did you — oh sorry, go on.

Kenric: Oh, I was going to say that was when you just got a domain with your keywords in it and got some back links. It was much easier than it is now.

Steve: So ultimately, why did you — I remember your store being very profitable, and I’m just kind of curious why you ended up selling that company.

Kenric: I decided to sell the company, I think it was — so I started in 2007 and I sold the company earlier this year. And it did take about; I think it took about 12 months to sell it. So I decided to sell it back in 2017, and the main reason was I just was not into that business anymore. I remember back in 2007 and let’s say the first five years I was always writing blog posts to get the websites ranked higher. I was shooting a lot of video and doing my own product photography, and at some point I think it just became a moneymaker for me, and I just felt like I had to do something else. Also at some point I think the money becomes less important as you go through your progressions running a business, and I was getting pretty comfortable I guess.

Steve: So did you have any alternative sources of income prior to it being sold?

Kenric: Well, I actually started Max and Neo a year before I decided to sell my first company. And so I was running the two companies, the outdoor company and Max and Neo at the same time, and I was devoting let’s say 50/50 to each one. And at some point, I felt like that I wasn’t giving Max and Neo enough attention, and I wanted to grow that a lot more. So I felt like I had to let go of the outdoor company in order to let Max and Neo basically grow faster or to free it up.

Steve: Okay, so for the people, for the benefit of the audience so what is Max and Neo and what do you sell there?

Kenric: Okay, so Max and Neo sells dog products. We sell dog leashes, collars, harnesses, supplements, and blankets and just things that you need for your dog. What sets us apart is that for every product we sell, we donate a product to a dog rescue or a shelter. And that’s really why I was so passionate about starting this company because I wanted to help dog shelters and rescues. And if you contrast that with my outdoor products company, that one just became a moneymaker to me.

So there was two totally different motivations in why I would wake up during the day. One was like, okay, I got to work on this outdoor Products Company, because I need to keep the money coming in and I just can’t let that business wither away. And then I would work on Max and Neo because my main goal of Max and Neo was to donate as much as possible. So that basically came to a head and I was like, I have to sell this company if I’m going to grow Max and Neo to where I think it could go.

Steve: But Max and Neo was far less profitable than the outdoor Products Company right?

Kenric: Correct.

Steve: Okay. So at that point, it sounds like you were comfortable from a money perspective and you actually didn’t need the money that the outdoor Products Company was generating.

Kenric: Yeah. So the company was doing — it started in 2007. And it started to take off in about 2010. So I basically had a seven years of very, very good income, which I saved a lot of it and that’s when I just began looking for something that I was more passionate about or something that would be just more fulfilling to me, so a reason to wake up in the morning I guess, and that’s what Max and Neo was to me. So for those — I guess I’d like to just go on a quick tangent, for those who don’t know what dog rescues and shelters do is that, let’s say somebody finds a stray dog, it usually goes to like a local County Humane Society.

And those places they basically hold on to a dog for let’s say a week or 14 days before they have to decide what to do with the dog which is sometimes it’s just, it’s not a good situation for a dog. So somebody who runs a dog rescue will take these dogs from these local humane societies and they’ll basically try to place them into a home. So let’s just say there’s like in my case, I work with mainly German Shepherds. So if a German Shepherd arrives at a humane society, a German Shepherd Dog rescue will try to pick it up and rescue it and basically take it to their own facility where they take care of the dog until they can find a permanent owner for the dog.

And these rescues are usually almost always all nonprofits and they run on donations and things like that. And where they generate their money is through donations or through adoptions and things like that. And they pay for all the expenses themselves. So, whenever you go to a rescue to adopt a dog, they don’t just hand you the dog without a collar or a leash. I mean, how would you take it home? How would you get it into your car?

So basically what they do is they’ll give you the collar that’s on the dog, they’re basically giving to you, right because it comes with the dog, and then they usually give you a leash and maybe some other things like a little bit of food and things to get you started. All this comes from money that they spent to get these products. So I was basically trying to figure out how can I make it so they don’t have to spend their money on these products and they can spend it on other things?

Steve: I know for your store you pretty much give one to one, right?

Kenric: Yes.

Steve: And that can’t be that profitable. So, is profit a part of your motivation at all, or was it just the giving back part? I mean, in order for it to be self sustaining, you have to be able to generate a profit right?

Kenric: Correct. Well, I guess this is what’s more because I ran my other ecommerce store and I got it to where it was profitable, and I wasn’t feeling fulfilled from it, I sort of knew that just starting another business just to make a bunch of money was probably going to end up at the same place, and I definitely didn’t want to do that. So when I first started this, I actually looked, and I was like, okay, there’s a lot a lot of dogs that are in bad situations and I wanted to help dogs. And a lot of people do, a lot of people want to help dogs and animals, and things like that, and I basically just took that progression. I’m like, okay, how do I help dogs?

And then I decided like, okay, dog rescues help dogs, so then how do I start my own dog rescue? That was a thought in my head but starting your own dog rescue is not really scalable right? You have just one dog rescue, so I was looking for something that was bigger. So then I then came to the thought, how do I help rescues? And that’s when the thought of donating to rescues came into my mind.

And yes you’re correct; my margins are very low because unlike other ecommerce stores, all my cost of goods are double. So whereas if you go buy one product from one place, they give you one leash, so their cost of the goods is one leash, my cost of goods is that leash that I sell to the customer plus the leash that I donate to the rescue, plus the shipping involved with shipping that leash to the rescue. So my cost of goods for one sale is very high.

Steve: How did you decide what products to sell? I mean it seems like the stuff that you sell is like a commodity almost, right?

Kenric: Yes. But again, I based it on my main mission which was to help dogs/dog rescues. So, I basically only sell products that dog rescues need. So it’s actually it’s a little backwards, I figure out what the rescues need and then I figure out how to get the product to them.

Steve: Interesting okay.

Kenric: Yeah, it’s very different than a profit first motivation because most of the times you’re like, oh this product is $10 and I can sell it for 30 and maybe I have to ship it for 10 and I only make $10 off of it right? What I do is I go; does a dog rescue need let’s say salmon oil right? So like dog rescues need salmon oil because it makes their food more nutritious for the dogs. And then I’ll do the numbers and I’d be like, oh I can’t make any money at this. But this is what is interesting, sometimes I’ll be like, but I’ll only lose $1 a sale, and I’ll be like that’s still good because let’s pretend I lose $100, but I could donate 100 bottles of salmon oil, that’s pretty incredible if you think about it, because a bottle of salmon is like 20 bucks.

So if I were to go out to a store, I can buy five bottles and donate them to five rescues, but with my current business model, it it’ll cost me $100, I could donate to 100 rescues. So we do have products that lose money. And I know that’s crazy to say. And those are products I knew we’re going to lose money going into them. But I always go back to my mission first, right? Is this product helpful for dogs and dog rescues? And if the answer is yes, I don’t mind subsidizing a money losing product with a product. Like let’s say the dog leashes make money, the salmon oil loses money. Well, both of them together are net zero for me, let’s say, but for a dog rescue, they’re getting leashes and salmon oil, right. So the overall impact to society is good, right? It’s plus EV right.

Steve: So, let me ask you this then, how do you make sales? So one, your products you can find in a lot of different places and share your donating, but how do you stand out and how do people know to come to your store and not someone else?

Kenric: Well, the main driver really right now is dog rescues are talking about us on social media. I mean I think in this age of social media really makes it easier for a company like mine to survive because we donate so much and we do ask them to post on Facebook and Instagram when they get donations. And it just seems to pick up steam because the more the more we sell, the more we donate, and then the more rescues talk about us, then the more we sell, and then the more we donate, and it’s just like a snowball rolling down the hill.

Steve: Interesting, so almost all of your sales are driven by the rescues promoting you?

Kenric: No, I wouldn’t say that. I would say a decent amount of them are but we still do the normal ecommerce thing where we’re running PPC, we sell a lot on Amazon and on our website. So on Amazon, I’m running a lot of PPC ads. And it’s definitely hard to be competitive, especially on something like Amazon because we’re definitely not the lowest price but we’re not the highest price either. So, one thing I didn’t want to do, which this is a little pet peeve of mine is there are a lot of companies out there that donate to good causes. But when I look at those companies, what they seem to do, they seem to inflate their price by a lot and then use that which increases their profit, and then they donate with that.

And I sort of feel like that’s like, it’s not like 100% honest way to do it because if I decided to, let’s say, a normal dog leash sells for $15, if I decided to sell that same dog leash for $25 and then I donate one for one, I mean, there’s I’m not sacrificing in any way, right? My margins are actually the same as if I didn’t donate. What I’m doing is I’m pushing the burden of the donation on to my customers by asking them to pay an extra $10 for the leash that should have cost them $15 instead of 25.

Steve: But the end result is the same right? The shelter gets their donation.

Kenric: Yeah but the supporter of the shelter is really the person that’s forking out that donation if you really think about it, right? Because let’s pretend I’m a normal company and I sell it for 15 bucks, and instead I’m like, I’ll sell it for 25 and donate and now I’m still a normal company as if I were — my profit margin would have been the same as if I was a normal company that did not donate.

Steve: Sure. Sure.

Kenric: Does that make any sense? So I didn’t want to put the burden of the donation on to…

Steve: The consumer.

Kenric: Yeah, or onto a supporter because these rescues have very loyal supporters. I don’t want them to spend an extra $10 just to get that donate, they should pick my product, because it’s a good product, a high quality product that they were going to buy, even without the donation and the donation is just an extra added benefit.

Steve: Okay.

Kenric: That makes it very easy for them to choose my product, right. Because if were like at the store trying to choose two products and one gave a donation but costs double the price, it would be very hard for you to do right.

Steve: Right. Well, okay, so how do you launch one of these? Let’s take dog collars, for example. How do you launch that on Amazon? There’s just so many, it’s probably flooded with them.

Kenric: Well, I think that’s the biggest difference is you don’t really — when you’re starting a company like this, you don’t really launch on Amazon, right? It’s not — I think gone are the days on Amazon where you just launched a product on Amazon. You really have to, in your mind you have to be building a business, right. There’s a big difference in mindset when you’re saying, I’m launching a product versus I am starting a business. So, I started with one single dog leash, but I knew like in my brain, I knew what the company was going to look like five years from the day I launched.

So really, I put that product when I put it on Amazon, that’s all I did. It just it went on Amazon. And then what I did was I launched my Instagram and my Facebook and my website and I started driving traffic to Facebook and Instagram. And a lot of times, I in the first year when we didn’t have a lot of sales, I pre-donated which basically means, I’m going to donate to the rescues that I want to donate to first and then the sales will catch up to them later. And that was a way to basically let the rescues and people know like, hey, we’re here and we donate stuff to you guys.

Steve: So how much runway did you have? Because let’s say the rescues and your whole social media strategy didn’t end up working, then you’re out and it’s not really a self sustaining business, right?

Kenric: Correct. But that’s where I got lucky in that I had my outdoors products company that was basically paying for all this stuff and my living expenses.

Steve: Okay.

Kenric: So, I definitely wouldn’t recommend somebody on a limited budget doing what I did. But I was in a good position to do it because I didn’t have to worry about profits. That’s why I was able to go like I didn’t care about the profits when I started the company. I basically — I just want to say I basically looked at it as if I were a mini VC backed company to start.

Steve: Right, where you could just spend whatever resources to get the buzz and then eventually in the long run, make it a self sustaining company.

Kenric: Yes. Correct.

Steve: Let me ask you this, why are you donating physical products as opposed to just writing a check to these shelters? Presumably it’s a lot more work to ship physical products, right.

Kenric: Yeah. Well, first of all, there’s actually a couple reasons for that. Actually, the main reason is leverage, so because I’m experienced at importing and also at designing products and things like that, I can leverage my knowledge better than a dog rescue can with a check. So, let’s say I donate — actually this is an interesting story because this is what gave me the idea in the first place. So, a lot of times a dog rescue would say, hey, we really need dog collars. Can our supporters, can people please donate dog collars.

And I would see these posts on Facebook and you would look at the comments, and you’d see somebody would go run out to PetSmart and buy a collar for $15, or they would actually buy like five collars right? So they’d spend $75 and they’d be like I bought five collars for your rescue, and the rescue would say thank you so much. And whenever I saw that post, I would be like, wow, for $75 I could definitely import let’s just make it easy. Let’s pretend it’s $5 a collar. So in my mind, I would say like, well, I could import 20 – sorry — 15 collars, right. So the rescue got five collars, and I could have with that same amount of money, I could have given them $15 collars.

So, if I sent a rescue a $75 check let’s say, their volunteers would have gone to PetSmart and bought five collars.

Steve: Okay that makes sense.

Kenric: Yeah where I could take that money and basically I could be like, hey, here’s instead of sending them a $75 check, I’d sent them 15 collars which to them is worth way more than $75 in cash.

Steve: Right because they are going to spend it on dog products anyways presumably.

Kenric: Yeah and they’re going to pay full retail where I can basically give them two or three times. I could basically leverage that money because I can import. But another reason is I didn’t want at first, for some reason this is a pet peeve of mine. So I see some company that’s like I literally saw some companies that were like we donate 100% of our profits to know blah, blah, blah cause, and I’m assuming us as entrepreneurs we know we can fudge that number right? You can pay — if my business made 100 grand, I can decide I want my CEO salary of $100,000 for this year right. And then guess what, the actual business made zero dollars in profits, so they have nothing to donate to the rescue.

So I didn’t want that to be — I didn’t want to be vague, because donating one for one, you know that you’re getting one — rescue is getting one leash when I donate one leash. If I said I was going to donate 10% of the profits for every leash that’s sold, if you go pay $15 for a leash, you don’t know what my profit margin on that leash is, right. I mean, let’s say I make $5 on that leash. Well, that’s a 50 cent donation to a rescue. They can’t go do anything. How many…

Steve: They can’t audit that yeah.

Kenric: Yeah. But even the 50 cents they have to get 30 of those 50 cent donations to buy a $15 leech, right. So it’s just not efficient. In my opinion like when it comes to physical products that I can give, or I can donate, I can totally — I would rather use my leverage to donate. But when it comes to stuff like vet bills and stuff, I can’t donate health care to dogs. So I want the rescues to save the money and use it on that.

Steve: I just wanted to take a moment to tell you about my brand new service that will help you grow your email list for free through group giveaways. This service is called Gobrandwin.com, and we’ve had amazing results so far. In one of our last giveaways, we gathered almost 12,000 emails and grew the email lists of participating ecommerce stores by over 56% overnight. Now, does getting more customers and more emails for free sound interesting to you? Here’s how it works.

If you own your own e-commerce brand, and you have a following, you contribute a gift card from your store valued at $200 or more. We will then assemble gift cards from other participating brands with a similar customer demographic and turn it into one massive sweepstakes giveaway. Now, everyone is going to send this big giveaway email to their entire customer base, and drive them to a special landing page on Gobrandwin.com. We will acquire email addresses. Now consumers enter their emails, we send them special offers from your store and select a grand prize winner.

And after the sweepstake is over, you will receive the full list of entrants and instantly grow your email list. And because my co founder and I have a pretty big network, we will also send the giveaway entry form to related influencers within the same niche and instantly augment any sweepstakes that we run. So bottom line, the concept is very simple, we all help each other promote each other’s businesses, get free promotion from bloggers, and share the customer base. Now, if you’re interested in growing your email list, then head on over to Gobrandwin.com. That’s G-O-B-R-A-N-D-W-I-N.com, that’s Gobrandwin.com, and it is 100% free. Now back to the show.
Let’s talk about how you get business through social media. And maybe this wasn’t intentional or not, but I know you post a lot of videos and each time you do I’ve looked at your page, they get a ton of shares and likes. Can you talk about kind of what your social media strategy is?

Kenric: Yeah, I mean, when I started this, I actually wasn’t thinking like, oh, I’m going to use Facebook or Instagram.

Steve: Exactly, it just happened organically but yeah.

Kenric: And I think a lot of it is I mean, first of all, it’s dogs and we’ve all seen how many views dog videos get on Facebook. So it’s something that people already engage with a lot. And actually to start with, we weren’t posting that much, but we basically every Friday we do a post that announces which rescues are getting donations and I think people really love that. I think what that shows is that, hey, we are out here donating every week. And the reason I started doing that is because there’s a lot of — we got some feedback from some rescues that said, hey, it’s so great you’re donating so much, these other places that claim to donate we never receive donations from them.

So sometimes you’re buying something online and you’re like does this company really do what they say they’re going to do? And we’re using social media to just put it all out there right. We list the exact rescue and the date that they are getting it. So people know that we’re sending it out and we’re being very transparent and public about that. So I don’t want anybody to come back to us and say like, hey, you didn’t donate like you said you were going to because then they go through our post and be like look at all this stuff we sent out this year.

But getting back to your question about — I forgot to answer is about physical products. And this is something I did not know getting into this is that the donation aspect is actually a lot more work than the actual selling aspect because with ecommerce there’s everything is made for it right. The order comes into Shopify and then it goes into ShipStation and it prints out a label, you just put it in a box and you send it out. That stuff is like the easy ecommerce part and the donation part is like, oh which rescue which rescues haven’t we donated to for the last three months, and what kind of rescue are they? Do they have big dogs, little dogs, because we don’t want to put in all large dog collars to a Chihuahua rescue?

So, it’s like that part is actually way more work than us shipping out dog collars from our website. So that’s something I didn’t realize starting because I was always thinking like, why don’t other businesses donate one for one, they probably have margins to do it. But now that I’ve gone through this, I realized why because basically I’m adding a whole division in my company to just handle donations, right? And that division has to be paid for. I have employees that do that part. I have a bigger warehouse because of that part. And that part doesn’t generate more money. In fact, it decreases the profit. So it’s like from a pure profit in business standpoint, it’s like a lose-lose division.

Steve: I mean, you guys are profitable, right? I mean, otherwise it wouldn’t be self sustaining. And so it’s just the way you’ve handled things through social media. And it’s like a win-win all around it seems.

Kenric: Yeah, we were profitable but I would say our margins are tiny.

Steve: Are single digits tiny or?

Kenric: Let me think about that. With the donations and everything, they probably are. They’re probably single digits or very low single digits because our gross margins if you count the cost of goods is double the cost of every product. So our gross margins are already very low from ecommerce standards, so they’re already low there. But then you add in the added cost of extra employees just to do donations, and the shipping of donations is — I mean that kills us all the time. We pay about $10 a box and we donate about let’s say 300 bucks is a month right now. So that’s $3,000 just shipping donations.

So, I’d say our margins are — they’re probably hovering right around 10%. I haven’t calculated them in like a month or two. But that’s probably where they are. And they go up and down, but it’s basically they’re low that if I didn’t sell my ecommerce business a year ago, we would have trouble funding all the inventory let’s put it that way. Because we got a stock up inventory months in advance and we double that inventory compared to anybody else.

Steve: So back to the social media, so you post videos and then you have the shelter share on Instagram and whatnot. And then the buzz is just natural at that point, because there’s so many people who want to help these shelters and rescues.

Kenric: Yes, so here’s my take on it. So, if you’re running a normal ecommerce business and let’s say you’re trying to get some buzz on Facebook and you’re like, we’re going to give away $100 to one person who comments on the bottom of this post, nobody is going to share that because you’re sharing when you — you’d comment like Steve, you would comment your name on that post right? But it does you no good to tell your friends because you’re lowering your odds of winning.

Steve: Unless you said the last person who comments wins.

Kenric: Yeah. But then wouldn’t you have to say something like this is over at eight o’clock eastern time. And then like 7:59, like everybody’s like jumps on, that’s not really true either.

Steve: That’s true.

Kenric: So the interesting thing about this I think about just my business is that when somebody gets a donation, by them sharing to tell somebody else like, hey, this company will donate to your rescue, that doesn’t lower their chances of getting a donation. We donate to everybody who applies basically. I’ve had rescues told me like, they thought we were a scam because they were like, I don’t understand this, we just apply, and then we get free stuff. They’re like, this is way too easy, there’s got to be a catch somewhere down the line.

So what happens with our social media post is like, people only share stuff because they really want to help others right? So they’ll share it because it gets more people. When more people buy, more rescues get donations. And when they tell other rescues, those rescues get donations and then those supporters may buy, and then they get more donations. So everybody is in the same boat here, right. Everybody is trying to help dog rescues get more donations from us. And that’s what we’re trying to do.

We’re not trying to limit our donations like the first 1,000 people get this, because people have asked us like are you ever going to cut off your donation list, so no more rescues can join? And I basically them I say, no we’re never going to cut that off. Because if we were, if we made it a very scarce type of thing, people would stop sharing it right. It’d be like oh only we know about this. We don’t want – scarcity is a very different motivator than abundance, and when things are abundant, people want — I think they shared a lot better or they want to share it.

Steve: One thing I also wanted to touch on is you have a very interesting employee philosophy too right. Can you comment on the people that you hire, and what your actual employee policies are in the office?

Kenric: I’m trying to understand…

Steve: You don’t remember what I’m talking about it?

Kenric: No, did we talk about this?

Steve: We did at the medication, you mentioned that everyone can bring their dog and then you told me all these stories like, everyone you hire has to be a pet lover or just happens to be a major pet lover.

Kenric: Yeah, I mean I think that the thing about being a pet lover or a dog lover is a given especially when you work for Max and Neo, there’s just no way we can have somebody there that doesn’t like dogs or doesn’t have a dog.

Steve: But you don’t have to let them bring their pets to work though. And I remember you telling stories about how you had pets like chew up a whole bunch of product and ruin product.

Kenric: Well. Yeah. I mean, that hasn’t happened a lot, we put a kibosh on as soon as it happened. But I don’t get mad at the dogs for that, they’re just dogs, the dogs. But that was always a dream of mine. I worked in the corporate world for 10 years, and I always thought to myself, like, if I had my dog here, I wouldn’t be in such a hurry to get home, because when you have a dog and you’re at work and you know the dog has been at home, either just by himself all day, you sort of want to get home, right? It makes you leave work very early or just leave work at the first chance you get.

And so, I remember thinking of that to myself when I was in the corporate world. Like I’d totally bring my dog to work, he just sit under my tube. And so I knew when I started my company, even my outdoors company, you can bring your dog to work. I just knew that that would never be something that I wouldn’t allow.

Steve: I found that interesting.

Kenric: Yeah, I think a lot of businesses are getting more pet friendly and things like that. But I also foster a lot of dogs and I foster — when I have a foster dog, one of the biggest things about having a foster dog is introducing the foster dog to things that they I guess didn’t have. So, a lot of times we’ll get dogs at the rescue that have never been inside. They’re literally an outdoors dog where somebody got the dog and all they did was feed him when they were in the yard, and they never came inside the house. And they basically have no social skills.

So, the good thing about that is when I get a foster dog, I’ll bring them to work, and they’ll meet all the employees and they meet the FedEx guy and the UPS guy and things like that, and it’s very good for them. It helps them get socialized and it helps them get adopted so that’s another reason why I do that, but I definitely want work to be a fun place to go.

Steve: Yeah. So it sounds like everyone brings their pet or their dog to work.

Kenric: Yeah. They do.

Steve: So Kenric, we’re coming on 40 minutes here. And I know you got some big plans coming up for the holidays. Where can people find you? How can they support your company and what’s in store?

Kenric: Yeah. Well, yeah. So I guess to answer your second question first, our website is called MaxandNeo.com, and that’s Max, M-A-X, and is spelled out A-N-D and Neo is like Neo from the matrix N-E-O. And by the way, just as a side note, they were — Max and Neo is named after me and my brother’s dogs that we had. And on Facebook, we are at Facebook.com/MaxandNeo and also the same thing, Instagram slash or whatever, at Max and Neo. So yeah, so I’m actually pretty excited for this holiday season.

We actually haven’t announced this, so I think people are going to hear it here first. But we are going to — so I guess I should back up, so this idea came when if you look at our Facebook posts we get a lot of like thank you for sending us donations, you guys are really good and thank you for doing this, it’s helped us out so much. And it really got me thinking because how we’ve talked about what I do on Facebook, and I was thinking like wait, the rescues are the ones that are really driving this for us. They support us so much and we just support them by donating products to them, but they’re really some rescues out there that are just really driving it out there.

So as a thank you to rescues, what we decided we were going to do is basically donate to every single rescue on our list for the Christmas season. And we have about 2,000 rescues on our list and we decided to basically surprise them by having every rescue get a donation. And I don’t think we talked about this. But normally the way it works is, let’s say we have a list of 2,000 rescues, we donate, let’s say in January, we donate to the first 300 rescues on that list. And then in February, we donate to the next 300 rescues on our list and so on and so on.

So, each rescue will get a donation about once every, let’s say four or five months going through that cycle. So the fact that we’re going to donate to all of them in one month is a really big deal for us and for them, because now they’re not waiting. Every rescue knows they’re going to get a donation in that month for the holidays. So, that’s going to be a big task for us.

Steve: I mean, you don’t have a lot of employees either, right? I mean, that’s a lot of boxes and a lot of stuff that needs to go out to 2,000 rescues. That’s crazy.

Kenric: Yeah, we did some numbers on how many boxes we can pack a day and things like that, and it’ll take us about one to one and a half months to pack 2,000 boxes. And it’s going to be pretty big because there’s going to be about close to a quarter million to a million dollars worth of stuff inside those boxes. So it’s a big Christmas present.

Steve: A big Christmas present, it’s a great cause and I will do my best to help you get the word out about it.

Kenric: Yeah definitely, we appreciate any help that we can get.

Steve: So Kenric, I really appreciate you coming on the show and talking about Max and Neo. It’s clear that you’re very passionate about dogs and that you’re in this for altruistic reasons as your profit margins would show you can’t really do what you do without loving dogs.

Kenric: Yeah exactly. It would be — I guess if it were run by profit, it would just — I don’t know, I think a lot of people would have given up. Can I just say one other thing?

Steve: Yeah go for it.

Kenric: It just popped into my head which is how I know this is the business for me to run, because this happened to me early on where we were just starting out and we had a shipment of leashes. It was like second or third shipment of leashes, and we started getting bad reviews on Amazon of them falling apart or something. And I think it was like let’s say it was a $10,000 order, it might have been 10, or $20,000 order and the leashes were falling apart. And I’d just started this, put all this money into it and I was really mad at my manufacturer.

And I switched manufacturers because of this, but it would have been really easy to say like, well, this business just went down the tubes. I got to throw away 20 grand of inventory when I wasn’t even making a lot of money. But what kept popping into my head was like but if I close up shop, what’s going to happen to the dogs? If you have that kind of thought in your head, you know you’re never going to give up, because you’re not doing it for you, you’re doing it for another living being, and they’re counting on you to make your business profitable or to make it sustainable so they can enjoy a happier life.

And when your motivation is something like that, like there was never the thought of like closing up shop. It was like okay, I got to find another manufacturer and let’s just keep going, because you’re not driven by profit, you’re driven by the well being of something else that’s counting on you. So I just wanted to say that because that’s a very important driver. Basically, I think that’s something that if you could get that one step feeling that is not about profit, I just don’t think you can fail with that type of motivation.

Steve: It’s weird because your case is very interesting because it’s the altruism that is actually causing you to be profitable also. It’s like a self fulfilling prophecy.

Kenric: Correct yeah. And I think that’s because people, I think people are inherently good, they want to do good things, and they will support good people and good companies, right?

Steve: Yeah.

Kenric: And so I think a lot of this is hindsight after running this company for a few years, but it’s not something I saw like to start with, right. And yeah, I believe 100% in what you just said. It’s definitely I think that’s just the way it is with society right now.

Steve: Yeah, well Kenric, once again, everyone who’s listening, MaxandNeo.com. All proceeds, basically you buy something, he donates that exact same thing to a shelter or rescue. Kenric; thanks a lot for coming on the show, man.

Kenric: Sure. And also just – sorry, last thing. If you guys have any rescues that you want to add on to our list, go to our website, and go to the ‘suggest a rescue’ button, because we want to add as many rescues as possible. Sorry Steve.

Steve: No worries man, we’re good friends so it’s all good. All right, take care, man.

Kenric: Thanks a lot and thanks for having me on.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. I’ve known Kenric for a very long time, and he’s generally not the most expressive guy, but I’ve never heard him so passionate about a business before and I’m happy that he’s found his calling. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode234.

And once again, I want to thank Privy for sponsoring this episode. Privy is the email capture provider that I personally use to turn visitors into email subscribers. They offer email capture, exit intent, and site targeting tools to make it super simple as well. And I like Privy because it’s so powerful and you can basically trigger custom pop-ups for any primer that is closely tied to your ecommerce store. If you want to give it a try, it is free. So, head on over to Privy.com/Steve, once again, that’s P-R-I-V-Y.com/Steve.

I also want to thank Klaviyo which is my email marketing platform of choice for ecommerce merchants. You can easily put together automated flows like an abandoned cart sequence, a post-purchase flow, a win-back campaign, basically all these sequences that will make you money on autopilot. So, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, once again, that’s mywifequitherjob.com/K-L-A-V-I-Y-O.

Now I talk about how I use all these tools on my blog, and if you’re interested in starting your own e-commerce store, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six-day mini course. Just type in your email and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.Mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!